JP6923191B2 - Mobile terminals, programs, and information management systems - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a mobile terminal or the like that receives a signal from a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine.

Gaming machines are newly manufactured and installed in hall stores, but gaming machines distributed on the market as used gaming machines are also installed in hall stores. In addition, popular models may be bought and sold with a premiere. It is very important to manage the distribution process of the gaming machines traded in such a used market in order to control the popularity, legitimacy, quality and the like of the gaming machines.

For example, in the management system of Patent Document 1, ID information is acquired by reading an IC tag attached to a main control device of a gaming machine, and the ID information is collated with management data held by each manufacturer. Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine is genuine. Further, in this management system, if the board box related to the main control device is illegally opened, the antenna member of the IC tag is cut off, and the ID information cannot be acquired (or is difficult to acquire). ..

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-390

However, in the management system of Patent Document 1, information for identifying the gaming machine (for example, ID information) is accumulated and managed together with information indicating the hall store where the gaming machine is installed, the installation period, and the like. Therefore, it is not possible to grasp what kind of distribution process the gaming machine is undergoing.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a mobile terminal, a program, and an information management system capable of managing the distribution process of a gaming machine by receiving a signal from each gaming machine by the mobile terminal.

The present invention provides the following mobile terminals, programs, and information management systems.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A wireless signal receiving means (for example, a wireless signal receiving antenna 1707, and a wireless signal receiving antenna 1707) that receives a signal transmitted by wireless communication (for example, wireless communication based on the BLE standard) from an apparatus (for example, a game machine 1300a, a data display device 300a, etc.). Main CPU1701) and
With a gaming machine information acquisition means (for example, main CPU 1701) that acquires gaming machine identification information (for example, a gaming machine ID) for identifying a gaming machine associated with the device from a signal received by the wireless signal receiving means. ,
The hall store identification information (for example,) that can identify the hall store in which the game machine is arranged is the game machine identification information acquired by the wireless signal receiving means so that the game machine can be managed for each hall store. , And the gaming machine information transmitting means (for example, the wireless communication antenna 1705 and the main CPU 1701) to be transmitted to the server (for example, the information management server 1100) together with the hall store ID for identifying the hall store where the gaming machine is arranged. a mobile terminal Ru provided with (e.g., mobile terminal 1700),
The wireless signal receiving means is configured to be able to sequentially receive the signals from the plurality of devices by moving the mobile terminal.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the hall store ID is transmitted to the information management server and stored together with the gaming machine ID received from the gaming machine by the mobile terminal, thereby managing the distribution process of the gaming machine in chronological order. This makes it possible to create effective quality control and manufacturing / distribution strategies for gaming machines.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
Mobile terminal,
A wireless signal receiving means for receiving a signal transmitted by wireless communication from a device,
A gaming machine information acquisition means for acquiring gaming machine identification information for identifying a gaming machine associated with the device from a signal received by the wireless signal receiving means, and a gaming machine information acquisition means.
The game machine identification information acquired by the wireless signal receiving means is stored in a server together with the hall store identification information capable of identifying the hall store in which the game machine is arranged so that the game machine can be managed for each hall store. A program that functions as a means for transmitting gaming machine information (for example, a program that is downloaded from a predetermined server to the mobile terminal 1700 and installed on the mobile terminal 1700) .
The wireless signal receiving means is configured to sequentially receive the signals from the plurality of devices by moving the mobile terminal.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the hall store ID is transmitted to the information management server and stored together with the gaming machine ID received from the gaming machine by the mobile terminal, thereby managing the distribution process of the gaming machine in chronological order. This makes it possible to create effective quality control and manufacturing / distribution strategies for gaming machines.

The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A device that transmits signals by wireless communication,
An information management system (for example, information management system 1001) including a server (for example, an information management server 1100) that receives information about a game machine from a mobile terminal.
The device transmits game machine identification information for identifying the game machine associated with the device by the wireless communication.
When the server receives the game machine identification information transmitted by the device from the mobile terminal together with the hall store identification information capable of identifying the hall store in which the game machine is located, the server stores the game machine in the hall store. In order to manage each of them, the storage means (for example, information representing the date and time acquired by the mobile terminal 1700 or the information management server 1100) is associated with the game machine identification information, the hall store identification information, and the date and time information (for example, information representing the date and time acquired by the mobile terminal 1700 or the information management server 1100). For example, it is stored in the game machine distribution management table 1154).
The mobile terminal is configured to be able to sequentially receive the signals from the plurality of devices by moving the mobile terminal .

With such a configuration of the present invention, the hall store ID and the date and time information are transmitted and accumulated in the information management server together with the gaming machine ID received from the gaming machine by the mobile terminal, so that the distribution process of the gaming machine is time-series. It is possible to create effective quality control and manufacturing / distribution strategies for gaming machines.

With the mobile terminal or the like of the present invention, the gaming machine ID provided by the wireless signal from each gaming machine is managed on the server in association with the hall store ID and the date and time information, so that the distribution process of the gaming machine can be grasped and the game is played. Effective quality control for machines and creation of manufacturing / distribution strategies will be possible.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the schematic structure of the various display screens displayed on the sub-display device of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the combination ratio monitor in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the microprocessor in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the connection form of the main control circuit and BLE module in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the data display device connected to the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the main control circuit in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state between the bonus state and the non-bonus state of the pachislot in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state between the ART gaming state, the non-ART gaming state, and the bonus state of the pachislot in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on (reset interrupt) processing executed by the main control circuit of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main control circuit of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the combination monitor display switching processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the random number acquisition processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol setting process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the winning search process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the winning check, medal payout processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the combination monitor aggregation processing (non-standard) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the data table used for the combination monitor aggregation processing (non-standard) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the data table used for the combination monitor aggregation processing (non-standard) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of advantageous section aggregation processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the ratio calculation data setting processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the ratio calculation process (approximate value expression) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the ratio calculation process (approximate value expression) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the payout number totaling process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medium time aggregation processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interrupt process executed by the main control circuit of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the combination monitor display management processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the combination monitor display management processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the combination monitor display management processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the role ratio information transmission in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BLE transmission control processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the connection form of the main control circuit and a BLE module in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the combination element data transmission processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BLE transmission control processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the situation which the combination element data is transmitted from the main control circuit to the BLE module in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the loading process in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the data storage process in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the connection form of the main control circuit and BLE module in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the sand device in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation unit of the sand apparatus in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the information management server in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the mobile terminal in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the hall computer in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sand apparatus in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the island edge counting apparatus in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of POS in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the hall management terminal in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a functional block diagram of the information management server in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a functional block diagram of the mobile terminal in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table used in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table used in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the layout of the hall store which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the outline of the role ratio information display control processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination ratio information display screen in the combination ratio information display control processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the role ratio information display control processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination ratio information display screen in the combination ratio information display control processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination ratio information display screen in the combination ratio information display control processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination ratio information display screen in the combination ratio information display control processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination ratio information display screen in the combination ratio information display control processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination ratio information display screen in the combination ratio information display control processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the role ratio information display control processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transmission timing of the radio signal transmission circuit which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination ratio information display screen in the combination ratio information display control processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table used in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the information management system which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the connection form of the main control circuit and BLE module which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table used in the information management system which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game machine distribution management processing which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the information management system which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the connection form of the main control circuit and BLE module which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table used in the information management system which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game machine situation transmission processing which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the gaming machine situation check processing which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the information management system which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table used in the information management system which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game information management processing which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game information management processing which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game information management processing which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the information management system which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table used in the information management system which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of privilege management processing which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of privilege management processing which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the information management system which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table used in the information management system which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of AR display management processing which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the camera image display screen in the AR display management processing which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the information management system which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the arrangement form of the wireless signal transmission device in the hall store which concerns on tenth embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table used in the information management system which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the notification information management processing which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the information management system which concerns on 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the information management system which concerns on 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the wireless communication control processing which concerns on 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the information management system which concerns on the twelfth embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the radio signal transmission mode of the radio signal transmission device used in the information management system which concerns on the twelfth embodiment of this invention.

<< First Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine having a bonus operation function and an ART function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted into the pachislot machine by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations are those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "missing". Such things are provided. In the following, the role related to the payout of medals will be referred to as a "small role", and the role related to the operation of the replay (replay) will be referred to as a "replay role". In addition, the role related to the operation of the bonus (bonus game) is also referred to as a "bonus role".

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. conduct. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". Then, in the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols to the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along the line. Further, the reel stop control means uses a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the combination of the displayed symbols is related to the winning, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. In pachislot, the above series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

Further, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, various effects are produced by displaying an image by a display device, outputting light by various lamps, outputting sound by a speaker, or a combination of these. Is done.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random value for production is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random value for the production is extracted, the production content determining means determines the production to be executed this time from a plurality of types of production contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in the sub-control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in pachislot, for example, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) is a game. It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body (game machine main body) 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b to which an opening of the cabinet 2a can be opened and closed.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means, display row) are provided side by side in a horizontal row. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (main reel) is also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction (rotation direction of the reel).

The front door 2b includes a lock 5, a door body 9, a front panel 10, a lumbar panel 12, and a pedestal 13. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachislot machine 1. Further, the door body 9 is locked (locked) by using the lock 5 (that is, the front door 2b is maintained in the closed state and is restricted from being in the open state). The lock 5 is provided at the right end of the door body 9 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachislot machine 1, and the front door is unlocked by using a door key (not shown). 2b is set to the open state. As the locking mechanism (locking device) of the front door 2b, another locking mechanism (for example, a locking device by electronic authentication) can be adopted.

The front panel 10 is provided on the upper part of the door body 9. The front panel 10 is composed of a frame-shaped member having an opening 10a. The opening 10a of the front panel 10 is closed by the display device cover 30, and the display device cover 30 is arranged to face the display device 11 which will be described later and is arranged inside the cabinet 2a.

The display device cover 30 is made of a black translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 described later through the display device cover 30. Further, in the present embodiment, by forming the display device cover 30 with a black translucent synthetic resin, the entry of external light into the cabinet 2a is suppressed, and the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 is suppressed. Is clearly visible.

A lamp group 21 is provided on the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, lamps 21a and 21b provided on the upper part of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side. Each lamp constituting the lamp group 21 is composed of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like (see LED group 85 in FIG. 6 described later), and lights are turned on and off in a pattern corresponding to the effect content.

The waist panel 12 is provided at a substantially central portion of the door body 9. The waist panel 12 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source (LED included in the LED group 85 described later) that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

The pedestal portion 13 is provided between the front panel 10 and the lumbar panel 12. The pedestal portion 13 has a symbol display area 4, various devices to be operated by the player (medal insertion slot 14, MAX bet button 15a, 1 bet button 15b, start lever 16, 3 stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, settlement button (not shown), etc.) are provided.

The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position on the player side of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the three reels. It has a size that makes 3L, 3C, and 3R visible. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the symbol display area 4 can be visually recognized. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

The reel display window 4 is arranged continuously among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped. It is configured so that one symbol is displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, one symbol is provided in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 (three in total). ) Is displayed (in the frame of the reel display window 4, the design is displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns). Then, in the present embodiment, in the frame of the reel display window 4, a pseudo line (center line) connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R is formed. It is defined as an effective line for determining whether or not a prize has been won.

The reel display window 4 is formed by the opening of the frame member 31 provided in the pedestal portion 13. Further, a pedestal region having a substantially horizontal plane is provided below the frame member 31 that defines the reel display window 4. When viewed from the player side, the medal insertion slot 14 is provided on the right side of the pedestal area, and the MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are provided on the left side.

The medal slot 14 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 14 are used in one game up to a preset predetermined number (for example, 3), and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. (So-called credit function (game medium storage means)).

The MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are provided to determine the number of medals to be used for one game from the medals deposited inside the cabinet 2a. Inside the MAX bet button 15a, a bet button LED (not shown) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided. In addition, the settlement button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

When the player presses the MAX bet button 15a, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1-bet button 15b is pressed once. When the 1-bet button 15b is operated three times, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated.

In the following, the operation of the MAX bet button 15a, the operation of the 1-bet button 15b, and the operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 14 (operations of inserting medals to perform a game) are all referred to as "insertion operations".

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are also referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, an information display 6 is provided at substantially the center of the pedestal region on the substantially horizontal plane below the reel display window 4. The information display 6 is covered with a transparent window cover (not shown).

The information display 6 is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information on the number of medals to be paid out to the player (hereinafter referred to as "the number of medals to be paid out") as a privilege. For digitally displaying (notifying) information such as (hereinafter referred to as "7-segment LED") and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as "credit number") to the player. A 2-digit 7-segment LED is provided. In the present embodiment, the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information on the occurrence of an error and the error type to the player. Is also used. Therefore, when an error occurs, the display mode of the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is switched from the display mode of the number of medals to be paid out to the display mode of the information of the error type.

Further, the information display 6 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on the stop operation necessary for displaying the symbol combination according to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. ing. The instruction monitor (instruction display) is composed of, for example, a 2-digit 7-segment LED. Then, the instruction monitor notifies the player of the necessary stop operation information by turning on, blinking, or turning off the two-digit 7-segment LED in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the stop operation information to be notified. do.

As shown in FIG. 6 described later, the information display 6 is electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the game operation display board 81, and the display operation of the information display 6 is mainly performed. It is controlled by the main control circuit 90 described later in the control board 71. Further, the control method of the various 7-segment LEDs described above is dynamic lighting control.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, another means controlled by the sub-control board 72 is used to notify the information of the stop operation. Specifically, the information on the stop operation is notified by the display device 11 described later, which is composed of the projector mechanism 211 and the display unit 212 (see FIGS. 3 and 6 described later) described later.

When such a configuration is applied, the mode of notification in the instruction monitor and the mode of notification in other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be different from each other. That is, in the instruction monitor, the information of the stop operation to be notified may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, the numerical value "1" in the instruction monitor. Even if is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, so it cannot be said that the notification is direct). On the other hand, in the notification on the sub side (sub control board side) by other means such as the display device 11 described later, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order "1st" is notified, the instruction monitor displays a numerical value "1" that uniquely corresponds to the push order to be notified, but other means (for example, the display device 11 or the like) display the left reel 3L. The instruction information for performing the first stop operation may be directly notified to the user.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 having such a configuration, it is possible to notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination not only by the control of the sub control board 72 but also by the control of the main control board 71. Further, the presence / absence of notification of such stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. For example, in the general gaming state (non-ART gaming state) described later, the stop operation information may not be notified, but in the ART gaming state (see FIG. 15 described later), the stop operation information may be notified.

Further, a sub display device 18 is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the player side. As shown in FIG. 2, the sub-display device 18 is provided so as to stand substantially perpendicular to the pedestal region of the pedestal portion 13 in the substantially horizontal plane of the front portion of the door body 9. The sub-display device 18 is composed of a liquid crystal display and an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and displays various information.

Further, a touch sensor 19 is provided on the display surface of the sub display device 18 (see FIG. 6 described later). The touch sensor 19 operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives an operation of a player, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of enabling the display of the sub-display device 18 to be switched according to the player's operation (touch input information output from the touch sensor 19) received via the touch sensor 19. Has. The sub display device 18 is controlled by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 6 described later) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 19.

At the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout outlet 24, a medal tray 25, two speaker holes 20L, 20R, and the like are provided. The medal payout outlet 24 guides the medal discharged by driving the medal payout device (hereinafter, referred to as a hopper device) 51, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 24. Further, sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the production are output from the two speaker holes 20L and 20R.

Further, a data display device 100 is arranged on the upper part of the exterior body 2 of the pachislot machine 1. The data display device 100 receives various signals transmitted from the main control board 71, and displays various contents and displays various effects accordingly.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet 2a, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the front door 2b on the back surface side.

As shown in FIG. 3, the cabinet 2a has a top plate 27a, a bottom plate 27b, left and right side plates 27c and 27d, and a back plate 27e. A display device 11 is arranged on the upper part of the cabinet 2a.

The display device 11 has a projector mechanism 211 and a box-shaped projected member 212a on which the image light projected from the projector mechanism 211 is projected, and displays an image by projection mapping. Specifically, the display device 11 generates image light based on the position (projection distance, angle, etc.) and shape of the projected member 212a, which is a three-dimensional object, and the image light is emitted by the projector mechanism 211 to the projected member. It is projected on the surface of 212a. By providing such an effect function, it is possible to perform an advanced and powerful effect. Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, another projected member having a curved display surface is provided on the back side of the box-shaped projected member 212a, and one of the projected members is provided depending on the gaming state. , Used as a screen on which video light is projected. Therefore, the inside of the cabinet 2a is also provided with a function (not shown) for switching the projected member according to the gaming state.

A medal payout device 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged in the lower part of the cabinet 2a.

The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 27b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds, for example, 50, or when the settlement button is pressed and the settlement of medals is executed. Then, the medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 24 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. Further, the medal auxiliary storage 52 is detachably attached to the bottom plate 27b of the cabinet 2a.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (power supply means) (see FIG. 6 described later). The power supply device 53 is arranged on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 27c. The power supply device 53 converts the AC voltage 100V power supplied from the sub power supply device (not shown) into the DC voltage power required by each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

Further, above the power supply device 53 in the cabinet 2a, a sub-control board case 56 for accommodating the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 6 described later) is arranged. A sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 10 to be described later) described later is mounted on the sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 56. The sub-control circuit 200 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described later.

The sub-relay board 61 is arranged above the sub-control board case 56 in the cabinet 2a. The sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 and the main control board 71, which will be described later, is mounted. Further, the sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 and the boards arranged around the sub-control board 72, various device units (units), and the like is mounted.

Further, above the medal auxiliary storage 52 in the cabinet 2a, an external centralized terminal plate case 46 for accommodating the external centralized terminal plate 47 is arranged. The external centralized terminal board 47 is a board provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, a security signal, and a signal indicating role ratio information to the outside of the pachislot machine 1, and is simply referred to as an external terminal board. It may be done.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a cabinet-side relay board 44 (see FIG. 6 described later) is arranged in the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later), a hopper device 51, a game medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (see FIG. 6 described later), and a medal payout count switch (not shown). It is a relay board on which wiring for connecting to and is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 4, a middle door 41 is arranged at the center of the front door 2b on the back surface side, and a reel display window 4 (see FIG. 2) is attached so as to be openable and closable from the back side. Although not shown in FIG. 4, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are attached to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41, and the main control is on the side opposite to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41. A main control board case 55 in which the board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later) is housed is attached. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

Further, the main control board case 55 is made of a transparent member, and when the front door 2b is in the open state, the role ratio monitor 95 (ratio display means) becomes visible as shown in FIG. Therefore, the combination ratio monitor is configured to display predetermined ratio information. The role ratio monitor 95 will be described in detail later.

The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 90 (see FIG. 7 described later) described later. The main control circuit 90 (main control means) is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot machine 1, such as determining the internal winning combination, rotating and stopping the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and determining whether or not there is a prize. .. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, control such as lottery processing of presence / absence of ART determination, display processing of navigation information on the instruction monitor, transmission processing of various test signals, display processing of ratio information on the role ratio monitor 95, and the like is also performed. This is done by the main control circuit 90. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 90 will be described later.

Speakers 65L and 65R are arranged below the middle door 41 on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The speakers 65L and 65R are arranged at positions facing the speaker holes 20L and 20R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

A selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are arranged above the speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, and the like of medals are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 to the hopper device 51. A medal sensor (game medium detecting means: not shown) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged diagonally to the lower left of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side. The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is arranged on the back surface of the front door 2b, which is a region opened and closed by the middle door 41 and below the reel display window 4 (FIG. 4 described later). 6). The door relay terminal board 68 is provided with wiring for connecting the main control board 71 in the main control board case 55 to each of various buttons and switches, the sub relay board 61, the selector 66, and the game operation display board 81. It is a relay board. Examples of the various buttons and switches include the MAX bet button 15a, the 1-bet button 15b, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, the BET switch 77 described later, the start switch 79, and the like.

<Display example of sub display device>
Here, various display screens displayed on the sub-display device 18 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5E. 5A is a diagram showing a top screen 221 displayed on the sub display device 18, and FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a menu screen 222 displayed on the sub display device 18. 5C to 5E are diagrams showing game information screens 223, 224, and 225 displayed on the sub display device 18.

Various display screens are displayed on the sub display device 18 by a player's touch operation, and as shown in FIGS. 5A to 5E, various display screens including a top screen 221 and a menu screen 222 and a game information screen 223, 224, 225 are included. The display screen is displayed. These display screens are switched based on the player's operation signal received via the touch sensor 19.

The top screen 221 is an initial screen among the display screens displayed on the sub display device 18, and the top screen 221 displays the “MENU” button 221a and the outline game history 221b. The "MENU" button 221a is an operation button for calling the menu screen 222 shown in FIG. 5B, and when a predetermined operation (for example, tap) by the player is performed on the "MENU" button 221a, the menu screen 222 is called. Is done. Further, on the top screen 221, a part of the game history (summary game history) of the pachislot machine 1 is displayed as the summary game history 221b. In the present embodiment, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) are displayed as the outline game history 221b.

The menu screen 222 is a screen for displaying a menu that can be displayed on the sub display device 18, and on the menu screen 222, the “back” button 222a, the “registration” button 222b, the “explanation” button 222c, and the “array dividend” button 222d , The "reach eye" button 222e, the "WEB site" button 222f, and the "volume" button 222g are displayed. The "back" button 222a is an operation button for calling the top screen 221. When the player operates the "back" button 222a, the top screen 221 is called. Further, the "register" button 222b to the "volume" button 222g are operation buttons for calling the display screen of the corresponding menu content, and when the player operates each button, the corresponding menu content is displayed. The display screen is called.

Since the sub-display device 18 is provided separately from the above-mentioned display device 11 (projector mechanism 211 and display unit 212), it can be controlled separately from the display device 11. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display screen of the sub-display device 18 can be switched by the operation of the player even during the game (during the execution of the effect by the display device 11). As a result, for example, when the player wants to know the character appearing in the production of the display device 11, the player operates the "explanation" button 222c to call the explanation screen, and the inter-characters. Information such as the relationship between the two can be grasped during the game. Also, for example, when the player wants to grasp the symbol that should be used as a guide for winning the rare role during the reel rotation when the so-called "rare role" is won during the game, the player may ask. By operating the "arrangement payout" button 222d to call the arrangement payout screen, the reel arrangement can be grasped.

The game information screens 223, 224, and 225 are display screens that display detailed game history information including an outline game history to be displayed on the top screen 221 of the game history of the pachislot machine 1.

On the game information screen 223, a "back" button 223a, a "MENU" button 223b, a "previous" button 223c, a "next" button 223d, and a game history 223e are displayed. The "back" button 223a and the "MENU" button 223b are operation buttons for calling the top screen 221 and the menu screen 222 to the display screen of the sub display device 18, respectively, and are supported by the player operating each button. The display screen is called. Further, the "previous" button 223c and the "next" button 223d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order, and when the "previous" button 223c is operated by the player, the display screen is displayed. Is switched from the game information screen 223 to the game information screen 225, and when the "Next" button 223d is operated by the player, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 223 to the game information screen 224. Further, as the game history 223e, as shown in FIG. 5C, the number of games (number of games), the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of CZs (chance zones) are displayed.

On the game information screen 224, a "back" button 224a, a "MENU" button 224b, a "previous" button 224c, a "next" button 224d, and a game history 214e are displayed. The "back" button 224a and the "MENU" button 224b are operation buttons for calling the top screen 221 and the menu screen 222 to the display screen of the sub display device 18, respectively, and are supported by the player operating each button. The display screen is called. Further, the "previous" button 224c and the "next" button 224d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order, and when the "previous" button 224c is operated by the player, the display screen is displayed for the game. When the information screen 224 is switched to the game information screen 223 and the "Next" button 224d is operated by the player, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 224 to the game information screen 225. Further, as the game history 224e, the number of times of entry and the number of successes of CZ (chance zone) described later are displayed. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, three types of CZs, CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3, are provided as CZs. Therefore, as the game history 224e, as shown in FIG. 5D, the number of rushes and the number of successes of each of CZ1 to CZ3 are displayed.

On the game information screen 225, a "back" button 225a, a "MENU" button 225b, a "previous" button 225c, a "next" button 225d, and a game history 225e are displayed. The "back" button 225a and the "MENU" button 225b are operation buttons for calling the top screen 221 and the menu screen 222 to the display screen of the sub display device 18, respectively, and are supported by the player operating each button. The display screen is called. Further, the "previous" button 225c and the "next" button 225d are operation buttons for switching the game information screens in a predetermined order, and when the "previous" button 225c is operated by the player, the display screen is displayed. Is switched from the game information screen 225 to the game information screen 224, and when the "Next" button 225d is operated by the player, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 225 to the game information screen 223. Further, as the game history 225e, as shown in FIG. 5E, the number of winnings of the small winning combination and the winning probability (fraction of the numerator of 1) are displayed.

As a display screen switching method displayed on the sub-display device 18, for example, a method of switching based on a tap operation for an operation button displayed on each display screen may be adopted, or, for example, a method of switching may be adopted. A method of switching based on a swipe operation on the display screen may be adopted.

<Control system provided by pachislot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 54 (setting switch), and a cabinet-side relay board 44 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a game medal auxiliary storage switch 75, a reset switch 76, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet-side relay board 44. Since the configuration of the hopper device 51 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 74 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The setting key type switch 54 is provided on the main control board case 55. The setting key type switch 54 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot 1 (settings 1 to 6) or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1.

The cabinet-side relay board 44 is a relay on which wiring for connecting the main control board 71, the external centralized terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, the game medal auxiliary storage switch 75, the reset switch 76, and the power supply device 53 is mounted. It is a board.

A data display device 300 is connected to the external centralized terminal board 47, and a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal are transmitted to the data display device 300. Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, for example, a BLE (Bluetooth (registered trademark) Low Energy) module is arranged on the substrate of the external centralized terminal plate 47. The BLE module receives the combination ratio information and the information related to the combination ratio expression from the main control board 71, and controls the BLE module to transmit the information to the outside by a beacon signal according to the BLE standard. With such a beacon signal, one-way communication (unidirectional communication) is basically realized, and depending on the security level, communication can be performed without pairing.

The game medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52, and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals. The reset switch 76 is used, for example, when changing the setting of the pachislot machine 1.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b and a power supply switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1. The power supply board 53b is connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44, and is also connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, and a settlement switch 78, which are connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68 and the door relay terminal plate 68. It has a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, and a sub-relay board 61. Since the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub-relay board 61 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The BET switch 77 (throwing operation detecting means) detects that the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b is pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating main reel and a circuit for displaying the stoptable main reel by an LED or the like. Further, the stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch (not shown). The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display (7-segment display) 6 and the LED 82. The LED 82 has, for example, three LEDs (hereinafter, "first LED" to "1st LED") for displaying the number of medals inserted, which are lit according to the number of medals inserted in this game (hereinafter referred to as "the number of inserted medals"). An LED that lights a mark indicating that medals can be inserted, a mark indicating the start of a game, a mark for replaying a game, etc., based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81 (referred to as "third LED"). Etc. are included. In the first LED to the third LED (display means), when one medal is inserted, the first LED lights up, and when two medals are inserted, the first and second LEDs light up, and three medals (game). When the number of startable medals is turned on, the first LED to the third LED are turned on. Since the information display 6 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub-relay board 61. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a speaker group 84, an LED group 85, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63, a touch sensor 19 and a display unit 212 connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61. Since the touch sensor 19 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The speaker group 84 includes speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown). The LED group 85 includes a lamp group 21 provided on the front panel 10, a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel of the waist panel 12 from the back side, and the like. The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 stores the open / close history information of the middle door 41. Further, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 200) when the middle door 41 is opened. The display unit 212 includes, for example, a projected member 212a constituting the display device 11 and another projected member having a curved display surface provided on the back side of the projected member 212a.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge board 86 and a liquid crystal relay board 87 connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are housed in the sub-control board case 57 together with the sub-control board 72.

The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, image (video) for production, audio (speaker group 84), light (LED group 85), and communication data. .. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72, the projector mechanism 211 constituting the display device 11, and the sub-display device 18. Since the projector mechanism 211 and the sub-display device 18 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 90 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 90 of the pachislot machine 1.

The main control circuit 90 includes a microprocessor 91, a clock pulse generation circuit 92, a power supply management circuit 93, a switching regulator 94 (power supply means), and a role ratio monitor 95 (ratio display means).

The microprocessor 91 is a microprocessor with a security function for a gaming machine. In the microprocessor 91 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, various instruction codes specific to the microprocessor 91 that can be specified in the source program (for example, "LDQ" instruction and the like described later: hereinafter, "main CPU 101". Dedicated instruction code ") is provided. In the present embodiment, the processing efficiency and the reduction of the program capacity are realized by using the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101. The internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 9 described later, and the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101 provided in the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail in various processes executed by the main control circuit described later. do.

The clock pulse generation circuit 92 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU, and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the microprocessor 91. The microprocessor 91 executes a control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

The power supply management circuit 93 manages fluctuations in the DC 12V power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 53b (see FIG. 6). Then, the power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal to the "XSRST" terminal of the microprocessor 91, for example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the starting voltage value (10V) from 0V). When a power failure occurs (when the power supply voltage falls below the power failure voltage value (10.5V) from 12V), the power failure detection signal is output to the "XINT" terminal of the microprocessor 91. That is, the power management circuit 93 is a means (starting means) for outputting a reset signal (starting signal) to the microprocessor 91 when the power is turned on, and a power failure detection signal (power failure signal) to the microprocessor 91 when a power failure occurs. Also serves as a means for outputting (power failure means).

The switching regulator 94 is a DC / DC conversion circuit, generates a DC drive voltage (power supply voltage of DC 5 V) of the microprocessor 91, and outputs the generated DC drive voltage to the “VCC” terminal of the microprocessor 91.

<Structure of role ratio monitor>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the configuration of the role ratio monitor 95 (see FIGS. 4 and 7) connected to the microprocessor 91 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the combination monitor 95. As shown in the configuration example in FIG. 8, the role ratio monitor 95 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED circuit, and is a calculation circuit described later with respect to the aggregation result related to the game information aggregated by the main CPU 101 described later. 107 performs a predetermined ratio calculation, and displays the result of the ratio calculation as ratio information. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of ratio calculations are performed as predetermined ratio calculations (see FIGS. 27 to 35 described later), and the combination ratio monitor 95 sequentially displays a plurality of types of ratio information based on the results. (See FIGS. 37 to 39 described later).

In the upper two digits of the role ratio monitor 95, "abbreviation" which is the type information indicating the type of the ratio information is displayed, and in the lower two digits, the "ratio" which is the ratio information corresponding to the type information. Is displayed. For example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor 95 and "U" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "7U"). (When is displayed), in the lower two digits of the combination ratio monitor 95, the ART function that occupies the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) is activated (that is, advantageous for the player) as the ratio information. The ratio of the number of games (advantageous section ratio) of the advantageous section in which the procedure of the stop operation was notified is displayed. Specifically, when the effective section ratio is 10%, "1" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "0" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "6" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor 95 and "Y" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, abbreviation). (When "6Y" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the combination monitor 95, as ratio information, a combination that accounts for the number of game media paid out during a specific total number of games (6000 times). Object continuous actuating device (BB in the present embodiment. In addition, when the accessory continuous actuating device (MB) in which the second type special accessory (CB) is continuously operated is mounted, it is included. The same shall apply hereinafter. ) Is activated and the ratio of the number of game media paid out (medium-time continuous combination ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the medium-time continuous combination ratio is 59%, "5" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "9" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor 95 and "Y" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, abbreviation). (When "7Y" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the role ratio monitor 95, as ratio information, all of the number of game media paid out during a specific total number of games (6000 times). (BB in this embodiment. In addition to the above-mentioned MB, when the above-mentioned first-class special accessory (RB) is mounted alone, the above-mentioned second-class special accessory (CB) is installed. When mounted alone, when a normal bonus (SB) is mounted, all of them are included. The same shall apply hereinafter) and the ratio of the number of game media paid out (medium-time role) Object ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the medium-time bonus ratio is 59%, "5" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "9" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "6" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor 95 and "A" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, abbreviation). (When "6A" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the role ratio monitor 95, as ratio information, a combination that occupies the number of game media paid out during a predetermined total number of games (175,000 times). The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the object continuous operation device (total continuous combination ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the total joint combination ratio is 25%, "2" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "5" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor 95 and "A" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, abbreviation). (When "7A" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the role ratio monitor 95, as ratio information, all of the number of game media paid out during the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times). The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the accessory (total accessory ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the total accessory ratio is 25%, "2" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "5" in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the main control circuit 90 directly includes the combination monitor 95 is described as an example, but the display content of the combination monitor 95 is controlled by the main control circuit 90. Further, it is sufficient if the display content can be recognized when necessary (for example, when the main control board case 55 is visually recognized), and a configuration that the main control circuit 90 does not directly provide can be adopted. For example, the combination monitor 95 may be connected to the game operation display board 81, and the main control circuit 90 may control the display contents via the game operation display board 81. Further, in this case, the role ratio monitor 95 is also used as the information display 6, the LED 82, or the instruction monitor (instruction display), and one or more of them are used to display predetermined ratio information. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the predetermined ratio information displayed on the combination ratio monitor 95, the advantageous section ratio, the medium-time continuous combination ratio, the medium-time bonus ratio, the total consecutive combination ratio, and the total bonus ratio are given as examples. However, ratio information other than these may be displayed. For example, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the ART function to the number of game media paid out during the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) (total advantageous section acquisition ratio). , The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the ART function to the number of game media paid out during a specific total number of games (6000 times) (medium time advantageous section acquisition ratio) , The ratio of the number of games in which the character continuous operation device is activated (the ratio of the middle-time continuous combination section) to the specific total number of games (6000 times), and the ratio of the specific total number of games (6000 times). The ratio of the number of games in which all the bonuses are activated (medium-time bonus section ratio), and the ratio of the number of games in which the continuous bonus activator is activated to the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) (total continuous combination section) The ratio), the ratio of the number of games in which all the bonuses are operated (total bonus section ratio), etc., among the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) can also be displayed by performing the predetermined ratio calculation.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the parameter (denominator) of the predetermined ratio information displayed on the combination ratio monitor 95, the predetermined total number of games is set to "175,000 times" and the specific total number of games is set to "6000 times". As explained, the predetermined total number of games and the specific total number of games are not limited to this. For example, as the parameter (denominator) for calculating a part or all of the various ratios described above, the predetermined total number of games may be set to "17,500 times" and the specific total number of games may be set to "3000 times". .. However, various types of gaming machines are installed and operated in game stores, and the optimum number of games for ratio calculation may differ. Therefore, the number of each game for calculating the various ratios described above is described above. It is not limited to the ones that have been made, but can be changed as appropriate. In this case, the number of games that can be the parameter (denominator) and the number of children (numerator) for calculating a part or all of the various ratios can be arbitrarily set on the game store side. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the ART function is not included in all the accessories targeted in the medium-time bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio, but the operation of the ART function is a bonus. It is also possible to calculate the ratio of the medium-time bonus and the total bonus ratio by regarding the operation of. In addition, it goes without saying that even if the information is other than the above, as long as it is useful information, the two values can be aggregated and the ratio calculation can be performed, and the result of the ratio calculation can be displayed as the ratio information. No.

<Microprocessor>
Next, the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the microprocessor 91.

The microprocessor 91 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (first storage means), a main RAM 103 (second storage means), an external bus interface 104, a clock circuit 105, a reset controller 106, an arithmetic circuit 107, and the like. It has a random number circuit 110, a parallel port 111, an interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 113, and a first serial communication circuit 114. Each of these parts constituting the microprocessor 91 is connected to each other via a signal bus 116.

The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the clock pulse generated by the clock circuit 105 to perform control related to the overall game operation. Here, reel stop control will be described as an example of the control operation of the main CPU 101.

The main CPU 101 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 101 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position on each reel and interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion due to rotation of each main reel. It is detected by the provided reel position detection unit (not shown).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 103. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 103 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program. The internal configuration (memory map) of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

The external bus interface 104 is for electrically connecting the microprocessor 91 to an external signal bus (not shown) to which various components (for example, reels and the like) provided outside the microprocessor 91 are connected. It is an interface circuit. The clock circuit 105 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown), and a clock pulse signal for CPU operation input from the clock pulse generation circuit 92 is transmitted by another component (for example, a timer circuit 113). Convert to a clock pulse signal of the frequency used. The clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is also output to the reset controller 106.

The reset controller 106 resets the IAT (Illegal Address Trap) and the WDT (watchdog timer) based on the reset signal input from the power supply management circuit 93. The arithmetic circuit 107 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. For example, when executing the "MUL (multiplication)" instruction described later on the source program, the arithmetic circuit 107 executes the multiplication process based on the "MUL" instruction.

The random number circuit 110 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Although not shown, the random number circuit 110 has random number registers 0 for obtaining 2-byte hard-latch random numbers, random number registers 1 to 3 for obtaining 2-byte soft-latch random numbers, and 1-byte soft-latch random numbers. It is composed of random number registers 4 to 7 for obtaining. The main CPU 101 extracts one value from the random numbers in a predetermined range generated by the random number circuit 110, for example, as a random number value for internal lottery. The parallel port 111 is a signal port (memory map I / O) input / output between the microprocessor 91 and various circuits (for example, power management circuit 93, etc.) provided outside the microprocessor 91. .. The parallel port 111 is also connected to the random number circuit 110 and the interrupt controller 112. The start switch 79 is connected to any of the input ports of PI0 to PI4 of the parallel port 111, and when the start switch 79 is turned on (on-edge), a latch signal is sent from the parallel port 111 to the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110. Is output. Then, in the random number circuit 110, the random number register 0 is latched by the input of the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is acquired.

The interrupt controller 112 interrupts processing by the main CPU 101 based on a power failure detection signal input from the power management circuit 93 via the parallel port 111 or a timeout signal input from the timer circuit 113 at a cycle of 1.1172 ms. Controls the execution timing of. When a power failure detection signal is input from the power management circuit 93, or when a timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 113, the interrupt controller 112 sends an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the main CPU 101. Output to. The main CPU 101 has an input port check process, a reel control process, a communication data transmission process, a 7-segment LED drive process, and a timer based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 112 in response to a timeout signal from the timer circuit 113. Various interrupt processing such as update processing (see FIG. 36 described later) is performed.

The timer circuit 113 (PTC) operates with a clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 (a clock pulse signal having a frequency obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU by a divider (not shown)) ( Count the elapsed time). Then, the timer circuit 113 outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 112 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec.

The first serial communication circuit 114 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when data (various control commands (commands)) are transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72.

<Secondary control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-control means) mounted on the sub-control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 200 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub-control circuit 200 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 90, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The sub-control circuit 200 basically includes a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 202, a rendering processor 203, a drawing RAM 204, and a driver 205.

The sub CPU 201 is connected to the ROM cartridge board 86. The driver 205 is connected to the liquid crystal relay board 87. That is, the driver 205 is connected to the projector mechanism 211 and the sub-display device 18 via the liquid crystal relay board 87.

The sub CPU 201 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The ROM cartridge board 86 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 201 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, the main board communication task for controlling the communication with the main control circuit 90 and the effect registration for extracting the random value for the effect and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Contains various programs for executing tasks. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task that controls the display of an image by the display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task that controls the output of light by a light source such as the LED group 85, and a sound by the speaker group 84. It also includes various programs for executing voice control tasks and the like that control the output of the LED.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. The data storage area also includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like.

The sub RAM 202 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as a sub flag (internal winning combination) transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

The sub CPU 201, the rendering processor 203, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 204, and the driver 205 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and the driver 205. / Or display on the sub display device 18. The display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and the sub-display device 18 are individually controlled by the sub-control board 72.

Further, the sub CPU 201 causes the speaker group 84 to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 201 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

<Connection form between main control circuit and BLE module>
Next, a connection mode between the main control circuit 90 and the BLE module 49 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a circuit block diagram showing a connection form between the main control circuit 90 and the BLE module 49. As shown in FIG. 6, a cabinet-side relay board 44 is interposed between the main control board 71 including the main control circuit 90 and the external centralized terminal board 47 including the BLE module 49, but is omitted here. do.

In FIG. 11, the main control circuit 90 includes a microprocessor 91 (main CPU 101) and a role ratio monitor 95, where the role ratio monitor 95 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED circuit. When the microprocessor 91 transmits the combination ratio information (output data for the 4-digit 7-segment LED) to the combination ratio monitor 95, the combination ratio monitor 95 lights the 4-digit 7-segment LED accordingly. It is designed to display the role ratio information.

A relay circuit 48 and a BLE module 49 are mounted on the substrate of the external centralized terminal board 47, and the microprocessor 91 transmits a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal (one medal insertion and a medal payout signal) to the external centralized terminal board 47. When one pulse signal is sent for each medal payout), these signals are provided to the external data display device 300 connected to the external centralized terminal board 47 via the relay circuit 48. NS.

The microprocessor 91 also transmits the gaming machine ID and the combination ratio information to the BLE module 49. The BLE module 49 includes a CPU 49a, a ROM 49b, a RAM 49c, and a BLE chip 49d. The CPU 49a controls the BLE chip 49d when receiving data (game machine ID and role ratio information) from the microprocessor 91 based on the program stored in the ROM 49b, and converts these received data into the BLE standard. As a beacon signal, it is wirelessly transmitted from the antenna of the BLE chip 49d. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip 49d can be received by a mobile device such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via a wireless communication network.

In the example of FIG. 11, the microprocessor 91 is configured to be directly connected to the BLE module 49 of the external centralized terminal plate 47 by a cable, but is provided by the microprocessor 91 by various other connection forms. The gaming machine ID and the combination ratio information are transmitted to the CPU 49a of the BLE module 49. For example, as shown by the dotted arrow in FIG. 11, the game machine ID and the role ratio information are obtained by a route using a part of the signal line connecting the microprocessor 91 and the relay circuit 48 of the external centralized terminal plate 47. Can be transmitted from the microprocessor 91 to the CPU 49a.

Here, the gaming machine ID is an identifier that can individually identify a gaming machine such as pachislot 1 (at least, it can be individually identified in a hall store), and is stored in advance in, for example, a program area or data area of the main ROM 102 described later. It is what has been done. The gaming machine ID may be an ID set in association with the gaming machine, or may be an ID associated with identifying the microprocessor 91, the main CPU 101, or the like.

As the gaming machine ID, for example, a "chip individual number" of the main CPU 101 can be assigned. The “chip individual number” is a 4-byte (0 to 4,294,967,295) number assigned to each chip when the chip is manufactured. Since this number is different for each shipped gaming machine, it is considered that it can be used as a gaming machine ID.

Further, as the gaming machine ID, for example, an ID stored in a predetermined storage area or the like in the ROM 49b of the BLE module 49, the BLE chip 49d, or the external centralized terminal plate 47 is used in the gaming machine at the game hall or the factory. It can also be used by associating it. The external centralized terminal board 47 on which the BLE module 49 is mounted is attached to the pachislot machine 1 in a replaceable manner. The predetermined identifier can be used as the gaming machine ID by managing the module so that it is stored in association with the corresponding gaming machine when it is incorporated or exchanged.

The power supply for the external centralized terminal plate 47 is provided from, for example, the main control circuit 90. A backup power supply can also be installed on the external centralized terminal plate 47. Further, for the RAM 49c of the BLE module 49, for example, a volatile memory such as a DRAM (Dyanamic RAM) or a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory can be adopted.

In the external centralized terminal board 47 of the present embodiment, as described above, the game information (medal insertion signal and medal payout signal) provided by the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91) is displayed as data by the relay contact output. Although it is configured to be transmitted to the device 300, at least a part of the game information and the above data (game machine ID and role ratio information) is transmitted from the external centralized terminal board 47 to the hall computer 1200 and the sand device 1370 described later. , The data display device 1350 and other peripheral devices can be configured to transmit data (the same applies to the external centralized terminal boards 447 and 547 described later).

<Configuration of data display device>
Next, the configuration of the data display device 300 connected to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the data display device 300.

As shown in FIG. 2, the data display device 300 is arranged on the upper part of the exterior body 2. The data display device 300 is configured to display various game information based on the medal insertion signal and the medal payout signal received from the main CPU 101, as well as to display an effect.

As shown in FIG. 12, the data display device 300 includes a CPU 301, a ROM 302, a RAM 303, a touch panel driver 304, and a display device (touch panel) 305.

The CPU 301 controls the image display related to the effect display and the display of the game information according to the control program stored in the ROM 302 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The ROM 302 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the CPU 301 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 90, a display control task for controlling an effect display and a display of game information, and the like.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing the effect data constituting the effect display, a storage area for storing game data related to game information, and the like.

The RAM 303 is provided with a storage area for registering data related to the effect display and data related to game information, and a storage area for storing various data such as commands transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

The display device (touch panel) 305 is a liquid crystal display panel provided with a touch sensor, and is provided with, for example, an effect display area for displaying the effect and a game information display area for displaying game information. In addition, the player can use the touch panel to give instructions such as switching the display device of the display device 305.

The touch panel driver 304 generates an image based on the data related to the effect display and the data related to the game information, controls the displayed image to be displayed on the display device 305, and is performed by the player from the display device 305 using the touch panel. The content of the instruction is transmitted to the CPU 301.

<Internal configuration of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, the internal configurations (hereinafter referred to as “memory maps”) of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 included in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13A to 13C. 13A is a diagram showing a memory map of the entire memory, FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a memory map of the main ROM 102, and FIG. 13C is a diagram showing a memory map of the main RAM 103.

In the memory map of the entire memory included in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91), as shown in FIG. 13A, from the head (0000H) side of the address, the memory area of the main ROM 102, the memory area of the main RAM 103, the built-in register area, and The XCS decoding areas are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order with an unused area in between.

In the memory map of the main ROM 102, as shown in FIG. 13B, the program area, the data area, the non-standard area, the trademark recording area, the program management area, and the security setting area are displayed from the head (0000H) side of the address of the main ROM 102. In order, they are arranged at predetermined addresses.

In the program area, control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the playability of the game performed by the player are stored. In the data area, various data used by the main CPU 101 (for example, a data table such as an internal lottery table, and various types for the sub-control circuit 200 in various control processes related to the playability of the game performed by the player). Data for transmitting control commands (commands), etc.) are stored. That is, the game ROM area (game storage area) composed of the program area and the data area is necessary for the control process (process related to the game property) related to the game playability of the game actually performed by the player at the game store. Various programs and various data are stored.

Further, in the non-standard area, control programs and data of various processes (processes that do not affect the playability) that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are stored. For example, the program and data used in the Pachislot 1 certification test (test firing test), the control program and data used in the checksum generation process when the power is cut off, the thumb check process when the power is restored, and the combination monitor display switching. Control programs and data used in processing, role ratio monitor aggregation processing, etc., as well as fraud countermeasure programs and data required for them are stored in the non-standard area.

In the memory map of the main RAM 103, as shown in FIG. 13C, the game RAM area (predetermined storage area, game temporary storage area) and the non-standard RAM area (non-standard temporary) from the head (F000H) side of the address of the main RAM 103. Storage areas) are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order.

The game RAM area is provided with a work area and a stack area for temporarily storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program related to the game playability performed by the player. .. Then, each of the various data is stored in the work area of a predetermined address in the game RAM area.

Further, the non-standard RAM area is provided with a non-standard work area that is a work area for various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player, and a non-standard stack. In the present embodiment, using this non-standard RAM area, various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player, such as a checksum process, are executed.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are used for the game in the main ROM 102. It is stored in a non-standard ROM area (non-standard storage area) located at an address different from the ROM area. In addition, various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by such a player are performed in the main RAM 103 using an out-of-specification RAM area arranged at an address different from the game RAM area. ..

In such a configuration of the main ROM 102, programs and data unnecessary for the game itself actually played by the player are arranged in the ROM area (non-standard ROM area) where the program or the like cannot be arranged according to the conventional rules. can do. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the gaming ROM area.

<Transition flow of game state>
Next, various gaming states managed by the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment and their transition flows will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. Note that FIG. 14A is a transition flow diagram of the basic gaming state of the pachislot machine 1, and FIG. 14B is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the gaming state. Further, FIG. 15A is a transition flow diagram of a gaming state in consideration of whether or not the notification (ART) function is activated, and FIG. 15B is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the gaming state.

[Basic game state transition flow]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as "BB") is provided as a type of bonus game. The BB is a continuous accessory actuating device for a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”) called a first-class special accessory, and continuously operates the RB.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 manages the gaming state based on the presence or absence of winning / operating (winning) of the bonus combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, the main control circuit 90 is based on the presence or absence of a winning / operating (winning) of a bonus combination (internal winning combination of the names "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" described later). It manages three types of gaming states called "bonus non-winning state", "inter-flag state", and "bonus state".

The bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not winning and the bonus is not activated (winning), and the bonus state is a state in which the bonus is activated. Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus combination is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is won. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, that is, a state in which the bonus combination is won and the bonus is not activated.

Whether or not the bonus combination is won is managed based on the data stored in the hit request flag storage area and the carry-over combination storage area provided in the main RAM 103, which will be described later. Further, whether or not the bonus is activated (winning) is managed based on the data stored in the game state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 103.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, in the gaming state in which the bonus is not activated (bonus non-winning state and inter-flag state), the types of internal winning combinations related to replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. Six types of states from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "RT0 state" to "RT5 state", respectively) are provided. The RT0 state, RT2 state, and RT5 state are gaming states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT1 state has a medium probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is a gaming state with a medium probability. Further, the RT3 state and the RT4 state are gaming states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is high. In the present embodiment, the RT state in the bonus non-winning state is any of the RT0 state to the RT4 state, and the RT state in the inter-flag state is the RT5 state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 is based on the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay and the winning probability thereof in the gaming state in which the bonus is not activated (bonus non-winning state and inter-flag state). It also manages six types of states, RT1 state to RT5 state.

The RT0 state to the RT5 state are managed based on the data stored in the game state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 103, which will be described later. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, flags indicating five RT states of the RT1 state flag to the RT5 state flag are provided, and the RT state is managed by managing the on / off states of these flags by the main RAM 103. Is managed. Then, the main control circuit 90 specifies the RT state corresponding to the RT state flag that is in the ON state as the current RT state. When all the RT state flags are off, the main control circuit 90 identifies that the current RT state is the RT0 state.

As shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B, when the bonus combination (internal winning combination of the names "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" described later) is determined as the internal winning combination in the bonus non-winning state (when the transition condition (1) is satisfied). ), The main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state. Further, when the bonus combination is won in the inter-flag state (when the transition condition (2) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

Further, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (216) is paid out in the bonus state and the bonus state ends (when the transition condition (3) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 state (RT1 state). Shift to the bonus non-winning state).

When 20 games have elapsed in the RT1 state (when the transition condition (4) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 state to the RT0 state. Further, in the RT1 state, if the symbol combination related to the abbreviation "bell spilled eyes" is displayed on the effective line before 20 games have elapsed (when the transition condition (5) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 is set to. The game state is changed from the RT1 state to the RT2 state.

In the RT0 state, when the symbol combination related to the abbreviation "bell spilled eye" is displayed on the valid line (when the transition condition (5) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 state to the RT2 state. Let me. In the RT2 state, when the symbol combination related to the abbreviation "RT3 transition lip" is displayed on the valid line (when the transition condition (6) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 state to the RT3 state. Let me.

In the RT3 state, when the symbol combination related to the abbreviation "RT4 transition lip" is displayed on the valid line (when the transition condition (7) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 state to the RT4 state. Let me. Further, in the RT3 state, when the symbol combination related to the abbreviation "bell spilled eye" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed on the valid line (when the transition condition (8) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. Shifts the game state from the RT3 state to the RT2 state. Further, in the RT4 state, when the symbol combination related to the abbreviation "bell spilled eye" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed on the valid line (when the transition condition (8) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. Shifts the gaming state from the RT4 state to the RT2 state.

As for the symbol combination related to the abbreviation "bell spilled eyes", the internal winning combination (small combination) related to the names "F_3 selection bell_1st", "F_3 selection bell_2nd" or "F_3 selection bell_3rd" described later is determined. Moreover, it is a combination of symbols displayed when the order of the stop operation is incorrect with respect to the push order determined for each type of the small winning combination. As for the symbol combination related to the abbreviation "RT2 transition lip", the internal winning combination (replay combination) related to the names "F_maintenance lip_1st", "F_maintenance lip_2nd" or "F_maintenance lip_3rd" described later is determined, and This is a combination of symbols displayed when the order of stop operations is incorrect with respect to the push order determined for each type of replay combination.

As for the symbol combination related to the abbreviation "RT3 transition lip", the internal winning combination (replay combination) related to the names "F_RT3 lip_1st", "F_RT3 lip_213", "F_RT3 lip_231" or "F_RT3 lip_3rd" described later is determined. Moreover, it is a combination of symbols displayed when the order of the stop operation is the correct answer for the push order determined for each type of the replay combination. In addition, the symbol combination related to the abbreviation "RT4 transition lip" has an internal winning combination (replay role) related to the names "F_RT4 lip_123", "F_RT4 lip_132", "F_RT4 lip_2nd" or "F_RT4 lip_3rd" described later. It is a combination of symbols that are determined and displayed when the order of stop operations is correct for the push order determined for each type of replay combination.

[Transition flow of game state considering whether or not the notification (ART) function is activated]
In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) determines whether or not a function (ART function) for notifying a stop operation advantageous to the player is activated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the activated / non-activated state of the ART function is also managed as the gaming state in the bonus non-operating state.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15A, the main control circuit 90 separates the "general game state" and the "ART game state" based on the presence or absence of notification (ART) in the non-bonus operating state. It is managed as the game state of. That is, in the management of the gaming state in consideration of the presence / absence of notification (ART), as shown in FIG. 15A, the main control circuit 90 is roughly classified into "bonus state", "general gaming state", and "ART gaming state". It manages three types of game states.

The general gaming state is basically a gaming state (non-ART) that does not notify information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, the general gaming state is any of the RT0 to RT4 states, and is an ART non-winning gaming state.

On the other hand, the ART gaming state is a gaming state that notifies information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the ART gaming state is basically the RT4 state and the gaming state during the ART winning. In the present embodiment, when the RT state shifts to the RT4 state after winning the ART, the ART game is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15A, two types of states called "normal gaming state" and "CZ (chance zone)" are provided as general gaming states.

The normal game state is the most unfavorable game state for the player, but in the game in the normal game state, a lottery for transition to CZ is performed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in the game in the normal gaming state, when the transition lottery to the CZ is won (when the transition condition (A) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state to the normal gaming state. To CZ.

The CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) in which the expectation for the transition to the ART gaming state is high, and in the game during the CZ, a lottery for the transition to the ART is performed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in the game during CZ, when the lottery for transition to ART is not won (when the transition condition (B) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 sets the game state. , CZ shifts to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the game during CZ, when the lottery for transition to ART is won (when the transition condition (C) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 shifts the game state from CZ to the ART game state. At this time, although not shown in FIG. 15A, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT described later) via the ART preparation state described later.

As described above, the ART gaming state is started when the RT state shifts to the RT4 state after winning the ART. As shown in FIG. 14A, since the RT4 state shifts from the RT0 to RT2 states via the RT3 state, the ART gaming state is not started immediately even after winning the ART. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state during the period from the winning of the ART to the transition from the RT state to the RT4 state is set as the ART preparation state. Then, in this game in the ART preparation state, information on the stop operation necessary for shifting the RT state to the RT4 state is notified.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15A, two types of ART gaming states, called "normal ART" and "CT (additional chance)", in which the playability is different from each other, are provided.

Normally, ART is a stop operation that is advantageous for the player for a predetermined number of games (for example, a stop operation for displaying a symbol combination with a large number of medals to be paid out, or a stop operation necessary for maintaining the RT4 state). Is the game state in which is notified. In addition, in a game during normal ART, a lottery for transition to CT is performed.

CT is a gaming state in which a player is notified of an advantageous stop operation and can add a normal ART duration for a specific period (a period of 8 games per set), and functions as an additional chance zone. It is a game state to play. Also, during CT, the game is usually played without digesting the duration of ART.

As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in a game during normal ART, when the lottery for transition to CT is won (when the transition condition (D) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from normal ART to CT. Shift the game state. Further, in the normal ART, when the duration of the normal ART ends (when the transition condition (E) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the normal ART to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). Migrate. In the present embodiment, the duration of normal ART is managed by the number of games, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the method of managing the duration of normal ART is arbitrary. For example, the duration of normal ART may be managed by the number of medals paid out during normal ART or the difference number, or by the number of notifications (number of navigations) that affect the payout of medals during normal ART. You may manage it.

As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in the game during CT, when the duration of CT (8 games per set) ends (when the transition condition (F) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 sets the game state to CT. To normal ART.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the bonus combination is won in the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ) or ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) (transition condition (2) described in FIGS. 14A and 14B). When is established), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the general gaming state or the ART gaming state to the bonus state.

In the game in the bonus state, as described above, the lottery for transition to ART is performed, and in the game in the bonus state, if the lottery for transition to ART is non-winning (when the transition condition (G) is satisfied). , The main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). However, when the game has transitioned from the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state, the main control circuit 90 sets the gaming state even if the game in the bonus state does not win the ART transition lottery. Shift from the bonus state to the ART game state (normal ART or CT). On the other hand, in the game in the bonus state, when the lottery for transition to ART is won (when the transition condition (H) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). Migrate. As described above, at the end of the bonus state, the RT state shifts to the RT1 state. Therefore, when shifting the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to the ART. It shifts to the ART game state via the preparation state.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the configuration of the main data table stored in the main ROM 102 will be described.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 16). (Refer to the symbol code table of)) and stipulate the correspondence with.

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, in the order of proceeding in the reel rotation direction (direction from the symbol position "19" in FIG. 16 toward the symbol position "0") with reference to the symbol position "0", " "0" to "19" are assigned to each symbol as the symbol position.

That is, by referring to the values of the symbol counters (“0” to “19”) and the symbol arrangement table, they are displayed in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4. It is possible to specify the type of symbol. In this embodiment, as the symbols, "white 7", "blue 7", "chili top 1", "chili top 2", "chili bottom", "replay", "hat", "cactus 1", Ten kinds of symbols of "cactus 2" and "cactus 3" are used.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol code table, for example, the symbol "white 7" (symbol code 1) is assigned "00000001" as data, and the symbol "blue 7" (symbol code 2) is assigned. Is assigned "00000010" as data. The symbol "Chile top 1" (symbol code 3) is assigned "000000111" as data, and the symbol "Chile top 2" (symbol code 4) is assigned "00000100" as data.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, an internal lottery table (not shown) that is referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and the lottery value when each internal winning combination is determined. The lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of the internal winning such as a preset bonus combination or small combination. This setting is changed, for example, by using the reset switch 76 and the setting key type switch 54 (see FIG. 6).

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 sets a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535) corresponding to each internal winning combination. Add in sequence at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result overflows). Then, when the lottery result exceeds 65535 in the predetermined internal winning combination, it is determined that the internal winning combination has won. In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, an example in which the lottery value is added to the extracted random number value to perform the lottery has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery value is subtracted from the random number value. It may be determined whether or not the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than "0" (whether or not the lottery result is underflowed), and the winning / non-winning of the internal lottery may be determined.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the internal lottery combination will be determined. The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed by "the lottery value specified in each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of the replay combination determined as the internal winning combination and the winning probability change according to the type of the RT state. For example, the replay combination related to the names "F_chili lip (No. 25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)" is not determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state to RT3 state, and is in the RT4 state. Only determined as an internal winning role.

[Design combination determination table]
Next, a correspondence table (symbol combination determination table (not shown)) between the internal winning combination and the symbol combination will be described. The symbol combination determination table defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and symbol combinations (combinations) that can be displayed on the effective line (center line) associated with each internal winning combination. That is, when the internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be displayed on the valid line (type of display combination that can win a prize) is uniquely determined.

The various data described in the symbol combination column in each symbol combination determination table is for identifying the symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed along the effective line set over the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. It is data.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 90 using the program will be described.

[Processing when power is turned on (reset interrupt)]
First, the power-on (reset interrupt) processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing when the power is turned on (reset interrupt). In the power-on (reset interrupt) processing shown in FIG. 17, when the power management circuit 93 detects that the supply of the power supply voltage to the microprocessor 91 has started, the reset signal is sent to the microprocessor 91. It is output to the "XSRST" terminal, and is executed based on the interrupt request signal output from the interrupt controller 112 of the microprocessor 91 to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power supply monitoring port (power supply monitoring means) is in the ON state (S1).

In S1, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power supply monitoring port is in the ON state (when the determination in S1 is YES), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S1. The state in which the power supply monitoring port is on is a state in which the power supply voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main CPU 101 is not stable.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S1 that the power supply monitoring port is not in the ON state (when the determination in S1 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process of the timer circuit 113 (PTC) (S2). In this process, the main CPU 101 initially sets the timer circuit 113. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the frequency division ratio in the timer prescaler register (not shown), sets the timer control register (not shown) to interrupt enable, etc., and sets the timer counter (not shown). Set the initial count value.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1) between the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200 (S3). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process of the random number circuit 110 (RDG) (S4). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a write test of the main RAM 103 (S5).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the writing to the main RAM 103 has been normally performed as a result of the writing test (S6).

In S6, when the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has not been performed normally (when the determination in S6 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described later. On the other hand, in S6, when the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has been normally performed (when the determination in S6 is YES), the main CPU 101 is in the state of the timer control register (not shown) of the timer circuit 113. (S7).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process based on the acquired state of the timer control register (S8). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not 1.1172 ms has elapsed from the start of the timer count based on the acquired state of the timer control register.

In the present embodiment, when the timer time 1.1172 ms is set by the initialization process of the timer circuit 113 in S2, the count process of the CPU built-in timer is started. After that, the status of the timer circuit 113 can be acquired by reading the information of the timer control register (not shown). Then, in the present embodiment, a bit (discrimination bit) capable of discriminating (seeing) whether or not the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process (whether or not it is the timer interrupt state) in the timer control register. ) Is provided.

Therefore, in the process of S7, the main CPU 101 reads the information of the timer control register (not shown), and in the process of S8, the main CPU 101 is in the ON / OFF state of the discrimination bit in the timer control register (not shown). By referring to "1" / "0"), it is determined whether or not the current state is the timing at which the interrupt process occurs. When 1.1172 ms has elapsed from the start of counting by the timer circuit 113 (if the count value of the timer circuit 113 is 0), the discrimination bit is turned on.

In S8, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is not the timing at which the interrupt process occurs (when the determination in S8 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S7 and repeats the processes after S7.

On the other hand, in S8, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process (when the determination in S8 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a thumb check process (non-standard) (S9). .. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a thumb check process of the main RAM 103, and this process is performed in an unspecified work area (see FIG. 13C) in the main RAM 103. Further, the program used in this thumb check process is stored in the non-standard area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 13B).

Further, in S8, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process (when the determination in S8 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the interrupt process described later before the process in S9. An interrupt process (see FIG. 36 described later) is executed. Then, by this interrupt process, a no-operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) to the sub control circuit 200 (sub control board 72).

After the process of S9, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (S10).

In S10, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (when the determination in S10 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S15 described later. On the other hand, in S10, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S10 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the thumb check based on the result of the thumb check process in S9. It is determined whether or not the result is normal (S11).

In S11, when the main CPU 101 determines that the thumb check determination result is not normal (when the determination in S11 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described later. On the other hand, in S11, when the main CPU 101 determines that the thumb check determination result is normal (when the determination in S11 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the game return process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of returning the game state to the state before the power failure detection.

When the determination in S6 or S11 is NO, the main CPU 101 displays the character string "rr" indicating the occurrence of an error on the information display 6 (7-segment LED display) (S13). After that, the main CPU 101 repeats the WDT clearing process (S14).

Here, returning to the process of S10 again, if S10 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change confirmation process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a setting change command generation / storage process at the start of the setting change.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the time of RAM abnormality or at the start of setting change" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 13C as the start address of the initialization start, and the game starts from the start address. Erase (clear) the information up to the final address of the RAM area for use. Then, after the processing of S16, the main CPU 101 starts the main processing described later (see FIG. 18 described later).

[Main processing of pachislot under the control of the main CPU]
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the main process (main operation process) of the pachi-slot machine 1 executed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described. Note that FIG. 18 is a flowchart (hereinafter referred to as a main flow) showing the procedure of the main process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S201). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the end of one game" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 13C as the start address of the initialization start, and from the start address, the game RAM area Delete (clear) the information up to the final address. The storage area in this range is, for example, a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S202). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an input check process such as a medal sensor (not shown) and a start switch 79. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number acquisition process (S203). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses a random number value for internal winning combination lottery (0 to 65535: a value of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes a hard latch random number) and a random number value for production used in various ART-related lottery (0 to 65535). 0 to 65535: each value of the random number registers 1 to 3 of the random number circuit 110 to be a soft latch random number, 0 to 255: each value of the random number registers 4 to 7 of the random number circuit 110 to be a soft latch random number), etc. The extracted various random number values are stored in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the random number acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S204). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an internal winning combination determination process by lottery based on the random number value (hard latch random number) extracted in S203. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol setting process (S205). In this process, the main CPU 101, for example, generates an internal winning combination from the hit request flag status (flag status information), expands the hit request flag data, and stores the hit request flag data in the hit request flag storage area. And so on. The details of the symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation / storage process (S206). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 36. The start command is configured to include parameters (sub-flags, etc.) that specify the internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a state-specific control process (S208). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a game start process (start process) according to the game state.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S209). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires the pull-in priority table selection table number, the pull-in priority table number, and the stop table number based on the internal winning combination and the game state. And the process of storing "3" in the stop button non-operation counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel rotation start process (S210). In this process, the main CPU 101 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 36 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Controlled, the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. Each reel is then accelerated and controlled until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, after which it is controlled to maintain that constant speed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel rotation start command generation / storage process (S211). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 36. The reel rotation start command is configured to include a parameter indicating that the reel rotation start operation has been started.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S212). In this process, the main CPU 101 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop control process (S213). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the rotation stop of the corresponding reel based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a winning search process (S214). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the data in the symbol code storage area (not shown) in the winning operation flag storage area (not shown). Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and sets the number of medals to be paid out based on the determination result. The details of the winning search process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a winning check / medal payout process (S216). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of generating a winning operation command. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 drives the hopper device 51 and updates the number of credits based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S214, and performs the medal payout process. The details of the winning check / medal payout process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the combination monitor aggregation process (S217). The combination monitor aggregation process is stored in the non-standard area in the main ROM 102, and the non-standard work area in the main RAM 103 is used as the work area. In this process, the main CPU 101 aggregates various game information, and when a specific ratio calculation condition is satisfied, performs a predetermined ratio calculation and stores the ratio information. The details of the combination monitor aggregation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a BB check process (S218). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the operation and termination of the bonus state.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an RT check process (S219). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs RT state transition control based on the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs CZ / ART end processing (S220). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a CZ pullback lottery process. Then, after the processing of S220 (after the end of one game), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S201.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S202 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described. Note that FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of medal reception / start check processing.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (whether or not there is an automatic insertion request) (S221). In this process, when the automatic insertion medal counter is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 determines that there is an automatic insertion request. Further, the automatic insertion medal counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the replay is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion medal counter.

In S221, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S225 described later.

On the other hand, in S221, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (when the determination in S221 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion process (S222). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process, an LED lighting control process for the number of medals inserted, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the automatic insertion medal counter (S223). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the automatically inserted medal counter after subtraction is "0" (S224).

In S224, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (when the determination in S224 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S222 and repeats the processes after S222.

On the other hand, in S224, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (when S224 is a YES determination), or when S221 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 is used for medal auxiliary storage. The storage switch check process is performed (S225). In this process, the main CPU 101 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals based on the on / off state of the game medal auxiliary storage switch 75.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a combination monitor display switching process (S226). The combination monitor display switching process is stored in the non-standard area in the main ROM 102, and the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103 is used as the work area. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of switching the display / non-display of the ratio information on the combination ratio monitor 95 based on whether or not the combination ratio non-display condition described later is satisfied. The details of the combination monitor display switching process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion state check process (S227). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal can be inserted based on the result of the medal insertion state check process (S228).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S228 that the medal cannot be inserted (when the determination in S228 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S232 described later.

On the other hand, in S228, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal insertion is possible (when the determination in S228 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion check process (S229). In this process, the main CPU 101 credits the medal, for example, based on the medal sensor input state, a process of determining whether or not the medal has passed normally, and when the number of medals inserted exceeds a specified number. Perform processing and so on.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal insertion or credit is possible based on the result of the medal insertion check process (S230).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S230 that the medal can be inserted or credited (when the determination in S230 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S232 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S230 that the medal cannot be inserted or credited (when the determination in S230 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S231). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 4) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 24.

After the processing of S231, if S228 is a NO determination or S230 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current number of inserted medals is the playable start number (S232). In this embodiment, the number of cards that can be started is three.

In S232, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current number of inserted medals is the number of playable start numbers (when the determination in S232 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S235 described later. On the other hand, in S232, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current number of inserted medals is not the playable start number (when the determination in S232 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a medal inserted (S233). ).

In S233, when the main CPU 101 determines that a medal has been inserted (when the determination in S233 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S233 that no medal has been inserted (NO in S233), the main CPU 101 performs the setting change confirmation process described with reference to FIG. 17 (S234). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change command generation / storage process at the start of setting confirmation.

After the processing of S234 or when the determination in S232 is YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is in the ON state (S235).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S235 that the start switch 79 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S235 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226.

On the other hand, in S235, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 79 is in the ON state (when the determination in S235 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S236). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 4) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 24. Then, after the processing of S236, the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance / start check processing, and shifts the processing to S203 of the main flow (see FIG. 18).

[Ratio monitor display switching process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the combination monitor display switching process performed in S226 during the medal reception / start check process (see FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination monitor display switching process. This process is configured to use the non-standard work area in the main RAM 103 as the work area by the program stored in the non-standard area in the main ROM 102.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the combination display mode is waiting for the end (waiting for the end of display) (S2001). The combination display mode is identification information for controlling the display state of the combination monitor 95, and is one of display (display on), non-display (display off), and end waiting (display end waiting). The information is stored in the main RAM 103. As a result, the switching control of the display state of the combination monitor 95 is performed.

In S2001, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination display mode is waiting for the end (waiting for the end of display) (when the determination in S2001 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S2004 described later. On the other hand, in S2001, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination ratio display mode is not waiting for the end (waiting for the end of display) (when the determination in S2001 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the combination non-display condition is satisfied. (S2002). The combination ratio non-display condition is a condition set to hide (display off) the display state of the combination ratio monitor 95, and is set when the settlement switch 78 is in the on state in the present embodiment. This is established when the key type switch 54 (setting switch) is in the ON state, when a medal is inserted, and when an error occurs. However, it is possible not to set the combination non-display condition, and it is also possible to adopt only one or more of these conditions.

In S2002, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination non-display condition is satisfied (when the determination in S2002 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S2004 described later. On the other hand, in S2002, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination non-display condition is not satisfied (NO in S2002), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is on. (S2003). Here, when the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is on, it means that the front door 2b is in the open state, and when the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is off, it means that the front door 2b is in the closed state.

In S2003, when the main CPU 101 determines that the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is not on (off) (when the determination in S2003 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the display off to the combination display mode (S2004). .. Then, after the processing of S2004, the main CPU 101 ends the combination monitor display switching processing, and shifts the processing to S227 of the medal reception / start check processing (see FIG. 19).

On the other hand, in S2003, when the main CPU 101 determines that the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is ON (when the determination in S2003 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the display on to the combination ratio display mode (S2005). Then, after the processing of S2005, the main CPU 101 ends the combination monitor display switching processing, and shifts the processing to S227 of the medal reception / start check processing (see FIG. 19).

In the present embodiment, the combination monitor display switching process is performed as described above. That is, when the above-mentioned combination ratio non-display condition is satisfied, or when the front door 2b is in the closed state, the display state of the combination ratio monitor 95 is switched to non-display (display off), and the above-mentioned combination is displayed. When the ratio non-display condition is not satisfied and the front door 2b is in the open state, the display state of the combination ratio monitor 95 is switched to display (display on). Therefore, the control load related to the ratio display can be reduced, and the life of the device for displaying the ratio (role ratio monitor 95) can be extended. Further, since the owner of the door key (not shown) (for example, a clerk of a game store, an inspector of a game machine, etc.) can perform the unlock operation for the lock 5 of the front door 2b in principle. Since the display of the combination ratio monitor 95 cannot be visually recognized by anyone other than the holder of the door key (not shown), the safety regarding the display of the ratio can be improved.

[Random number acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the random number acquisition process performed in S203 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described. Note that FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires a hard latch random number (0 to 65535) of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit, and uses the acquired random number value as a random number value for internal winning combination lottery, and uses a random number value storage area (non-standard) in the main RAM 103. It is stored in (shown) (S291).

Next, the main CPU 101 generates soft latch random numbers (0 to 65535: a random number value for production used in the ART-related lottery process, a random number value in the 0 to 255: 1 byte lottery process) of the random number registers 1 to 7 of the random number circuit. The soft latch random number acquisition register is set for this purpose (S292). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the acquisition number (for example, 7) of the soft latch random numbers (S293).

Next, the main CPU 101 collectively acquires the number of acquired soft latch random numbers, and stores the acquired number of soft latch random numbers in the random number value storage area (S294). At this time, the soft latch random number (effect random number value, 2-byte random number value) acquired from the random number register 1 of the random number circuit 110 is the hardware acquired from the random number register 0 of the random number circuit in the random number value storage area. It is stored in an area different from the area in which the latch random number (random number value for the internal winning combination lottery) is stored. Then, after the processing of S294, the main CPU 101 ends the random number acquisition processing, and shifts the processing to S204 of the main flow (see FIG. 18). In the present embodiment, in order to store four 2-byte random numbers and four 1-byte random numbers, a 12-byte storage area is allocated to the main RAM 103 as a random number storage area.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the internal lottery process performed in S204 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described. Note that FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a set value / medal insertion number check process (S301). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the set value (any of 1 to 6) of the current game and the number of inserted medals (3 in the present embodiment).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the internal lottery table for general games and the number of lottery (53 times in this embodiment) (S302). In this process, the value (winning request flag status) of the "special prize winning number + small winning combination winning number" in the internal lottery table (for general games) is set in the C register, and the "lottery value selection table or lottery coefficient table" is set. The value of (judgment data: data related to the address) is set in the A register. The winning request flag status is "00H (missing)", "01H (BB1)", "02H (BB2)": decimal numbers 0, 1, 2) and "25H (hexadecimal number: 10). In decimal, it is a value obtained by multiplying a value obtained by multiplying 37 (a special prize number described later)) and adding a small winning combination winning number (“00H” to “24H”: 0 to 36 in decimal).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RB is in operation (S303). When the main CPU 101 determines in S303 that the RB is not in operation (when the determination in S303 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S305 described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S303 that the RB is in operation (when the determination in S303 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the internal lottery table for RB and the number of lottery (5 times in this embodiment). Set (S304). In this process, the internal lottery table and the number of lottery for general games set in S302 are overwritten by the internal lottery table and the number of lottery for RB.

After the processing of S304 or when the determination in S303 is NO, the main CPU 101 acquires the determination data (data related to the address) of the lottery target combination from the set internal lottery table, and updates the lottery table address (S305).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination data is RT state-specific data (S306). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently acquired lottery target combination is an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to the RT state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address defined in the currently acquired lottery target combination determination data is an address in the lottery value selection table for each RT state.

In S306, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is not the RT state-specific data (when the determination in S306 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S308 described later. On the other hand, in S306, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is the data for each RT state (when the determination in S306 is YES), the main CPU 101 selects data from the RT state lottery value selection table based on the determination data. Is acquired, and the acquired selection data is set in the determination data (S307).

After the processing of S307 or when the determination in S306 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination data of the lottery target combination is the data for each setting (S308). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently acquired lottery target combination is an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the main CPU 101, the address defined in the currently acquired determination data of the lottery target combination is the address in the internal lottery value table for each 1-byte setting or the internal lottery value table for each 2-byte setting. Determine if it is.

In S308, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is not the setting-specific data (when the determination in S308 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S310 described later. On the other hand, in S308, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is the data for each setting (when the determination in S308 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds the set value data (any of 0 to 5) to the determination data. Then, the added value is set in the determination data (S309). The set value data added to the determination data in this process is the data associated with the set value, but the set value data "0" to "5" are not the values of the set value itself, but are "0" to "5", respectively. It is the data corresponding to "setting 1" to "setting 6".

After the processing of S309 or when the determination in S308 is NO, the main CPU 101 calculates the address of the area in which the lottery value of the lottery target combination is stored based on the set determination data (address data), and sets the address to the address. The stored lottery value is acquired (S310).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value (any of 0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery stored in the random number storage area (S311).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a lottery execution process (S312). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds the random number value acquired in S311 to the lottery value acquired in S310, and sets the addition result as the lottery result (winning / non-winning of the lottery target combination). In this lottery execution process, when the sum of the lottery value and the random number value exceeds 65535 (overflow), it is determined that the lottery target combination has been won (the lottery target combination has been determined as the internal winning combination). NS.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores a value obtained by adding the lottery value to the random number value (random number value after the lottery execution) as a new random number value in the random number storage area (S313). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lottery execution process has won (whether or not an overflow has occurred) (S314).

In S314, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning combination has been won in the lottery execution process (when the determination in S314 is YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the internal lottery table and refers to the winning request flag status (corresponding to the winning internal winning combination). The value of "special prize winning number + small winning combination winning number") is acquired (S315). Then, after the processing of S315, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 18).

On the other hand, in S314, when the main CPU 101 determines that the lottery has not been won in the lottery execution process (when the determination in S314 is NO), the main CPU 101 updates the lottery target combination to the next combination in the internal lottery table, and draws the lottery. The number of times is subtracted by 1 (S316). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of lottery after subtraction is "0" (S317).

In S317, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of lottery after subtraction is not "0" (when the determination in S317 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S305 and repeats the processes after S305.

On the other hand, in S317, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of lottery after subtraction is "0" (when the determination in S317 is YES), that is, when the internal winning combination is "missing", the main CPU 101 determines. Set the loss status (S318). The "missing status" corresponds to the winning request flag status in which both the special prize winning number and the small winning combination winning number are "0". Then, after the processing of S318, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 18).

[Design setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the symbol setting process performed in S205 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol setting process.

First, the main CPU 101 extracts a special prize winning number and a small winning combination winning number based on the winning request flag status acquired by the internal lottery process, and extracts the extracted special winning winning number and the small winning combination winning number in the main RAM 103. It is stored in the winning number storage area (not shown) (S321).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small winning combination has been won based on the extracted small winning combination winning number (S322). In this process, if the small winning combination winning number is any of 1 to 36, the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination has won, and if the small winning combination winning number is 0, the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination has won. It is determined that the small role did not win.

In S322, when the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination has not been won (when the determination in S322 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S331 described later. On the other hand, in S322, when the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination has won (when the determination in S322 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the small winning combination winning number as the initial value of the subtraction result (S323).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the hit request flag table (S324). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the subtraction result and updates the subtraction result (S325). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the subtraction result is less than "0" (S326).

In S326, when the main CPU 101 determines that the subtraction result is not less than "0" (when the determination in S326 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the bit number calculation process (S327). In the bit number calculation process of S327, the number of blocks in the storage area of the hit request flag data corresponding to the small winning combination winning number specified in the hit request flag table is acquired.

In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area) is provided with blocks of hit request storage areas 0 to 7 and blocks of hit request storage areas 8 to 11. Therefore, the maximum value of the number of blocks in the storage area of the hit request flag data acquired by the bit number calculation process of S327 is “2”.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a bit number calculation process (S328). In the bit number calculation process of S328, the number of bytes of the hit request flag data in the block unit specified in the hit request flag table is calculated.

The above-mentioned processes of S325 to S328 are repeated as many times as the number of small winning combination winning numbers.

Here, returning to the processing of S326 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S326 that the subtraction result is less than "0" (when the determination in S326 is YES), the main CPU 101 is in the hit request flag storage area ( The internal winning combination storage area) is set (S329). At this time, the main CPU 101 checks (updates) the hit request flag based on the number of blocks obtained by the above-mentioned processes of S325 to S328 and the number of bytes (on-bit information) of the hit request flag data for each block. Set only the storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a compressed data storage process (S330). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of transferring (expanding) the hit request flag data to a predetermined storage area in the hit request flag storage area to be checked (updated).

After the processing of S330 or when the determination in S322 is NO, the main CPU 101 refers to the carry-over combination storage area and determines whether or not there is a carry-over combination (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a carry-over combination (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S334 described later.

On the other hand, in S331, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no carry-over combination (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the bonus combination (BB1 or BB2) based on the special prize winning number extracted in the process of S321. ) Wins or not (S332).

In S332, when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus combination has not been won (when the determination in S332 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting process and shifts the process to S206 in the main flow (see FIG. 18). Transfer.

On the other hand, in S332, when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus combination has been won (when the determination in S332 is YES), the main CPU 101 stores the winning special prize winning number in the carry-over combination storage area (S333).

After the processing of S333 or when the determination in S331 is NO, the main CPU 101 sets the special prize winning number in the winning number storage area (not shown), sets the hit request flag data in the hit request flag storage area, and sets the RT state to RT5. Set to the state and clear (“0”) the number of RT games (the number of digestion games in the RT1 state) (S334). Then, after the processing of S334, the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting processing and shifts the processing to S206 of the main flow (see FIG. 18).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the reel stop control process performed in S213 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described. Note that FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (whether or not the speed has reached a "constant speed") (S712). In S712, when the main CPU 101 determines that the rotation speeds of all reels are not "constant speed" (when the determination in S712 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S712.

On the other hand, in S712, when the main CPU 101 determines that the rotation speeds of all reels have reached "constant speed" (when the determination in S712 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed. (S714).

In S714, when the main CPU 101 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (NO in S714), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S714. On the other hand, in S714, when the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (when the determination in S714 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and sets the value of the stop button non-operation counter. 1 is subtracted (S715).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S716). Further, in this process, the address (start address) set process of the rotation cylinder control data storage area in which the reel control management information of the search target reel is stored is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 103 based on the value of the symbol counter (S718).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop selection process (S719). Although detailed description is omitted, in this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting the number of sliding pieces.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines a scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S719, and stores the determined stop scheduled position in the main RAM 103 (S720). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the addition result as the stop scheduled position.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the symbol code storage process (S721). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the scheduled stop position is stored in the symbol code storage area. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (third stop) (S722). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (third stop) based on the value of the stop button non-operation counter, and the value of the stop button non-operation counter is set. When it is "0", it is determined that the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop.

In S722, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reel to be controlled is not the reel of the final stop (when the determination in S722 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the control change process (S723). In this process, the stop information group used for stopping the reel is updated when the reel is at a specific stop position. Next, the main CPU 101 performs the pull-in priority storage process described in S212 of FIG. 18 (S724).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a stop interval remaining time standby process (S725). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a standby process until a preset predetermined reel stop interval time elapses. Then, after the processing of S725, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S712, and repeats the processing after S712.

Here, returning to the process of S722 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S722 that the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (when the determination in S722 is YES), the main CPU 101 excites all the reels. Determines whether or not is in the stopped state (S726). In S726, when the main CPU 101 determines that the excitation of all reels is not in the stopped state (when the determination in S726 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S726.

On the other hand, in S726, when the main CPU 101 determines that the excitation of all reels is in the stopped state (when the determination in S726 is YES), the main CPU 101 keeps the stop button operated for the third stop in the ON state. It is determined whether or not (the stop button is not released) (S727). In S727, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop button operated by the third stop operation remains in the ON state (when the determination in S727 is YES), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S727. On the other hand, in S727, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop button operated by the third stop operation is not in the ON state (when the determination in S727 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process. Move to S214 of the main flow (see FIG. 18).

[Prize search process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the winning search process performed in S214 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described. Note that FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning search process.

First, the main CPU 101 transfers and stores the data of each storage area stored in the symbol code storage area to the corresponding storage area of the winning operation flag storage area (S761). Then, at the end of this processing, the address at the end of the winning operation flag storage area is set in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the payout number data table in the HL register (S762). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of payout number tables (“5” in this embodiment) as the initial value of the winning search counter, and sets the initial value in the B register (S763).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the number of medals to be paid out (in this embodiment, any one of 1, 2, 3, and 9) in the C register based on the address set in the HL register. , The determination target data is set in the A register, and "2" is added (+2 update) to the address set in the HL register (S764). Further, in the following, the data "0" in the data "number of medals to be paid out (1, 2, 3 or 9) * 2 + 0" set in the C register will be referred to as a "judgment bit". This determination bit is information indicating whether or not the block is the determination target block of the winning search.

Next, the main CPU 101 extracts the value of the determination bit from the data of the number of medals to be paid out set in the C register (S765). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the block is a determination target block based on the value of the extracted determination bit (S766). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the block is a determination target block when the value of the extracted determination bit is "1".

In S766, when the main CPU 101 determines that the block is not the determination target block (when the determination in S766 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S768 described later. On the other hand, in S766, when the main CPU 101 determines that the block is the determination target block (when the determination in S766 is YES), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the address of the winning operation flag storage area set in the DE register (-). 1 update) (S767).

After the processing of S767 or when the determination in S766 is NO, the main CPU 101 extracts the data of the storage area specified by the address of the winning operation flag storage area set in the DE register as the determination data (S768).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result is a prize based on the determination target data set in the A register in S764 and the determination data extracted in S768 (S769). In this process, if the determination target data set in the A register in S764 is the same as the determination data extracted in S768, the main CPU 101 determines that the determination result is a prize.

In S769, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the determination is not a prize (when the determination in S769 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S776 described later. On the other hand, in S769, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the determination is a winning result (when the determination in S769 is YES), the main CPU 101 has three current games (a game in which the number of medals bet is three). ) (S770).

In S770, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is a three-card game (when the determination in S770 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S772 described later. On the other hand, in S770, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is not a three-card game (when the determination in S770 is NO), the main CPU 101 pays out a two-card game (a game in which the number of medals bet is two). The number of sheets (2 sheets) is set in the C register (S771).

After the processing of S771 or when the determination in S770 is YES, the main CPU 101 updates the number of payouts (S772). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the number of medals to be paid out set in the C register to the current value of the winning number counter, and sets the added value to the number of payouts.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the number of payouts is less than the maximum number of payouts "10" (S773).

In S773, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of payouts is less than the maximum number of payouts "10" (when the determination in S773 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S775 described later. On the other hand, in S773, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of payouts is not less than the maximum number of payouts "10" (when the determination in S773 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the maximum number of payouts "10" to the number of payouts. (S774).

After the processing of S774 or when the determination in S773 is YES, the main CPU 101 stores the payout number in the winning number counter (S775).

After the processing of S775 or when the determination in S769 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is another prize (S776). In S776, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is another prize (when the determination in S776 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S769 and repeats the processes after S769.

On the other hand, in S7776, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no other prize (when the determination in S776 is NO), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 (updates -1) the value of the prize search counter (S777). In addition, as in the present embodiment, when there is only one effective line, since a plurality of small winning combinations do not win a prize in duplicate, the determination process of S776 is always a NO determination.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the winning search counter is "0" (S778).

In S778, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning search counter is not "0" (when the determination in S778 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S764 and repeats the processing after S764. On the other hand, in S778, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning search counter is "0" (when the determination in S778 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning search process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. FIG. (Refer to 18), the process proceeds to S215.

[Prize check / medal payout process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the winning check / medal payout process performed in S216 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described. Note that FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of winning check / medal payout processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation command generation process (S801). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates type data and various communication parameters included in the winning operation command transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. The winning operation command is configured to include a parameter for specifying a winning operation flag (display combination) and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data storage process (S802). By this process, the winning operation command data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The winning operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 36.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is "0" (S803). In S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is "0" (when the determination in S803 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout process, and performs the process in the main flow (when the winning check / medal payout process is completed). (Refer to FIG. 18), the process proceeds to S217.

On the other hand, in S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S803 is NO), the main CPU 101 has the maximum number of medals credited (stored). In the embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number is 50 or more (S804).

In S804, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits for medals is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (when the determination in S804 is NO), the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the credit counter (updates +1) (upgrading +1). S805). The added value of the credit counter is displayed by a 2-digit 7-segment LED (not shown) for displaying the number of stored sheets included in the information display 6. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal payout number check process (S806).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the payout of medals has been completed (S807). In S807, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal payout has been completed (when the determination in S807 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout process, and the process is in the main flow (see FIG. 18). Move to the processing of S217.

On the other hand, in S807, when the main CPU 101 determines that the payout of medals has not been completed (when the determination in S807 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a payout interval standby process (S808). In this process, the main CPU 101 waits until the preset medal payout interval time (60.33 msec in this embodiment: 54 cycles of the interrupt process (1.1172 msec cycle) described later with reference to FIG. 36) elapses. Wait. Then, after the processing of S808, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S803, and repeats the processing after S803.

Here, returning to the process of S804 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S804 that the number of credits for medals is equal to or greater than the upper limit (50) (when the determination in S804 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines. The medal payout process is performed (S809). By this process, one medal is paid out. Then, after the processing of S809, the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 18).

[Ratio monitor aggregation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the combination monitor aggregation process performed in S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination monitor aggregation process. In this process, the non-standard work area (see FIG. 13C) in the main RAM 103 is used as the work area, and the program used in this process is stored in the non-standard area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 13B). ..

First, the main CPU 101 performs advantageous section aggregation processing (S2011). In this process, the main CPU 101 aggregates the necessary game information and calculates the above-mentioned advantageous section ratio based on the aggregated result. The details of the advantageous section aggregation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a payout number counting process (S2012). In this process, the main CPU 101 aggregates the necessary game information, and calculates the total consecutive combination ratio and the total accessory ratio described above based on the aggregation result. The details of the payout number counting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medium-time aggregation process (S2013). In this process, the main CPU 101 calculates the medium-time continuous combination ratio and the medium-time bonus ratio described above based on the game information aggregated by the payout number counting process (see S2012). The details of the medium-time aggregation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. Then, after the processing of S2013, the main CPU 101 ends the combination monitor aggregation processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 18).

[Data table used for role ratio monitor aggregation processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, data, a data table, and the like used in the combination monitor aggregation process will be described. The data shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the data table, and the like are configured to be stored in the non-standard work area in the main RAM 103.

In FIG. 28, "role ratio monitor state", "total number of games", "ART game state flag", "special prize signal", "advantageous section ratio calculation table", "work for advantageous section ratio calculation", "role" And the joint combination ratio calculation table 1 ”and“ the accessory and the joint combination ratio calculation work ”are shown.

In the "combination ratio monitor state", the status of the total number of games and data for indicating whether or not the total value has reached the upper limit are stored. For example, data indicating the total number of games reached is stored as data indicating the state of reaching 6000 G (game) or 175000 G (game), and data indicating whether or not the total value has reached the upper limit is used as data indicating whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. Data indicating the state of reaching the upper limit of the number and the state of reaching the upper limit of the total number of payouts are stored. The "total number of games" stores the total number of total games used to obtain the data to be stored in the "combination ratio monitor state". In addition, data such as the total number of payouts and the total number of inputs can be stored.

The "ART gaming state flag" is a flag indicating whether the ART gaming state or the non-ART gaming state is used, and is used for calculating the advantageous section ratio.

The "special prize signal" is data indicating the game state of the game to be aggregated. For example, it is data indicating a game state such as SB, CB, and RB, which is determined based on the game state flag stored in the game state flag storage area.

The "advantageous section ratio calculation table" includes an advantageous section game number storage area, a total game number storage area, an advantageous section ratio display data storage area, and an end code. In the advantageous section totaling process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, in the storage area of the "advantageous section ratio calculation work" corresponding to the advantageous section game number storage area and the total game number storage area, respectively, in the "advantageous section ratio calculation table". When the aggregation result is stored and the ratio calculation data setting process (see FIGS. 30 and 31) is performed, the storage area corresponding to the "advantageous section ratio calculation table" is selected from the storage area of this "advantageous section ratio calculation work". Data is set in.

The calculation result of the ratio calculation data setting process is set in the advantageous section ratio display data storage area of the "advantageous section ratio calculation table", and based on this calculation result, the combination ratio information (type information "7U") is set in the combination ratio monitor 95. ”Appropriate section ratio) is displayed. Further, the end code of the "advantageous section ratio calculation table" is data that serves as a stopper for the calculation process in the ratio calculation data setting process, and is set in the advantageous section aggregation process.

In the "combined combination ratio calculation table 1", the total number of consecutive payouts storage area, the total number of payouts storage area, the total number of consecutive combination display data storage areas, the total number of payouts of all bonuses, the total number of payouts storage area, and the total The accessory ratio display data storage area and the end code are included. In the payout number totaling process (see FIG. 34), which will be described later, the total number of consecutive payouts storage area, the total number of payouts storage area, the total number of payouts storage area, and the total number of payouts in the "combined combination ratio calculation table 1". The aggregation result is stored in the storage area of the "work for calculating the accessory and the joint combination ratio" corresponding to each storage area, and when the ratio calculation data setting process (see FIGS. 34 and 31) is performed, this "accessory and the accessory and the work" are stored. Data is set from the storage area of the "work for calculating the continuous combination ratio" to the corresponding storage area of the "combined item and the continuous combination ratio calculation table 1". The same value is set in the two storage areas for the total number of payouts in the "combination and consecutive combination ratio calculation table 1".

The calculation result of the ratio calculation data setting process is set in the total consecutive combination ratio display data storage area of the "role and consecutive combination ratio calculation table 1", and based on this calculation result, the combination ratio information ( The total consecutive combination ratio of the type information "6A") is displayed. On the other hand, the calculation result of the ratio calculation data setting process is set in the total bonus ratio display data storage area of the "feature and joint combination ratio calculation table 1", and based on this calculation result, the role ratio monitor 95 serves. The ratio information (the total accessory ratio of the type information "7A") is displayed. Further, the end code of the "accessory and joint combination ratio calculation table 1" is data that serves as a stopper for the calculation process in the ratio calculation data setting process, and is set in the payout number totaling process. Here, the total winning combination ratio and the total winning combination ratio are calculated respectively.

FIG. 29 shows the “combination and consecutive combination ratio calculation table 2” and the “6000G payout buffer”.

In the "combined combination ratio calculation table 2", the medium-time continuous combination payout number storage area, the medium-time payout number storage area, the medium-time continuous combination ratio display data storage area, the medium-time continuous combination payout number storage area, and the middle The hourly payout number storage area, the medium-time bonus ratio display data storage area, and the end code are included. By the payout number counting process (see FIG. 34) and the medium-time counting process (see FIG. 35) described later, the counting result is stored in the storage area of the “6000G payout buffer” described later, and the ratio calculation data setting process (FIG. 35, FIG. (Refer to 31), data is set from the storage area (storage area of the 6000G payout buffer) to the corresponding storage area of the "combined combination ratio calculation table 2". The same value is set in the two medium-time payout number storage areas of the "feature and continuous combination ratio calculation table 2".

The calculation result of the ratio calculation data setting process is set in the medium-time continuous combination ratio display data storage area of the "role and consecutive combination ratio calculation table 2", and the combination ratio is set in the combination ratio monitor 95 based on this calculation result. Information (medium-time continuous combination ratio of type information "6Y") is displayed. On the other hand, the calculation result of the ratio calculation data setting process is set in the medium-time bonus ratio display data storage area of the "feature and continuous combination ratio calculation table 2", and the combination ratio monitor 95 is based on this calculation result. The role ratio information (medium-time role ratio of the type information "7Y") is displayed. Further, the end code of the "accessory and joint combination ratio calculation table 2" is data that serves as a stopper for the calculation process in the ratio calculation data setting process, and is set in the medium-time aggregation process. Here, the medium-time continuous combination ratio and the medium-time bonus ratio are calculated, respectively.

The "6000G payout buffer" has two systems each of a medium-time continuous payout number storage area, a medium-time bonus payout number storage area, and a medium-time payout number storage area (the system of the array [0] and the array [1]. Included by strain). In these storage areas, in the payout number totaling process of FIG. 34, the payout number is accumulated while alternately changing the system every 3000 games, and the ratio calculation data setting process (see FIG. 35) is performed in the medium time totaling process (see FIG. 35). , Fig. 31), the data stored in the storage area of the "6000G payout buffer" is added in the system [0] and the system [1], and the corresponding "feature and consecutive combination ratio calculation table 2" is performed. Is set in the corresponding storage area of.

[Advantageous section aggregation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the advantageous section aggregation process performed in S2011 during the combination monitor aggregation process (see FIG. 27) will be described. Note that FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of advantageous section aggregation processing.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the combination monitor state is the state where the total number of games has reached the upper limit (S2021). In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of games that can be totaled is set to "16777215" (3 bytes), and in this process, it is determined whether or not the total number of games that have been totaled has reached the upper limit. The upper limit of the total number of games that can be totaled can be changed as appropriate. For example, the upper limit of the total number of games that can be totaled may be set to "42949677295" (4 bytes). Further, for example, a predetermined value within the range of 3 bytes (for example, "175000") may be set.

In S2021, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination monitor state is the state where the upper limit of the total number of games has been reached (when the determination in S2021 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section aggregation process and performs the process in the combination monitor. The process proceeds to S2012 during the aggregation process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, in S2021, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination ratio monitoring state is not the state where the total number of games has reached the upper limit (when the determination in S2021 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the game number addition process (S2022). In this game number addition process, if the ART function is operating (that is, during the advantageous section), the data of the advantageous section game number storage area (work) which is composed of 3 bytes and totals the number of games in the advantageous section is 1 In addition to the addition, the data of the total number of games storage area (work), which is composed of 3 bytes and totals the total number of games, is added by 1. Further, when the ART function is not operating (that is, during a normal section that is not in an advantageous section), only the data of the total number of games storage area (work) described above is added by 1.

Whether or not the ART function is operating is determined by referring to, for example, the ART gaming state flag (see FIG. 28). In the present embodiment, the ART gaming state is a gaming state that notifies information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the ART gaming state is basically the RT4 state and the gaming state during the ART winning. In the present embodiment, when the RT state shifts to the RT4 state after winning the ART, the ART game is started. Therefore, the value of the ART game state flag is set based on whether or not the ART is winning and whether or not the game state flag storage area indicates that the game state flag is in the RT4 state. Each bit in the game state flag storage area is assigned a unique bonus type or RT type based on the result of the internal lottery.

In the present embodiment, the number of games is totaled with the ART function being activated as the advantageous section, but what kind of state the game is considered to be in the advantageous section is determined based on a predetermined standard. sell.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the addition result to the total number of games storage area (work) exceeds the total number of games upper limit (or whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit) (S2023). .. In S2023, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of addition to the total number of games storage area (work) exceeds the upper limit of the total number of games (when the determination in S2023 is YES), the main CPU 101 is in the combination monitor state. The state in which the upper limit of the number of games has been reached is set (S2024). Then, after the processing of S2024, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section aggregation processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S2012 in the combination monitor aggregation processing (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, in S2023, when the main CPU 101 determines that the addition result to the total number of games storage area (work) does not exceed the upper limit of the total number of games (when the determination in S2023 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the total number of games. Acquire the lower 2 bytes of data in the number storage area (work) (S2025). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the total number of games has reached the "6000" game (S2026).

In S2026, when the main CPU 101 determines that the total number of games has reached the "6000" game based on the data of the lower two bytes of the total number of games storage area (work) (when the determination in S2026 is YES), the main The CPU 101 sets the total number of games to reach 6000 G in the combination monitor state (S2027). Then, after the processing of S2027, the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of S2032 described later.

On the other hand, in S2026, when the main CPU 101 determines that the total number of games has not reached the "6000" game based on the data of the lower two bytes of the total number of games storage area (work) (when the determination in S2026 is NO). ), The main CPU 101 determines whether or not the total number of games has reached the "175000" game (S2028). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data of the lower two bytes of the total number of games storage area (work) is "0AB98H".

In S2028, when the main CPU 101 determines that the total number of games has not reached the "175000" game based on the data of the lower two bytes of the total number of games storage area (work) (when the determination in S2028 is NO), The main CPU 101 shifts to the process of S2032 described later. On the other hand, in S2028, when the main CPU 101 determines that the total number of games has reached the "175000" game based on the data of the lower two bytes of the total number of games storage area (work) (when the determination in S2028 is YES). , The main CPU 101 acquires the data of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games storage area (work) (S2029).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the total number of games has reached the "175000" game (S2030). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games storage area (work) is "02H". In S2030, when the main CPU 101 determines that the total number of games has not reached the "175000" game based on the data of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games storage area (work) (when the determination in S2030 is NO), The main CPU 101 shifts to the process of S2032 described later.

On the other hand, in S2030, when the main CPU 101 determines that the total number of games has reached the "175000" game based on the data of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games storage area (work) (when the determination in S2030 is YES). , The main CPU 101 sets the total number of games reaching 175000G in the combination monitor state (S2031).

After the processing of S2027, when S2028 is NO-determined, when S2030 is NO-determined, or after the processing of S2031, the main CPU 101 inputs the data of the advantageous section game number storage area (work) and the total game number storage area (work). It is set in the advantageous section ratio calculation table (S2032). In the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio calculation table (calculation data table for calculating the advantageous section ratio) is, as shown in FIG. 28, an advantageous section game number storage area, a total game number storage area, and an advantageous section ratio. This is a table in which addresses are specified in the order of display data storage area and end code.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the ratio calculation data setting process (S2033). In this process, the main CPU 101 calculates the advantageous section ratio based on the data of the advantageous section game number storage area and the data of the total game number storage area, and stores the calculation result in the advantageous section ratio display data storage area. The details of the ratio calculation data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. Then, after the processing of S2033, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section aggregation processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S2012 in the combination monitor aggregation processing (see FIG. 27).

In the present embodiment, as shown in S2021 of FIG. 30, when the combination monitor state reaches the upper limit of the total number of games, the advantageous section aggregation process is terminated and the process is the combination monitor aggregation process (see FIG. 27). It is controlled to move to the processing of S2012, but it is also possible to control the role ratio monitor 95 to display a predetermined character string (for example, error display "ERR1") indicating this state. can.

[Ratio calculation data setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, S2033 in the advantageous section totaling process (see FIG. 30), S2118 in the payout number totaling process (see FIG. 34 described later), and the medium-time totaling process described later (described later). The ratio calculation data setting process performed in S2127 in (see FIG. 35) will be described. Note that FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ratio calculation data setting process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address of the calculation data table is an end code (S2041). That is, when the advantageous section ratio calculation table, the accessory and the combination ratio calculation table 1 described later, or the accessory and the combination ratio calculation table 2 described later are set in the main CPU 101, the current address is the end code. It is determined whether or not it is (00H).

In S2041, when the main CPU 101 determines that the address of the calculation data table is the end code (when the determination in S2041 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the ratio calculation data setting process and performs the advantageous section aggregation process (FIG. 30). In the case of S2033 in (see), this advantageous period totaling process is also completed and the process is moved to S2012 of the combination monitor totaling process (see FIG. 27), and the payout number totaling process (see FIG. 34 described later) is in progress. In the case of S2118, the payout number totaling process is also completed and the process is moved to S2013 of the combination monitor totaling process (see FIG. 27), and S2127 in the medium-time totaling process (see FIG. 35 described later) described later. In that case, the process is transferred to S2128 during the medium-time aggregation process.

On the other hand, in S2041, when the main CPU 101 determines that the address of the calculation data table is not an end code (when the determination in S2041 is NO), the main CPU 101 uses the calculation data table address as the calculation work address 1 (molecule). Transfer to the calculation work address 2 (denominator) (S2042). In this process, for example, when the advantageous section ratio calculation table is set, the address of the advantageous section storage area is transferred to the calculation work address 1 (numerator), and the address of the total number of games storage area is the calculation work. Transferred to address 2 (denominator).

Further, in this process, for example, when the accessory and the consecutive combination ratio calculation table 1 described later are set, the address of the total consecutive combination payout number storage area described later is transferred to the calculation work address 1 (numerator). , The address of the total payout number storage area, which will be described later, is transferred to the calculation work address 2 (denominator). Alternatively, the address of the total payout number storage area described later is transferred to the calculation work address 1 (numerator), and the address of the total payout number storage area described later is transferred to the calculation work address 2 (denominator).

Further, in this process, for example, when the accessory and the consecutive combination ratio calculation table 2 described later are set, the address of the medium-time continuous combination payout number storage area described later becomes the calculation work address 1 (numerator). It is transferred, and the address of the medium-time payout number storage area, which will be described later, is transferred to the calculation work address 2 (denominator). Alternatively, the address of the medium-time payout number storage area described later is transferred to the calculation work address 1 (numerator), and the address of the medium-time payout number storage area described later is transferred to the calculation work address 2 (denominator). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ratio calculation process (S2043). In this process, the ratio information is calculated based on the game information transferred to the calculation work address 1 (numerator) and the calculation work address 2 (denominator). The details of the ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the address of the display data storage area from the calculation data table (S2044). In this process, for example, when the advantageous section ratio calculation table is set, the address of the advantageous section ratio display data storage area is acquired, and when the accessory and the consecutive combination ratio calculation table 1 described later are set. When the address of the total combination ratio display data storage area or the total combination ratio display data storage area, which will be described later, is acquired, and the accessory and the combination ratio calculation table 2 described later is set in, the medium time The address of the continuous combination ratio display data storage area or the medium-time accessory ratio display data storage area is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the address of the calculation data table by +1 (S2045). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation process (see S2043) as display data (ratio information) in the corresponding display data storage area of the calculation data table (S2046). Then, after the processing of S2046, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S2041.

[Ratio calculation processing (approximate value formula)]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, the first aspect (approximate value formula) of the ratio calculation process performed in S2043 of the ratio calculation data setting process (see FIG. 31) will be described. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the ratio calculation process (approximate value formula).

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the calculation work address 2 (denominator) is 0 (S2051). In S2051, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the calculation work address 2 (denominator) is 0 (when the determination in S2051 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the ratio calculation process (approximate value formula). The process is transferred to the process of S2044 in the ratio calculation data setting process (see FIG. 31).

On the other hand, in S2051, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the calculation work address 2 (denominator) is not 0 (when the determination in S2051 is NO), the main CPU 101 inputs the data of the calculation work address 1 (numerator). Transfer to the calculation work 1 (S2052). As described above, the value transferred to the calculation work address 1 (molecule) is within the range of 3 bytes, but as will be described later, the value of the calculation work 1 is multiplied by 100. , Calculation work 1 (molecule) is composed of 4 bytes (however, since the 32nd bit is always 0, the effective bit is 31 bits). However, the calculation work address 1 (numerator) may also be composed of 4 bytes as in the calculation work 1 (numerator).

Next, the main CPU 101 transfers the data of the calculation work address 2 (denominator) to the calculation work 2 (S2053). As described above, as the calculation work 1 (numerator) is composed of 4 bytes, the calculation work 2 (denominator) is also 4 bytes (however, like the calculation work 1 (numerator), the effective number is 31 bits. ). However, the calculation work address 2 (denominator) may also be configured with 4 bytes as in the calculation work 2 (denominator).

Next, the main CPU 101 multiplies the data of the calculation work 1 (numerator) by 100 (S2054). In this ratio calculation process, as will be described later, the 100% (percentage) is calculated by dividing the data of the calculation work 1 (molecule) by the data of the calculation work 2 (denominator). Therefore, in this process, the numerator is multiplied by 100 in advance so that the quotient calculated at that time becomes an integer. The data of the calculation work 1 (numerator) may be divided by the data of the calculation work 2 (denominator) and then multiplied by 100 to calculate the quotient. Further, when the ratio information is displayed on the combination ratio monitor 95, the value multiplied by 100 may be displayed. Further, it is possible to appropriately change how many times the data of the calculation work 1 (numerator) is multiplied according to the ratio information to be calculated.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the highest address (that is, the 4th byte) of the calculation work 1 (numerator) and sets the highest address (that is, the 4th byte) of the calculation work 2 (denominator) (S2055). ). Next, the main CPU 101 sets 2 in the search counter and 0 in the shift counter (S2056).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical sum operation of 1 byte of data of the calculation work 1 (numerator) and 1 byte of data of the calculation work 2 (denominator) (S2057). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the OR operation is 0 (S2058). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data for one byte of the search target stored in the calculation work 1 (numerator) and the calculation work 2 (denominator) are both 0.

In S2058, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the OR operation is not 0 (when the determination in S2058 is NO), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to the process of S2062. On the other hand, in S2058, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the OR operation is 0 (when the determination in S2058 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the address of the calculation work 1 (numerator) by -1 and at the same time. The address of the calculation work 2 (denominator) is updated by -1 (S2059).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the search counter set (S2060). That is, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the search counter. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the search counter is 0 (S2061). In S2061, when the main CPU 101 determines that the search counter is not 0 (when the determination in S2061 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process in S2057. On the other hand, in S2061, when the main CPU 101 determines that the search counter is 0 (when the determination in S2061 is YES), the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to the processing of S2065 described later.

In S2058, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the OR operation is not 0 (when the determination in S2058 is NO), the main CPU 101 shifts the value of the OR operation to the right (S2062). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the least significant bit is 1 as a result of the processing of S2062 (S2063). That is, the main CPU 101 searches for a bit string that is 1 at the highest level within the range of the maximum value of the aggregation target (for example, "175000" of the total number of games) according to the result of the OR operation.

In S2063, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the least significant bit is 1 (when the determination in S2063 is YES), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to the process of S2065 described later. On the other hand, in S2063, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the least significant bit is not 1 (when the determination in S2063 is NO), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the shift counter (S2064). After the processing of S2064, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S2062.

When the determination in S2061 is YES or the determination in S2063 is YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the shift counter is 0 (S2065). In S2065, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the shift counter is not 0 (when the determination in S2065 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the calculation work 1 (numerator) for 2-byte calculation based on the value of the shift counter. In addition to the shift processing, the calculation work 2 (denominator) is shifted for 2-byte calculation (S206). That is, the main CPU 101 has data for 2 bytes from the bit string that is 1 at the highest level within the range of the maximum value to be aggregated (for example, "175000" of the total number of games) according to the result of the OR calculation. Is extracted by each of the calculation work 1 (numerator) and the calculation work 2 (denominator) and stored in the lower 2 bytes.

On the other hand, in S2065, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the shift counter is 0 (when the determination in S2065 is YES), or after the processing of S2066, the main CPU 101 performs the calculation work 1 (numerator) and the calculation work 2 Two bytes (lower two bytes) of data (numerator and denominator) are acquired from (denominator) (S2067).

Next, the main CPU 101 divides the acquired numerator by the acquired denominator to calculate the quotient (S2068). Next, the main CPU 101 multiplies the value of the original calculation work 2 (denominator) by the calculated quotient (S2069). Next, the main CPU 101 compares the multiplication result of S2069 with the value after multiplying the value of the original calculation work 1 (numerator) by 100 (S2070).

Next, the main CPU 101 corrects the value of the quotient (ratio) based on the comparison result of S2070 (S2071). Specifically, the main CPU 101 performs a correction process of subtracting 1 from the quotient (ratio) value when the multiplication result of S2069 is larger than the value after multiplying the value of the original calculation work 1 (numerator) by 100. I do. In this process, an appropriate correction process may be performed so that the value of the quotient (ratio) calculated as an approximate value is less likely to cause an error with the true value. Therefore, the correction process may be performed by setting the comparison target of S2070 to another numerical value and performing another calculation. That is, in this correction process, all operations for making it difficult for an error to occur between the calculated approximate value and the true value can be adopted.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the quotient (ratio) is 100 or more (S2072). Normally, the quotient (ratio) does not exceed 100, so in this process, it may be determined whether or not the quotient (ratio) is 100. Further, in this case, if it is determined that the number exceeds 100, this may be used as an error factor and error processing may be performed.

In S2072, when the main CPU 101 determines that the quotient (ratio) is 100 or more (when the determination in S2072 is YES), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the quotient (ratio) (S2073). This is because, in the present embodiment, as described above, the combination ratio monitor 95 can display only numerical values up to two digits. Then, after the processing of S2073, the main CPU 101 ends the ratio calculation processing (approximate value formula), and shifts the processing to the processing of S2044 in the ratio calculation data setting processing (see FIG. 31). On the other hand, in S2072, when the main CPU 101 determines that the quotient (ratio) is not 100 or more (when the determination in S2072 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the ratio calculation process (approximate value formula) and calculates the ratio. The process is transferred to S2044 during the data setting process (see FIG. 31).

In the present embodiment, the ratio calculation process in S2043 of the ratio calculation data setting process (see FIG. 31) is performed by a method using the approximate value formulas shown in FIGS. 32 and 33. Various other methods can be used depending on the capabilities of the main CPU 101 and the limitations of the capacities of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103.

[Aggregation of the number of payouts]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the payout number totaling process performed in S2012 of the combination monitor totaling process (see FIG. 27) will be described. Note that FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout number counting process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of payouts is 0 (S2101). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal has been paid out in this game. In this process, it may be determined whether or not the number of payouts is 0 without considering the number of inserts, or whether or not the number of payouts is 0 is determined in consideration of the number of inserts. You may try to do it. For example, when three medals are inserted and three medals are paid out in this game, the number of medals to be paid out is 3 in the former, but the number of medals to be paid out is 0 in the latter case. In short, in the payout number totaling process, the payout number may be simply totaled, or the net increase number may be totaled.

In S2101, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of payouts is 0 (when the determination in S2101 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the payout number totaling process and performs the process in the role ratio monitor totaling process (see FIG. 27). Move to the processing of S2013 inside. On the other hand, in S2101, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of payouts is not 0 (when the determination in S2101 is NO), the main CPU 101 is composed of 3 bytes (may be 2 bytes) and has a predetermined game period (may be 2 bytes). The data (medium-time payout number) stored in the medium-time payout number storage area of the 6000G payout buffer, which aggregates the number of payouts in 6000 times), and the 3-byte addition process for adding the current payout number are performed (S2102). As shown in FIG. 29, the medium-time payout number storage area of the 6000G payout buffer is managed by two systems by two arrays, and the system is switched every 3000 games. The detailed description of the 3-byte addition process will be omitted (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the combination monitor state is the state where the total payout number upper limit is reached (S2103). In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of payouts that can be totaled is set to "16777215" (3 bytes), and in this process, it is determined whether or not the total number of payouts that can be totaled has reached the upper limit. The upper limit of the total number of payouts that can be totaled can be changed as appropriate. For example, the upper limit of the total number of payouts that can be totaled may be set to "42949677295" (4 bytes). Further, for example, a predetermined value within the range of 3 bytes (for example, "210000") may be set.

In S2103, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination monitor state is the state in which the upper limit of the total number of payouts has been reached (when the determination in S2103 is YES), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to the process of S2107 described later. On the other hand, in S2103, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning combination monitor state is not the state where the upper limit of the total number of payouts has been reached (when the determination in S2103 is NO), the main CPU 101 is composed of 3 bytes and totals the total number of payouts. A 3-byte addition process is performed in which the current payout number is added to the data (total payout number) stored in the total payout number storage area (work) (S2104).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data stored in the total payout number storage area (work) has reached the upper limit (S2105). In S2105, when the main CPU 101 determines that the data stored in the total payout number storage area (work) has not reached the upper limit (when the determination in S2105 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs processing in S2107, which will be described later. Move to the processing of. On the other hand, in S2105, when the main CPU 101 determines that the data stored in the total payout number storage area (work) has reached the upper limit (when the determination in S2105 is YES), the main CPU 101 is in the role ratio monitor state. The state of reaching the upper limit of the total number of payouts is set (S2106).

In S2103, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning ratio monitor state has reached the upper limit of the total number of payouts (when the determination in S2103 is YES), in S2105, the main CPU 101 stores the total number of payouts in the storage area (work). When it is determined that the upper limit of the data is not reached (when the determination in S2105 is NO), or after the processing in S2106, the main CPU 101 acquires a special prize signal (S2107).

Next, the main CPU 101 outputs a special prize signal indicating the operation of SB (ordinary accessory), CB (type 2 special accessory), or RB (type 1 special accessory) with respect to the acquired special prize signal. It is determined whether or not it is (generated) (S2108). That is, in this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not any of the installed bonuses (special bonuses) is in operation. In addition, in this embodiment, SB (ordinary accessory) and CB (type 2 special accessory) are not mounted, and RB (type 1 special accessory) is always in the BB (accessory continuous operation device). Things) are supposed to work.

In S2108, the main CPU 101 does not output (generate) a special prize signal indicating the operation of SB (ordinary accessory), CB (type 2 special accessory), or RB (type 1 special accessory). When it is determined (when the determination in S2108 is NO), the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to the processing in S2116 described later. On the other hand, in S2108, the main CPU 101 outputs (generates) a special prize signal indicating the operation of either SB (ordinary accessory), CB (type 2 special accessory), or RB (type 1 special accessory). When it is determined that the signal has been output (when the determination in S2108 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special prize signal being output (generated) is RB (Type 1 special accessory) (S2109). ..

In S2109, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special prize signal being output (generated) is not an RB (type 1 special accessory) (when the determination in S2109 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs processing in S2113 described later. Move to processing. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special prize signal being output (generated) is RB (type 1 special accessory) (when the determination in S2109 is YES), the main CPU 101 has 3 bytes (2 bytes). Data (may be), which is stored in the medium-time continuous payout number storage area of the 6000G payout buffer, which aggregates the number of payouts due to the operation of the BB (RB) during a predetermined game period (6000 times). A 3-byte addition process is performed to add the number of payouts this time to the number of payouts for medium-time continuous use (S2110). As shown in FIG. 29, the medium-time continuous payout number storage area of the 6000G payout buffer is managed by two systems by two arrays, and the system is switched every 3000 games.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the combination monitor state is the state where the total payout number upper limit is reached (S2111). In S2111, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning combination monitor state is not the total payout number upper limit reached state (when the determination in S2111 is NO), the main CPU 101 is composed of 3 bytes and the total payout is performed by the operation of the BB (RB). A 3-byte addition process is performed in which the current payout number is added to the data (total number of consecutive payouts) stored in the total number of consecutive payouts storage area (work) for totaling the number of sheets (S2112).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S2109 that the special prize signal being output (generated) is not an RB (type 1 special accessory) (when the determination in S2109 is NO), in S2111, the main CPU 101 monitors the combination ratio. When it is determined that the upper limit of the total number of payouts has been reached (when the determination in S2111 is YES), or after the processing of S2112, the main CPU 101 is composed of 3 bytes (may be 2 bytes) and is predetermined. The data (medium-time bonus payout number) stored in the medium-time bonus payout number storage area of the 6000G payout buffer, which totals the number of payouts due to the operation of all the bonuses during the game period (6000 times), is added to this time. A 3-byte addition process for adding the number of payouts is performed (S2113). As shown in FIG. 29, the medium-time bonus payout number storage area of the 6000G payout buffer is managed by two systems by two arrays, and the system is switched every 3000 games.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the combination monitor state is the state where the total payout number upper limit is reached (S2114). In S2114, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination monitor state is the total payout number upper limit reached state (when the determination in S2114 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the payout number counting process and performs the process in the combination monitor. The process proceeds to S2013 during the aggregation process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, in S2114, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination monitor state is not the total payout number upper limit reached state (when the determination in S2114 is NO), the main CPU 101 is composed of 3 bytes and all the accessories are operated. A 3-byte addition process is performed in which the current number of payouts is added to the data (total number of payouts) stored in the total number of payouts storage area (work) for totaling the total number of payouts (S2115).

In S2108, the main CPU 101 does not output (generate) a special prize signal indicating the operation of SB (ordinary accessory), CB (type 2 special accessory), or RB (type 1 special accessory). When it is determined (when S2108 is NO determination), or after the processing of S2115, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the combination ratio monitoring state is the total payout number upper limit reached state (S2116). In S2116, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination monitor state is the total payout number upper limit reached state (when the determination in S2116 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the payout number counting process and performs the process in the combination monitor. The process proceeds to S2013 during the aggregation process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, in S2116, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination ratio monitoring state is not the total payout number upper limit reached state (NO determination in S2116), the main CPU 101 is in the total consecutive payout number storage area (work) and the total combination. The data of the product payout number storage area (work) and the total payout number storage area (work) are set in the accessory and the consecutive combination ratio calculation table 1 (S2117). In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the accessory and joint combination ratio calculation table 1 (calculation data table for calculating the total consecutive combination ratio and the total combination ratio) is It is a table in which addresses are specified in the order of total payout number storage area, total consecutive combination ratio display data storage area, total bonus payout number storage area, total payout number storage area, total bonus ratio display data storage area, and end code.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ratio calculation data setting process (see FIG. 31) (S2118). The ratio calculation data setting process is as described above, and the description thereof is omitted here. Then, after the process of S2118, the main CPU 101 ends the payout number counting process, and shifts the process to the process of S2013 in the combination monitor totaling process (see FIG. 27).

In the present embodiment, as shown in S2114 and S2116 of FIG. 34, when the combination ratio monitor state reaches the upper limit of the total number of payouts, the number of payouts totaling process is terminated and the process is performed by the combination monitor totalization process (FIG. 27). It is controlled to move to the process of S2013 in (see), and further, it is controlled to display a predetermined character string (for example, error display "ERR2") indicating this state on the combination monitor 95. You can also do it.

[Medium-time aggregation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the medium-time aggregation process performed in S2013 of the combination monitor aggregation process (see FIG. 27) will be described. Note that FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the medium-time aggregation process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the 3000G management counter is less than 3000 (S2121). The 3000G management counter is a counter that counts the number of games after a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied (for example, the counter is cleared) for display control of the combination monitor 95, and will be described later. In addition, the medium-time continuous combination ratio and the medium-time bonus ratio are not calculated until the 3000G management counter reaches 3000.

In S2121, when the main CPU 101 determines that the 3000G management counter is less than 3000 (when the determination in S2121 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the 3000G management counter (S2122). Then, after the processing of S2122, the main CPU 101 ends the medium-time aggregation processing, also ends the combination monitor aggregation processing (see FIG. 27), and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 18).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2121 that the 3000G management counter is not less than 3000 (when the determination in S2121 is YES), the main CPU 101 pays out 6000G from the buffer selection pointer after clearing the 3000G management counter in S2122a. Calculate the buffer address (S2123). That is, the main CPU 101 grasps the system of the 6000G payout buffer (whether the system of the array [0] or the system of the array [1]) based on the buffer selection pointer, and each area (medium time payout number storage area, medium). The addresses of the time-continuous payout number storage area and the medium-time payout number storage area (see FIG. 29) are calculated. As described above, the buffer selection pointer is a pointer indicating whether the system is the array [0] or the array [1] (it is assumed that the array [0] is indicated in the initial state), and S2128 described later. By the process of, it is switched alternately every 3000 games.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the winning combination monitor state is the 6000G reaching state (see FIG. 30) (S2124). In S2124, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning ratio monitor state is not the 6000G reaching state (when the determination in S2124 is NO), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to S2128 described later. In S2124, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination monitor state is not the 6000G reached state (NO determination in S2124), the main CPU 101 ends the medium-time aggregation process and performs the combination monitor aggregation process (FIG. FIG. (See 27) is also completed, and the process may be transferred to the process of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 18).

On the other hand, in S2124, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning ratio monitor state has reached 6000G (when the determination in S2124 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines the 6000G payout buffer obtained by the payout number counting process shown in FIG. The data of the two systems stored in each area of is added (S2125). For example, in the 6000G payout buffer, the data of the medium-time payout number storage area [0] and the data of the medium-time payout number storage area [1] are added, and the data of the medium-time continuous payout number storage area [0] and the medium time are added. The data of the continuous combination payout number storage area [1] is added, and the data of the medium-time bonus payout number storage area [0] and the data of the medium-time bonus payout number storage area [1] are added (see FIG. 29). ..

In S2124, the main CPU 101 sets the data of each area obtained by the addition process of S2125 in the corresponding area of the accessory and the continuous combination ratio calculation table 2 (S2126). In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Payout number storage area, medium time payout number storage area, medium time continuous combination ratio display data storage area, medium time bonus payout number storage area, medium time payout number storage area, medium time bonus ratio display data storage area, end code It is a table in which addresses are specified in the order of.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ratio calculation data setting process (see FIG. 31) (S2127). The ratio calculation data setting process is as described above, and the description thereof is omitted here. Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the buffer selection pointer (S2129). In the process of S2129, when the buffer selection pointer becomes 2, the buffer selection pointer is cleared to 0. As a result, the state in which the buffer selection pointer indicates the system of the array [0] and the state in which the buffer selection pointer indicates the system of the array [1] are alternately repeated.

Next, the 6000G payout buffer of the corresponding system is cleared based on the updated buffer selection pointer (S2129). After the processing of S2129, the main CPU 101 ends the medium-time aggregation processing, also ends the combination monitor aggregation processing (see FIG. 27), and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 18).

By switching the buffer selection pointer for each 3000 games in this way, in the payout number counting process shown in FIG. 34, the 6000G payout buffer is managed in a different system for each 3000 games, and the number of payouts for each 3000 games is accumulated and stored. can do. Therefore, in the medium-time aggregation process of FIG. 35, the ratio of the latest 6000 games is calculated by adding the 6000G payout buffer of the first system and the 6000G payout buffer of the second system (medium-time ream). The winning combination ratio and the medium-time winning combination ratio) can be calculated at 3000 game intervals and displayed on the winning combination monitor 95.

In the present embodiment, the medium-time aggregation process is realized by the above method due to the limitation of the capacity of the main CPU 101 and the capacities of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103, but various other methods can be used. can. For example, the ratio of the latest 6000 games can be grasped and displayed at shorter intervals such as 1000 games or 1 game according to the CPU power and the memory capacity.

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the interrupt process performed by the main CPU 101 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the interrupt process. The interrupt process repeatedly executed at a cycle of 1.1172 msec is generated based on the output timing of the timeout signal of the timer circuit 113 set in the initialization process of the timer circuit 113 (PTC) (see S2 in FIG. 17). This is a process executed when the interrupt request signal from the interrupt controller 112 is input to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S901). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an input port check process (S902). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel control process (S903). In this process, the main CPU 101 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the reels are requested to start rotating, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. Drive and control three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 101 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 101 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window) of the corresponding reel. The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data transmission process (S904). In this process, various commands stored in the communication data storage area are mainly transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 via the first serial communication circuit 114 (see FIG. 9) of the main control circuit 90. After transmitting a command to the sub-control circuit 200, the main CPU 101 subtracts and updates the communication data pointer by one packet (not shown), and clears the transmitted command data in the communication data storage area. When a plurality of command data are stored in the communication data storage area, the command data is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in the order of the oldest stored command data. Further, when the command data is not stored in the communication data storage area, that is, when the value of the communication data pointer is "0", a non-operation command is generated and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a insertion medal passage check process (S905). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the inserted medal has passed the selector 66 based on the detection result (medal sensor input state) of the medal sensor (not shown). Next, the main CPU 101 performs the WDT restart process (S906).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment LED drive process (S907). In this process, the main CPU 101 drives and controls various 7-segment LEDs included in the information display 6, and displays, for example, the number of medals paid out, the number of credits, the stop button pressing order data, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process (S908). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a count (subtraction) process of various set timers.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error detection process (S909). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a door open / close check process (S910). In the door open / close check process, the main CPU 101 checks the open / closed state of the front door 2b (see FIG. 2) by checking the on (door open) / off (door closed) state of the door open / close monitoring switch 67.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a combination monitor display management process (S911). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the display content of the combination monitor 95 according to the result of the aggregation and the ratio calculation by the combination monitor aggregation process (see FIG. 27). The details of the combination monitor display management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the combination ratio information transmission process (S912). In this process, the main CPU 101 shows the result (role ratio information) of the aggregation and the ratio calculation by the combination ratio monitor aggregation process (see FIG. 27) regardless of the display / non-display of the combination ratio monitor 95. The BLE module 49 controls wireless transmission. The details of the combination information transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a register reset process (S913). Then, after the processing of S913, the main CPU 101 ends the interrupt processing.

[Ratio monitor display management process]
Next, the combination monitor display management process performed in S911 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 36) will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. 37 to 39 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the combination monitor display management process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the combination display mode is display (display on) (S2141). In S2141, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination display mode is not display (display on) (non-display (display off)) (when S2141 is NO determination), the main CPU 101 initializes the display channel. (S2142).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the initial value (timer value corresponding to the change interval of about 5 seconds) in the display update timer, and sets the initial value (timer value corresponding to about 0.6 seconds) in the blinking management timer (timer value corresponding to about 0.6 seconds). S2143). The display update timer is a timer that manages switching of display contents (type information and ratio information) on the combination monitor 95, and the blinking management timer is a timer that manages blinking of the display on the combination monitor 95. Then, after the processing of S2143, the main CPU 101 ends the combination monitor display management processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S912 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, in S2141, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination ratio display mode is display (display on) (when the determination in S2141 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the combination ratio non-display condition is satisfied. Is determined (S2144). In S2144, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination non-display condition is not satisfied (NO in S2144), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is on (when the combination ratio non-display condition is not satisfied). S2145). As the combination non-display condition, for example, when the settlement switch 78 is in the ON state, the setting key type switch 54 (setting switch) is in the ON state, a medal is inserted, and an error occurs. Can be set when is occurring.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S2144 that the combination non-display condition is satisfied (when the determination in S2144 is YES), or when the main CPU 101 determines in S2145 that the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is not on. (When the determination in S2145 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the display end wait (end wait) in the combination display mode (S2146). Here, when the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is on, it means that the front door 2b is in the open state, and when the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is off, it means that the front door 2b is in the closed state. By the process of S2146, when the front door 2b is in the closed state (because no one sees the combination ratio monitor 95), the display of the combination ratio monitor 95 is suppressed. Further, such display suppression of the role ratio monitor 95 is preferable from the viewpoint of security.

On the other hand, in S2145, when the main CPU 101 determines that the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is ON (when the determination in S2145 is YES), or after the processing of S2146, the main CPU 101 sets the turn-off timing (S2147). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the blinking management timer (S2148). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the blinking management timer is larger than the initial value / 2 (S2149).

In S2149, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the blinking management timer is larger than the initial value / 2 (when the determination in S2149 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the lighting timing (S2150). That is, the main CPU 101 lights the display of the combination ratio monitor 95 when the value of the blinking management timer is within the predetermined range, and displays the combination ratio monitor 95 when the value of the blinking management timer is outside the predetermined range. By turning off the light, the display of the role ratio monitor 95 is blinked.

On the other hand, in S2149, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the blinking management timer is equal to or less than the initial value / 2 (when the determination in S2149 is NO), or after the processing of S2150, the main CPU 101 sets the display update timer to 1. Subtract (S2151). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the display update timer has timed up (S2152). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the period corresponding to the initial value of the set display update timer has elapsed.

In S2152, when the main CPU 101 determines that the display update timer has timed up (when the determination in S2152 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the display selection value (S2153). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the display selection value to 0 when the result of adding 1 to the display selection value is 5. On the other hand, in S2152, when the main CPU 101 determines that the display update timer has not timed up (when the determination in S2152 is NO), or after the processing of S2153, the main CPU 101 determines the corresponding display data from the display selection value. Storage area (for example, advantageous section ratio display data storage area of the advantageous section ratio calculation table shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, total combination ratio display data storage area of the accessory and linkage ratio calculation table 1, total combination ratio display The address of the data storage area, the accessory and the combination ratio display data storage area, the medium-time combination ratio display data storage area, the medium-time combination ratio display data storage area, etc.) is calculated (S2154).

Here, the display selection value is a value for selecting the display content of the combination monitor 95. For example, the display selection value 0 corresponds to the type information of "7U" (advantageous section ratio). The display selection value 1 corresponds to the type information "6Y" (medium time consecutive combination ratio), and the display selection value 2 corresponds to the type information "7Y" (medium time accessory ratio). The display selection value 3 corresponds to the type information "6A" (total winning combination ratio), and the display selection value 4 corresponds to the type information "7A" (total winning combination ratio).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the combination ratio monitor state has reached the specified number of games for displaying the ratio information (S2155). That is, the main CPU 101 determines from the combination ratio monitor state whether it is time to display the ratio information related to the type information corresponding to the display selection value.

For example, regarding the advantageous section ratio of the type information "7U", when the combination ratio monitoring state is not "175000G reached state", the ratio information for the type information is controlled to be hidden. Further, regarding the medium-time continuous combination ratio of the type information "6Y" and the medium-time bonus ratio of the type information "7Y", when the combination ratio monitor state is not "6000G reached state", the ratio to the type information. Information is controlled to be hidden. Further, "17500G reached state" is provided as the role ratio monitor state, and the role ratio monitor state is set to "17500G reached state" with respect to the total winning combination ratio of the type information "6A" and the total winning combination ratio of the type information "7A". If not, the ratio information to the type information is controlled to be hidden.

In S2155, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination ratio monitor state has not reached the specified number of games for displaying the ratio information (when S2155 is NO determination), the main CPU 101 is set to S2159, which will be described later. Move to the processing of. Further, in this case, the ratio blinking determination value is 0.

On the other hand, in S2155, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination ratio monitor state has reached the specified number of games for displaying the ratio information (when the determination in S2155 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines. The type character string and the ratio blinking determination value are acquired according to the display selection value (S2156). The type character string is data for displaying the type information, and the ratio blinking determination value is data for selecting the display mode of the ratio information. For example, when the ratio display is blinked, "1" , Set "2" to turn on the ratio display.

Further, for example, regarding the advantageous section ratio of the type information "7U", when the ratio information is 70% or more, the ratio information with respect to the type information is controlled to blink. Further, regarding the medium-time continuous combination ratio of the type information "6Y" and the total continuous combination ratio of the type information "6A", when the ratio information is 60% or more, the ratio information for the type information is controlled to blink. Will be done. Further, regarding the medium-time bonus ratio of the type information "7Y" and the total bonus ratio of the type information "7A", when the ratio information is 70% or more, the ratio information for the type information is displayed blinking. Be controlled.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the lighting timing (S2157). When the main CPU 101 determines in S2157 that it is the lighting timing (when the determination in S2157 is YES), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to S2159 described later. On the other hand, in S2157, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not the lighting timing (when the determination in S2157 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the light off (S2158).

In S2155, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination ratio monitor state has not reached the specified number of games for displaying the ratio information (when the determination in S2155 is NO), in S2157, the main CPU 101 determines that the number of games has not reached the specified number. When it is determined that it is the lighting timing (when the determination in S2157 is YES), or after the processing in S2158, the main CPU 101 saves the type character string stored in advance in the abbreviation area (not shown) (S2159).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires display data (ratio information) from the display data storage area corresponding to the type information to be displayed (S2160). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores, for example, an advantageous section ratio display data storage area, a total consecutive combination ratio display data storage area, a total accessory ratio display data storage area, and a medium-time continuous combination ratio display data according to a display selection value. Acquires the display data stored in the display data storage area of either the area or the medium-time accessory ratio display data storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the acquired ratio blinking determination value is 0 (S2161). When the ratio blinking judgment value is 0, it means that the combination ratio monitor state has not reached the specified number of games for displaying the ratio information. In this case, the type information is displayed from the abbreviation area. Is set in the type display area, and "---" is set in the ratio display area.

That is, in S2161, when the main CPU 101 determines that the acquired ratio blinking determination value is 0 (when the determination in S2161 is YES), the main CPU 101 displays the ratio display area (that is, as ratio information). "---" Is set in (display data of) (S2162). That is, when the ratio blinking determination value is 0, the specific ratio information is not displayed. Then, after the processing of S2162, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing of S2166 and generates 7-segment display data for displaying "−−".

On the other hand, in S2161, when the main CPU 101 determines that the acquired ratio blinking determination value is not 0 (when the determination in S2161 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the display data is lit or the lighting timing. Is determined (S2163). That is, whether or not the main CPU 101 continuously lights the ratio information without blinking, or blinks the ratio information at the lighting timing set in S2150 (displays display data). Whether it is time to do it or not) is determined. In the present embodiment, when the value of the ratio information exceeds a predetermined threshold value (for example, when the advantageous section ratio, the continuous combination ratio, the accessory ratio, etc. become abnormal values), the inspector or the like In order to attract attention, the ratio information is controlled to blink.

In S2163, when the main CPU 101 determines that the display data is not lit or the lighting timing (when the determination in S2163 is NO), the main CPU 101 clears the ratio display area (S2164). Then, after the processing of S2164, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing of S2166 and generates 7-segment display data for displaying the cleared ratio display area.

On the other hand, in S2163, when the main CPU 101 determines that the display data is lit or the lighting timing (when the determination in S2163 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the display data in the ratio display area (S2165).

After that, the 7-segment display data generation process is performed based on the data of the ratio display area set in this way (S2166). In this process, the 2-digit type character string set in the type display area and the display data set in the ratio display area (for example, in addition to the 2-digit ratio information, "---", cleared data, etc.) Is generated by a 4-digit 7-segment LED circuit (role ratio monitor 95) to generate 7-segment display data. In this case, the 7-segment display data is, for example, 7-segment common output (selection) data and 7-segment cathode output data. Here, the 7-segment common output (selection) data is data for specifying which digit of the role ratio monitor 95 is the output, and the 7-segment cathode output data specifies which segment of the specified digit is to be lit. It is the data to be done.

Next, the main CPU 101 outputs 7-segment common output (selection) data and 7-segment cathode output data to the combination monitor 95 (S2167). As a result, the 7-segment common output (selection) data is sequentially output to the 7-segment LED of the digit selected by the 7-segment common output data on the combination monitor 95, and the characters, numbers, and symbols specified on the 7-segment LED are displayed. Expressed (dynamic lighting control).

Since the 7-segment common output (selection) data and the 7-segment cathode output data are sequentially output at the interrupt timing, characters, numbers, and symbols can be displayed or hidden for each 7-segment LED. In addition, display modes such as lighting and blinking are also controlled. In this example, 7-segment common output (selection) data and 7-segment cathode output data are output for each interrupt timing, but the interrupt counter is updated for each interrupt, and depending on the value of the interrupt counter, more It is also possible to perform the output processing at long predetermined intervals.

After the process of S2167, the main CPU 101 ends the role ratio monitor display management process, and shifts the process to the process of S912 in the interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the value of the ratio information exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the ratio information is blinked in order to attract the attention of the inspector or the like, but the game information of a sufficient number of games is provided. The type information can be made to blink when it is not stored.

[Ratio information transmission process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the combination ratio information transmission process performed in S912 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 36) will be described. Note that FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination ratio information transmission process.

First, the main CPU 101 calculates the address of the display data storage area corresponding to all the display selection values (0 to 4) (S2181). By this processing, similarly to S2154 of FIG. 38, for example, the advantageous section ratio display data storage area of the advantageous section ratio calculation table shown in FIGS. The addresses of the data storage area, the total accessory ratio display data storage area, the accessory and the consecutive combination ratio calculation table 2, the medium-time consecutive combination ratio display data storage area, and the medium-time accessory ratio display data storage area are calculated.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the type character string (type information) corresponding to each display selection value (S2182). For example, type information such as "7U", "6Y", "7Y", "6A", and "7A" is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires display data (ratio information) corresponding to each display selection value (S2183). For example, the advantageous section ratio is acquired from the advantageous section ratio display data storage area of the advantageous section ratio calculation table corresponding to the type information "7U", and this display data is grasped as the ratio information corresponding to the type information "7U". do.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the gaming machine ID (S2184). The gaming machine ID is, for example, an ID stored in the main ROM, and as described above, any identifier may be used as long as the gaming machine can be uniquely identified at least in the hall store. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the winning ratio monitor state (S2185). As described above, the combination monitor state is stored in the main RAM, and data for indicating the status of the total number of games and whether or not the total value has reached the upper limit is stored. Instead of the role ratio monitor state, the counted number of games can be used.

Next, the main CPU 101 collects each of the above-mentioned acquired information (that is, game machine ID, combination ratio monitor status, combination ratio information (type information and ratio information)) as data related to all display selection values, and externally. It is transmitted to the BLE module 49 of the centralized terminal plate 47 (S2186).

After the processing of S2186, the main CPU 101 ends the combination ratio information transmission processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S913 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 36).

In the role ratio information transmission process of the present embodiment, the role ratio information related to all the display selection values is controlled to be collectively transmitted to the BLE module 49, but for example, one display selection value is transmitted in one process. The role ratio information regarding all the display selection values may be transmitted by transmitting the role ratio information regarding all the display selection values by five times of processing (interruption processing).

Further, the combination ratio information transmitted in this way is finally wirelessly transmitted via the BLE chip 49d of the BLE module 49, but the cycle of the wireless transmission is longer than the cycle of the interrupt processing of FIG. 36. Can also adjust the transmission cycle by the combination ratio information transmission process by adjusting the transmission cycle to the transmission cycle of the BLE module 49, receiving the wireless transmission end signal from the BLE module 49, and the like.

<Explanation of BLE module operation>
[BLE transmission control processing in the BLE module]
Next, the BLE transmission control process executed by the CPU 49a of the BLE module 49 and the BLE chip 49d will be described with reference to FIG. 41. Note that FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the BLE transmission control process.

First, the CPU 49a determines whether or not the transmission data transmitted from the main CPU 101 by the role ratio information transmission process shown in FIG. 40 has been received (S2201). When the CPU 49a determines in S2201 that the transmission data has not been received (when the determination in S2201 is NO), the determination process is repeated. Although the determination process is repeated here for convenience, the BLE transmission control process can be started when the data transmitted from the main CPU 101 is received.

In S2201, when the CPU 49a determines that the transmission data has been received (when the determination in S2201 is YES), the CPU 49a sets a predetermined value in the parameter (S2202). For example, when transmitting an iBeacon (registered trademark) beacon signal according to the BLE standard, set the "organization ID" or "maker ID" in the UUID, and set the "game machine name ID" indicating the game machine name in the major. , Set the "game machine ID" in minor.

Next, in S2203, the CPU 49a encrypts the role ratio monitor status, the role ratio information (type information and ratio information) received from the main CPU 101, and data such as UUID, major, and minor by a predetermined encryption method. The encrypted data obtained as a result of the encryption is stored in the RAM 49c. In the present embodiment, the data including the role ratio information to be encrypted is configured in a unique format.

Next, the CPU 49a determines whether or not the timing is such that BLE transmission is possible (S2204). In S2204, when the CPU 49a determines that the BLE transmission timing has not arrived (when the determination in S2204 is NO), the determination process is repeated and waits until the BLE transmission timing arrives.

In S2204, when the CPU 49a determines that the BLE transmission timing has arrived (when the determination in S2204 is YES), the CPU 49a reads the encrypted data stored in the RAM 49c by the BLE chip 49d, and the beacon signal according to the BLE standard. Is controlled to be transmitted (S2205). In response to such control of the CPU 49a, the BLE chip 49d of the BLE module 49 modulates the encrypted data and transmits radio waves (beacon signals) to the surroundings (via the antenna) based on the modulated data. ..

After the processing of S2205, the CPU 49a returns to the processing of S2201.

In the present embodiment, by the combination ratio information transmission process shown in FIG. 40, the combination ratio information (for example, type information “7U”, “6Y”, “7Y” corresponding to all the display selection values is stored in the BLE module 49. , "6A", "7A") are transmitted at once, so that the BLE transmission control process also wirelessly transmits the role ratio information corresponding to all these display selection values at once. It is controlled, but the role ratio information is divided into, for example, the role ratio information corresponding to one display selection value, or divided into smaller data units, depending on the limitation of the transmission data length and the transmission timing by the wireless transmission standard. It can also be transmitted wirelessly.

Further, in the present embodiment, basically, the gaming machine ID for identifying the gaming machine is transmitted to the BLE module 49 by the combination ratio information transmission processing shown in FIG. 40, but in the main control circuit 90 and the like, the gaming machine ID is transmitted. When such a gaming machine ID is not stored or set, the ID stored in the CPU 49a, ROM 49b, BLE chip 49d, etc. of the BLE module 49 is used, and this ID is used as the gaming table number or the like. As a result, the gaming machines may be individually identified by associating them. However, in this case, when the external centralized terminal plate 47 is replaced, it is necessary to update the correspondence between the ID and the game console number or the like.

In addition, as a method of realizing the transmission function of the combination ratio information described above (the transmission function from the main control circuit 90 to the BLE module 49) and the transmission function of transmitting the combination ratio information as a beacon signal, FIGS. 40, 41, etc. The procedure shown in (1) is only an example, and it is possible to realize a function of transmitting role ratio information having the same effect by various other methods.

[Omission of role ratio monitor]
In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 totals the number of games and the number of payouts in each game in the combination monitor aggregation process (S217 in FIG. 18) of the main process to calculate the combination information and interrupt processing. In the role ratio monitor display management process (S911 in FIG. 36), the calculated role ratio information is controlled to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 95.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the role ratio information transmission process of the interrupt process (S912 in FIG. 36), the role ratio information is transmitted by a beacon signal based on the BLE standard via the BLE module 49. .. With such a configuration, the role ratio information of each gaming machine can be received and displayed on a mobile terminal or the like via a wireless communication network, and the role ratio information can be confirmed without opening the front door 2b. ..

However, here, it is also possible to configure the BLE module 49 to transmit only the combination ratio information without displaying the combination ratio information by the combination ratio monitor 95. In this case, basically, the execution of the medal reception / start check process combination monitor display switching process (S226 in FIG. 19) and the interrupt process combination monitor display management process (S911 in FIG. 36) is omitted. Can be done.

<< Second Embodiment >>
Next, the connection form of the pachislot machine 1'of the second embodiment, in which the connection form of the main control circuit and the BLE module is different from that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a circuit block diagram showing a connection form between the main control circuit 490 and the BLE module 449. As in the case of FIG. 11, a cabinet-side relay board is interposed between the main control circuit 490 and the BLE module 449, but this is omitted here.

<Connection form between main control circuit and BLE module>
In FIG. 42, the main control circuit 490 includes a microprocessor 491 (main CPU 401) and a role ratio monitor 495, where the role ratio monitor 495 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED circuit. When the microprocessor 491 transmits the combination ratio information (output data for the 4-digit 7-segment LED) to the combination ratio monitor 495, the combination ratio monitor 495 lights the 4-digit 7-segment LED accordingly. It is designed to display the role ratio information.

A relay circuit 448 and a BLE module 449 are mounted on the substrate of the external centralized terminal board 447, and the microprocessor 491 mounts a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal (one medal insertion and a medal payout signal) on the external centralized terminal board 447. When one pulse signal is sent for each medal payout), these signals are provided to the external data display device 300 connected to the external centralized terminal board 447 via the relay circuit 448. NS.

The microprocessor 491 also transmits the game machine ID and the combination ratio source data necessary for obtaining the combination ratio information to the BLE module 449. The BLE module 449 includes a CPU 449a, a ROM 449b, a RAM 449c, and a BLE chip 449d. When the CPU 449a receives data from the microprocessor 491 (game machine ID and combination ratio source data for obtaining combination ratio information) based on the program stored in ROM 449b, the CPU 449a aggregates the combination source data. Then, the role ratio information is requested. After that, the BLE chip 449d is controlled, and the game machine ID and the obtained combination ratio information are wirelessly transmitted from the antenna of the BLE chip 449d as a BLE standard beacon signal. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip 449d can be received by a mobile device such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via a wireless communication network.

In the example of FIG. 42, the microprocessor 491 is configured to be directly connected to the BLE module 449 of the external centralized terminal plate 447 by a cable, but is provided by the microprocessor 491 by various other connection forms. The game machine ID and the combination data for obtaining the combination information are transmitted to the CPU 449a of the BLE module 449. For example, as shown by the dotted line arrow in FIG. 42, the game machine ID and the combination ratio are determined by a route using a part of the signal line connecting the microprocessor 491 and the relay circuit 448 of the external centralized terminal board 447. The function ratio source data for obtaining information can be transmitted from the microprocessor 491 to the CPU 449a.

Here, as described with respect to FIG. 11, the gaming machine ID is an identifier that can individually identify a gaming machine such as pachislot 1 (at least, can be individually identified in a hall store), and various data can be used as the gaming machine ID. Can be adopted.

The power supply for the external centralized terminal plate 447 is provided from, for example, the main control circuit 490. A backup power supply can also be installed on the external centralized terminal plate 447. Further, for the RAM 449c of the BLE module 449, for example, a volatile memory such as a DRAM (Dyanamic RAM) or a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory can be adopted.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, regarding the processing in the pachi-slot machine 1'of the second embodiment, a processing different from that of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described.

[Main processing of pachislot under the control of the main CPU]
Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the main process (main operation process) of the pachi-slot machine 1'executed under the control of the main CPU 401 will be described. Note that FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process.

Here, the processing of S201 to S217 and S218 to S220 is the same as the processing in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG.

In the second embodiment, the combination ratio source data transmission process (S217a) is newly added after the combination ratio monitor aggregation processing of S217. This process is a process of transmitting the combination source data to the CPU 449a of the BLE module 449 so that the combination ratio information can be obtained by the BLE module 449. The details of the combination data transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

[Transmission of role ratio source data]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the combination element data transmission process performed in S217a during the main process (see FIG. 43) will be described. Note that FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination element data transmission process.

First, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not this combination source data transmission process is started for the first time (S2221). When the main CPU 401 determines that the combination element data transmission process is started for the first time (when the determination in S2221 is YES), the main CPU 401 acquires the game machine ID and sets it in the combination source data (S2222). .. The gaming machine ID is the same as that of the first embodiment, and is, for example, an identifier stored in the main ROM 402 that can identify the gaming machine (pachislot machine 1').

When the main CPU 401 determines that the combination element data transmission process is not started for the first time (when S2221 is a NO determination), or after the process of S2222, the main CPU 401 outputs the number of payouts, the ART game state flag, and the special prize signal. It is acquired from the main RAM 403 and these information are set in the role ratio source data (S2223). Here, the payout number is, for example, the payout number stored in the winning number counter (see FIG. 25), and the ART game state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game is in the ART game state, which is an advantageous section. Is. Further, the special prize signal is data indicating the game state of the game, and is determined based on the data stored in the game state flag storage area, and indicates the game state such as SB, CB, and RB.

Next, the main CPU 401 transmits the combination element data to the BLE module 449 of the external centralized terminal board 447 (S2224).

After the processing of S2224, the main CPU 401 ends the combination data transmission processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main processing (see FIG. 43).

<Explanation of BLE module operation>
[BLE transmission control processing in the BLE module]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the BLE transmission control process executed by the CPU 449a of the BLE module 449 and the BLE chip 449d in the second embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the BLE transmission control process.

First, the CPU 449a determines whether or not the combination element data transmitted by the combination element data transmission process shown in FIG. 44 has been received from the main CPU 401 (S2241). In S2241, when the CPU 449a determines that the combination source data has not been received (when the determination in S2241 is NO), the CPU 449a repeats the determination process. Here, for convenience, the determination process is repeated, but the BLE transmission control process may be started when the combination element data transmitted from the main CPU 401 is received.

In S2241, when the CPU 449a determines that the combination source data has been received (when the determination in S2241 is YES), the CPU 449a determines whether the received combination source data includes the gaming machine ID (S2242). ). When the CPU 449a determines that the received combination element data includes the gaming machine ID (when the determination in S2242 is YES), the CPU 449a stores the gaming machine ID in a predetermined storage area (S2243). When the CPU 449a determines that the received combination data does not include the gaming machine ID (when the determination in S2242 is NO), or after the processing of S2243, the CPU 449a is based on the received combination data. , Performs the combination monitor aggregation process (S2244).

The combination monitor aggregation process of S2244 is the same process as the combination monitor aggregation process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 27, and is sequentially executed in the combination monitor aggregation process of S2244, which is an advantageous section aggregation process ( S2244a), the payout number totaling process (S2244b), and the medium time totaling process (S2244c) are combined with the advantageous section totaling process (S2011), the payout number totaling process (S2012), and the medium time totaling process (S2013) shown in FIG. 27, respectively. handle.

After the processing of S2244, the CPU 449a determines whether or not it is the timing at which BLE transmission is possible (S2245). In S2245, when the CPU 449a determines that the BLE transmission timing has not arrived (when the determination in S2245 is NO), the BLE transmission control process is terminated.

In S2245, when the CPU 449a determines that the BLE transmission timing has arrived (when the determination in S2245 is YES), the CPU 449a sets a predetermined value in the parameter (S2246). For example, when transmitting an iBeacon (registered trademark) beacon signal according to the BLE standard, set the "organization ID" or "maker ID" in the UUID, and set the "game machine name ID" indicating the game machine name in the major. , The "game machine ID" stored in S2243 is set in minor.

Next, the CPU 449a encrypts the role ratio information (that is, type information and ratio information) obtained as a result of the role ratio monitor aggregation process of S2244 and data such as UUID, major, and minor, and obtains the result of the encryption. The encrypted data is stored in the RAM 449c (S2247).

Next, the CPU 449a controls the BLE chip 449d to read the encrypted data stored in the RAM 449c and transmit the beacon signal according to the BLE standard (S2248). In response to such control of the CPU 449a, the BLE chip 449d of the BLE module 449 modulates the encrypted data and transmits radio waves (beacon signals) to the surroundings (via the antenna) based on the modulated data. ..

After the processing of S2248, the CPU 449a returns to the processing of S2241.

In the present embodiment, the role ratio information corresponding to all the display selection values (for example, the type information "7U", "6Y", "7Y", "6A", "7A" is performed by the role ratio monitor aggregation process of S2244. In response to this, S2248 controls to wirelessly transmit the role ratio information corresponding to all of these display selection values, but the transmission data length according to the wireless transmission standard is used. Depending on the limitation and the transmission timing, the combination ratio information may be divided into, for example, the combination ratio information corresponding to one display selection value, or may be divided into smaller data units for wireless transmission.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the winning combination data including the gaming machine ID is transmitted from the main CPU 401, but such a gaming machine ID is stored in the main control circuit 490 or the like. If the ID is not set or is not set, the ID stored in the CPU 449a, ROM 449b, BLE chip 449d, etc. of the BLE module 449 is used, and this ID is associated with the gaming table number or the like, resulting in a gaming machine. May be individually identified. However, in this case, when the external centralized terminal plate 447 is replaced, it is necessary to update the correspondence between the ID and the game console number or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the same role ratio monitor aggregation process as in the first embodiment is executed by the CPU 449a of the BLE module 449, the storage for aggregation / calculation shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 is performed. Area (that is, combination monitor state, special prize signal, advantageous section ratio calculation table (including storage area for accumulation corresponding to the storage area of the table), accessory and consecutive combination ratio calculation table 1 (storage area of the table) The RAM 449c stores the same storage area as (including the storage area for accumulation corresponding to), the accessory and the combination ratio calculation table 2, and the 6000G payout buffer).

Further, in the combination monitor aggregation process in the first embodiment, the main CPU 101 is generally an 8-bit CPU, and the available memory capacity of the main RAM 103 is also limited, so that the cumulative value is stored. As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, when an upper limit is set for the storage area, only a part of the storage area is determined for comparison of numerical values, or a ratio calculation is performed based on the two storage areas. There was a need for a processing method to save CPU power and memory capacity, such as adopting a special method.

However, in the BLE module 449, the CPU 449a can be a CPU such as a 32-bit Risk processor, and the RAM 449c can be a memory having a relatively large capacity such as 84 kbytes or more. Therefore, when the BLE module 449 is configured to have a high-performance CPU and a large-capacity memory as described above, the above-mentioned "CPU module 449" executed in the combination monitor aggregation process in the first embodiment is executed. "Processing method to save capacity and memory capacity" is not essential. In the second embodiment, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the combination monitor aggregation process of the same method as the combination monitor aggregation process in the first embodiment is performed.

Further, when the BLE module 449 is configured to have a high-performance CPU and a large-capacity memory as described above, the RAM 449c is provided with an entry capable of individually managing the number of payouts for, for example, 6000 games. Each time one game elapses, the cumulative values such as "medium time payout number", "medium time consecutive payout number", and "medium time bonus payout number" are memorized for the latest 6000 games, and the accuracy is higher. It can be configured to calculate the time continuous combination ratio (type information "6Y") and the medium time bonus ratio (type information "7Y"). In the combination monitor aggregation process shown in FIG. 27, the medium-time continuous combination ratio and the medium-time combination ratio are updated to the latest values every 3000 games in consideration of the CPU capacity and memory capacity. ..

In the combination element data transmission process shown in FIG. 44, the main CPU 401 transmits the combination element data to the BLE module 49 for each game, but in the BLE module 49, the number of advantageous games, other than that. Since it is only necessary to be able to receive the number of games and the number of payouts, when the number of payouts is 0 in succession, the number of consecutive games is set at a predetermined timing without transmitting the winning combination data each time. For example, after a series of games in which the number of payouts is 0, the winning combination data may be included in the winning combination data at the timing of transmitting the winning combination data for the game with the payout).

[Loading function]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a situation in which the count data and the cumulative data stored in the BLE module 449 are loaded (copied) from the main control circuit 490 will be described.

FIG. 46 shows a situation in which the combination element data is transmitted from the main control circuit 490 to the CPU 449a of the BLE module 449 at the normal time in the gaming machine (pachislot machine 1') of the second embodiment. As described above, such transmission of the combination element data is basically performed for each game. Further, as described above, the number of games is counted and the number of payouts is accumulated based on the received combination source data. The counting of the number of games and the accumulation of the number of payouts are the same processes performed for the display of the combination monitor 95 in the main CPU 401 of the main control circuit 490.

That is, the CPU 449a of the BLE module 449 receives the winning combination data from the main control circuit 490 for each game, and counts the number of games according to the reception of the winning combination data. That is, every time the combination source data is received, the data of the total number of games storage area (work) is counted up by 1, and if the game is in an advantageous period according to the ART game state flag, the number of advantageous section games is counted. The data in the storage area (work) is counted up by 1 (see FIG. 28).

Further, each time the CPU 449a receives the winning combination data, the CPU 449a receives a total winning combination payout number storage area (work), a total bonus payout number storage area (work), and a total payout number storage area (work) according to the received special prize signal. The number of payouts is added to the data of the work) (see FIG. 28). Further, the medium-time continuous payout number storage area [0], [1], the medium-time bonus payout number storage area [0], [1], the medium-time payout number storage area [0], [1] of the 6000G payout buffer. ], The number of payouts is added according to the received special prize signal (see FIG. 29).

Therefore, in the normal state, the RAM 449c of the BLE module 449 and the main RAM 403 of the main control circuit 490 have the same storage area (that is, the total game number storage area (work), the advantageous section game number storage area (that is, the advantageous section game number storage area) at almost the same timing. Work), total number of consecutive payouts storage area (work), total number of payouts storage area (work), total number of payouts storage area (work), medium-time continuous payout number storage area [0], [1], medium The same data is stored in the hourly value payout number storage area [0], [1], the medium time payout number storage area [0], [1]) (arrow A in FIG. 46).

Further, in the present embodiment, the role ratio information such as the advantageous section ratio (type information "7U") obtained from the count data of the total number of games storage area (work) and the advantageous section game number storage area (work) is 175,000 or more. When the number of games is counted, the winning combination information is calculated, the calculated winning combination information is transmitted to the BLE chip 449d, and then the beacon signal is transmitted by the BLE chip 449d. There is.

In addition, the continuous combination ratio (type information "6Y") and the accessory obtained from the cumulative data of the total number of consecutive payout number storage area (work), the total number of payout number storage area (work), and the total number of payout number storage area (work). In the present embodiment, the role ratio information such as the ratio (type information "7Y") is calculated by calculating the role ratio information when the number of payouts is accumulated for the number of games of 6000 or more. After the information is transmitted to the BLE chip 449d, the beacon signal is transmitted by the BLE chip 449d.

Further, the cumulative data of the medium-time continuous payout number storage area [0], [1], the medium-time bonus payout number storage area [0], [1], and the medium-time payout number storage area [0], [1]. In this embodiment, the role ratio information such as the medium-time continuous combination ratio (type information "6A") and the medium-time bonus ratio (type information "7A") obtained by (partial cumulative data) is for the number of games of 17,500 or more. When the number of payouts is accumulated, the combination ratio information is calculated, the calculated combination ratio information is transmitted to the BLE chip 449d, and then the beacon signal is transmitted by the BLE chip 449d. There is.

As described above, the reason why a large number of games are assumed to pass before the role ratio information is transmitted is that only the role ratio information, which is a statistically significant value, can be grasped. The number of games such as 6000, 17500, and 175000 described above can be adjusted as appropriate.

Further, in this way, after the use of the gaming machine (Pachislot 1') has been started and a large number of games such as 6000 games, 17500 games, and 175000 games have been played, each role ratio information is BLE chip. Since it is transmitted by the 449d, if the above-mentioned count data or cumulative data stored in the RAM 449c is lost in the middle, it is necessary to count the count data or accumulate the cumulative data again for the number of games. It will take a lot of time for the role ratio information to be transmitted.

Further, when the count data or the cumulative data stored in the RAM 449c is lost, the data up to that point is lost, so that the role ratio information from the start of use of the gaming machine to the time of loss is lost, and after that, the role ratio information is lost. Even if the role ratio information can be calculated and transmitted, this is not from the start of use of the gaming machine and cannot be the original role ratio information.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrow B in FIG. 46, when the count data or the cumulative data stored in the RAM 449c is lost, the count is counted from the main RAM 403 of the main control circuit 490 at a predetermined timing. It can be configured to load data or cumulative data.

The above-mentioned count data and cumulative data stored in the RAM 449c are lost in the middle of the process, for example, when the external centralized terminal plate 447 is replaced (due to a failure of the relay circuit 448 or the like), or when the RAM 449c is a volatile memory. In that case, various factors such as troubles in power supply can be considered.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a loading process in which the main control circuit 490 loads the BLE module 449 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a loading process for loading (copying) count data and cumulative data from the main control circuit 490 to the BLE module 449 at a predetermined timing.

Note that this loading process can be executed, for example, after the process of S16 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 17 for the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment is completed. Further, it can be configured to be activated when a manager or the like performs a predetermined operation on the gaming machine (pachislot machine 1').

In the loading process, first, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the total number of games is 0 by referring to the data of the total number of games storage area (work) of the main RAM 403 (S2661). When the main CPU 401 determines that the total number of games is 0 (when the determination in S2661 is YES), the loading process is terminated because it has just been introduced as a new gaming machine.

When the main CPU 401 determines that the total number of games is not 0 (when the determination in S2661 is NO), the main CPU 401 uses the game machine ID and count data (for example, the total number of games storage area) stored in the main ROM 402. Work) and advantageous section game number storage area (work)), and cumulative data (for example, total consecutive payout number storage area (work), total bonus payout number storage area (work), total payout number storage area (work), 6000G payout buffer medium-time continuous payout number storage area [0], [1], medium-time bonus payout number storage area [0], [1], medium-time payout number storage area [0], [1]) (S2262).

After that, in S2663, the acquired data is transmitted to the BLE module 449 (S2663). The transmission data includes a total number of games storage area (work), from which the total number of games in the game machine can be grasped. Further, at this time, the role ratio monitor state stored in the main RAM 403 can also be transmitted. After that, the main CPU 401 ends the loading process.

<Explanation of BLE module operation>
[Data storage processing in BLE module]

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a process in which the BLE module 449 stores the count data and the cumulative data transmitted from the main control circuit 490 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a procedure of data storage processing for storing count data and cumulative data transmitted from the main control circuit 490.

This data storage process is started as an initial process when, for example, the power is turned on to the external centralized terminal plate 447 as a result of the power being turned on to the gaming machine (pachislot machine 1'). This process is also activated when the power is turned on for the first time after the external centralized terminal plate 447 is replaced and attached to the gaming machine (pachislot machine 1'). Further, this data storage process can be configured to be activated in response to the loading process of the main control circuit 490 described above.

In the data storage process, the CPU 449a first determines whether or not the power is turned on for the first time on the external centralized terminal plate 447 (S2281). When the CPU 449a determines that the power is turned on for the first time in the external centralized terminal plate 447 (when the determination in S2281 is YES), that is, when the external centralized terminal plate 447 is attached to the gaming machine and started for the first time. As an initial process, a storage area for count data, stored data, and the like is defined in the RAM 449c, and the storage area is cleared (S2282).

Whether or not the CPU 449a determines that the power is not turned on for the first time in the external centralized terminal plate 447 (when the determination in S2281 is NO), or whether the CPU 449a has transmitted data from the main control circuit 490 after the processing of S2282. (S2283). When the CPU 449a determines that no data has been transmitted from the main control circuit 490 (when the determination in S2283 is NO), the process returns to S2283 and the determination is repeated.

When the CPU 449a determines that data has been transmitted from the main control circuit 490 (when the determination in S2283 is YES), the total number of games transmitted from the main control circuit 490 is the total number of games storage area (work) of the RAM 449c. ) Is the same as or not (S2284). When the CPU 449a determines that the total number of games is not the same (when the determination in S2284 is NO), it determines that it is necessary to load the BLE module 449, and proceeds to S2285, where the received data is stored in the RAM 449c. Remember in. The received data includes the gaming machine ID. When the combination ratio information is transmitted by the BLE chip 449d, the game machine ID is transmitted together with the combination ratio information.

When the CPU 449a determines that the total number of games is the same (when the determination in S2284 is YES), or after the processing of S2285, the CPU 449a ends the data storage processing.

Even if the count data and accumulated data stored in the RAM 449c of the BLE module 449 are lost due to the loading process by the main CPU 401 of the main control circuit 490 and the data storage process by the CPU 449a of the BLE module 449, they are saved by then. The data that had been stored can be restored from the data stored in the main RAM 403 of the main control circuit 490, and the role ratio information immediately after the start of use of the game machine can be grasped immediately after the restoration. , The role ratio information can be transmitted by a beacon signal.

The procedure shown in FIGS. 47, 48, etc. is only an example as a method for realizing the loading function described above, and a loading function having the same effect can be realized by various other methods.

The configuration and processing of the pachislot machine 1'of the second embodiment have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the configurations and processing other than the above-described configuration and processing are basically the pachislot machines of the first embodiment. Same as 1.

[Omission of role ratio monitor]
In the second embodiment, the display of the combination ratio information by the combination ratio monitor 495 can be omitted as in the first embodiment described above.

<< Third Embodiment >>
Next, the connection form in the pachislot machine 1'' of the third embodiment, in which the connection form of the main control circuit and the BLE module is different from that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachislot machine 1'of the second embodiment, is shown in FIG. 49. Will be described with reference to. FIG. 49 is a circuit block diagram showing a connection form between the main control circuit 590 and the BLE module 549. As in the case of FIGS. 11 and 42, a cabinet-side relay board is interposed between the main control circuit 590 and the BLE module 549, but this is omitted here.

<Connection form between main control circuit and BLE module>
In FIG. 49, the main control circuit 590 includes a microprocessor 591 (main CPU 501) and a role ratio monitor 595, where the role ratio monitor 595 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED circuit. When the microprocessor 591 transmits the combination ratio information (output data for the 4-digit 7-segment LED) to the combination ratio monitor 595, the combination ratio monitor 595 lights the 4-digit 7-segment LED accordingly. It is designed to display the role ratio information.

A relay circuit 548 and a BLE module 549 are mounted on the substrate of the external centralized terminal board 547, and the microprocessor 591 transmits a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal (one medal insertion and a medal payout signal) to the external centralized terminal board 547. When one pulse signal is sent for each medal payout), these signals are provided to the external data display device 300 connected to the external centralized terminal board 547 via the relay circuit 548. NS.

Further, for the BLE module 549, the role ratio information (output data for the 4-digit 7-segment LED) for displaying the role ratio monitor 595 is, for example, a microprocessor by branching each of the 12 signal lines. Provided from 591. In FIG. 49, the branch circuit in the main control circuit 590 for branching the signal line, the circuit in the BLE module 549 for extracting data from the signal from the signal line, and the like are omitted.

The BLE module 549 includes a CPU 549a, a ROM 549b, a RAM 549c, and a BLE chip 549d. When the CPU 549a receives the data from the microprocessor 591 (output data for the 4-digit 7-segment LED by branching) based on the program stored in the ROM 549b, the CPU 549a receives the combination ratio information (type information) from the output data. And the ratio information, and also the display mode such as blinking and "---"), and then control the BLE chip 549d, and use the game machine ID and the obtained combination ratio information as the BLE standard beacon signal. Radio transmission is performed from the antenna of the BLE chip 549d. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip 549d can be received by a mobile device such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via a wireless communication network.

The CPU 549a specifies which digit is to be displayed from the 7-segment common output data among the output data received from the microprocessor 591, and the symbol / number displayed in the specified digit from the 7-segment cathode output data. To identify. Further, since the game machine ID is not included in such output data, it is necessary to separately receive the game machine ID from the main control circuit 590.

Here, as described with respect to FIG. 11, the gaming machine ID is an identifier that can individually identify a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine 1'' (at least, can be individually identified in a hall store), and various data can be stored in the gaming machine. It can be adopted as an ID. However, when the identifier held by the BLE module 549 is used as the gaming machine ID, the reception process is unnecessary.

The power supply for the external centralized terminal plate 547 is provided from, for example, the main control circuit 590. A backup power supply can also be installed on the external centralized terminal plate 547. Further, for the RAM 549c of the BLE module 549, for example, a volatile memory such as a DRAM (Dyanamic RAM) or a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory can be adopted.

As described above, the configuration and processing of the pachislot machine 1'' of the third embodiment have been described with reference to the drawings, but the configurations and processing other than the above-described configuration and processing are basically the same as those of the first embodiment. It is the same as pachislot 1.

[Omission of role ratio monitor]
In the third embodiment, the display of the combination ratio information by the combination ratio monitor 595 can be omitted as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above.

[Structure of external centralized terminal board]
Further, although the first to third embodiments have been described so far, the configurations of the external centralized terminal plates (47, 447, 547) according to each embodiment include the configurations according to at least two embodiments. Based on the settings, the processes according to each configuration may be selectively or parallelly performed.

<< Fourth Embodiment >>
Next, the configuration and operation of the information management system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<System configuration>
First, with reference to FIG. 50, an outline of the information management system 1001 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The information management system 1001 shown in FIG. 50 includes an information management server 1100 and devices such as a hall computer 1200, a gaming machine 1300, an Shimabata counting device 1400, a POS 1500, and a hall management terminal 1600 arranged in a hall store. It is composed of. Further, a data display device 1350 and a sand device 1370 are connected to the gaming machine 1300.

The gaming machine 1300 shown here is, for example, the gaming machine (pachislot 1) according to the first embodiment described above, the gaming machine (pachislot 1') according to the second embodiment, and the gaming machine (pachislot 1) according to the third embodiment. ''), The gaming machine ID and the combination ratio information are transmitted as, for example, a beacon signal by the BLE module (49, 449, 549) via the external centralized terminal board (47, 447, 547), respectively.

Further, the gaming machine 1300 may be, for example, a pachinko machine as well as the pachislot machine according to the first to third embodiments. The player acquires a game medium (pachinko ball or medal) by playing with these. In this specification, for convenience, either type of gaming machine may be described, and in that case, the gaming medium is also described as the gaming medium corresponding to the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to either type of gaming machine.

Further, the gaming machine 1300 is connected to the hall computer 1200, and transmits information on the gaming status and the number of gaming media to the hall computer 1200.

The sanding device 1370 is connected to the hall computer 1200, and according to the operation of the player, lends a game medium with a membership card, controls holding / storing balls, controls counting, and the like.

Further, a data display device 1350 is connected to the gaming machine 1300, and the data display device 1350 corresponds to the above-mentioned data display device 300.

The hall computer 1200 of the information management system 1001 accumulates and manages game information of a player who plays a game using the game machine 1300 in a hall store. For example, the game medium acquired by the player is managed as a ball storage and a storage medal (or a ball and a medal), and the operating status of each of the game machines 1300 is managed. Further, the hall computer 1200 controls a device such as the POS 1500 so that the player can exchange the desired prize according to the value of the game medium acquired by the player.

The hall computer 1200 further includes a hall DB1250, and the hall DB1250 stores member information and a table for storing the above-mentioned stored balls, stored medals, operating status, and the like.

The island counting device 1400 is a device that counts the number of balls (medals) acquired by the player, and is arranged at the end of an "island" in which a plurality of gaming machines 1300 are arranged together. In addition to the Shimabata counting device 1400, the counting device can be arranged at various locations in the hall store as a sand device with a counting function for each unit and other counting devices. In the present embodiment, the counting device is incorporated in each sanding device 1370 and is arranged as the island edge counting device 1400.

The POS1500 is installed at the counter of the hall store, and the staff of the hall store operates the POS1500 in order to deal with the exchange of prizes by the players. For example, the receipt issued by the above-mentioned Shimabata counting device 1400 is received from the player and read into the POS 1500 (or the total number of game media transmitted from the sand device 1370 by the membership card or the like presented by the player). (Read the numerical value, the number of balls held, and the number of stored balls), and provide the player with a prize of the corresponding value.

In this way, in the hall store, the function of POS1500 is used to exchange for the store prize (general prize) and the special prize arranged in the store prize display corner of the hall store.

The hall management terminal 1600 is arranged in the hall store, and a predetermined operation such as a setting operation is performed by the manager of the hall store or the like.

The information management server 1100 transmits data to a mobile terminal 1700 carried by an inspector, a player, a visitor to a hall store, or the like who inspects or inspects a gaming machine, if necessary. Further, the information management server 1100 includes an information management DB 1150, and the information management DB 1150 stores a table for storing information related to the attributes of the gaming machine, the arrangement position, and the like.

The mobile terminal 1700 includes various mobile terminals such as mobile phones, PDAs, feature phones, tablet terminals, and mobile PCs.

Further, the information management server 1100 and the mobile terminal 1700 can be connected by various forms and routes. For example, the mobile terminal 1700 is connected to the information management server 1100 via a network including wireless LAN communication, a wireless network by a mobile communication system such as 3G or 4G, and the Internet. In this case, the mobile terminal 1700 can also send and receive data to and from the information management server 1100 without going through the network device arranged in the hall store.

Further, for example, it may be connected to a network device in a hall store such as a hall computer 1200 via a wireless LAN, and may be connected to an information management server 1100 via this network device.

Further, in the present embodiment, the membership card distributed to the player who plays the game in the hall store is, for example, a non-contact IC chip provided with a non-contact IC chip based on a short-range wireless communication standard (NFC: Near Field Communication). It is an IC card. The sanding device 1370 or POS1500 can identify the card (the player of the card) by reading the unique ID of the player's non-contact IC card with a non-contact IC card reader or the like.

Further, the information management system 1001 of the present invention may be composed of a game machine 1300 and a mobile terminal 1700, and further includes a wireless signal transmitting device 1800, a wireless signal transmitting device 1900, a wireless signal transmitting device 1950, etc., which will be described later. It may be composed of.

The configuration of the information management system 1001 shown in FIG. 50 is merely an example, and a similar system can be constructed by various other configurations. For example, the information management server 1100 can be divided into a plurality of computers according to functions and the like. Further, the information management system 1001 shown in FIG. 50 is constructed in each hall store, and data is transmitted / received between the plurality of information management systems 1001 to cooperate between the hall stores for predetermined functions and services. Is also possible.

Next, the sand device 1370 used in the information management system 1001 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the sanding device 1370.

The front portion 1321 of the sanding device 1370 includes an operation unit 1334 composed of an LED (light-emission diode) portion 1331, a card insertion slot 1332, a bill insertion slot 1333 into which bills can be inserted, and a touch panel LCD (liquid crystal display). A camera 1335, a non-contact IC card reader / writer 1336, a medal (game medium) payout tray 1337, a speaker cover 1338, a medal (game medium) counting slot 1339, and the like are provided. The card insertion slot 1332 is, for example, an insertion slot capable of accepting an information card issued by a card issuing machine (not shown) in the hall. The LED unit 1331 is composed of a full-color LED 1331A and an infrared LED (infrared light emitting diode) 1331B.

A player can rent a medal as a game medium necessary for a game by inserting an information card (for example, an IC card) or a banknote of a predetermined amount into the card insertion slot 1332 or the bill insertion slot 1333. can. In addition, the player can receive medals necessary for the game by holding the non-contact IC card over the non-contact IC card reader / writer 1336.

Upon receiving the insertion of information cards / banknotes or the presentation of non-contact IC cards, the sanding device 1370 counts the number of medals corresponding to the amount of the inserted value medium by the payout hopper provided inside. And pay out from the medal payout tray 1337. Further, when the sanding device 1370 receives the insertion of the information card on which the number of usable medals is written, the sand device 1370 pays out the number of medals corresponding to the number of medals written on the inserted information card. It is counted by the hopper and paid out from the medal payout tray 1337. The player can play a game on the game machine 1300 by inserting the medals paid out from the medal payout tray 1337 into the medal slot of the game machine 1300.

Here, as the non-contact IC card, in addition to the above-mentioned membership card, various types of mobile terminals such as smartphones, mobile phones, PDAs, feature phones, tablet terminals, and mobile PCs having a built-in non-contact IC chip are used. Can be done.

Further, in the gaming machine 1300, medals are paid out to the medal payout tray according to the result of the game. The player can count the medals by the sanding device 1370 by scooping the medals from the medal payout tray and inserting them into the medal counting slot 1339 of the sanding device 1370. The sanding device 1370 counts medals inserted from the medal counting slot 1339 by a counting hopper provided inside. As described above, since the sand device 1370 is attached to the gaming machine 1300 and has a function of counting medals paid out from the gaming machine 1300 according to the result of the game, it is also called a counting device for each machine. ing.

When the gaming machine 1300 is a pachinko machine, the pachinko balls are introduced into the counting slot of the sanding device 1370. For example, when the player drops the pachinko balls paid out on the upper plate as a result of the game by performing a predetermined operation, the pachinko balls fall on the guide plate attached below the lower plate. do. The guide plate guides the pachinko balls that have fallen from the lower plate to the counting slot provided in the sanding device 1370. The pachinko balls introduced into the counting slot are counted by a counting unit provided inside the sanding device 1370.

The counted result is recorded in the information card inserted from the card insertion slot 1332, or stored in the hall DB1250 provided in the hall computer 1200 or the membership card which is a non-contact IC card. Alternatively, the sanding device 1370 may include a printer and print the counted results on a receipt. Information such as balance data may be stored in the information card or the non-contact IC card.

The medals counted in the counting hopper are discharged to the conveyor from the discharge port provided on the bottom surface of the sanding device 1370 and collected. In places where a conveyor is not provided, a storage box for storing medals may be installed in the lower part of the sanding device 1370, and medals may be discharged to this storage box.

When the gaming machine 1300 is a pachinko machine, the pachinko balls counted in the counting unit are discharged from the discharge port provided on the back surface of the sanding device 1370 and collected. Further, apart from the counting path of the pachinko balls thrown in from the counting slot, a fractional supply unit is provided on the back side of the sand device 1370 so as to receive the fractional pachinko balls from the outside. .. By this supply unit, a fixed amount of pachinko balls for fractions is always stored, and if necessary, the pachinko balls for fractions are paid out to the guide plate from the payout outlet for fractions.

Next, the operation unit 1334 of the sanding device 1370 will be described with reference to FIG. The operation unit 1334 includes a display 1334a and a touch panel type operation button 1334b. The operation button 1334b is displayed as an image imitating various buttons, and accepts a player's operation according to the image. Specifically, the operation button 1334b has various types such as "return", "rental", "counting start", "holding ball payout", "counting stop", "ball saving", "service", and "ball saving payout". It is displayed as an image imitating the operation button 1334b corresponding to the process of. The player can execute the process by touching or the like the operation button 1334b corresponding to the desired process.

For example, the "lending" operation button 1334b inserts an information card into the card insertion slot 1332 and holds the non-contact IC card over the non-contact IC card reader / writer 1336, or inserts cash into the bill insertion slot 1333. This is the part to be operated when you want to lend a medal. The operation button 1334b of "counting start" is a part to be operated when a medal is inserted into the medal counting slot 1339 and counted. The operation button 1334b of "counting stop" is a part to be operated when counting is stopped after starting counting of medals. The "return" operation button 1334b is a part to be operated when returning the inserted information card. At this time, balance information, medals held or stored medals, and a card ID as needed are written on the information card.

By inserting an information card or a bill of a predetermined amount into the card insertion slot 1332 or the bill insertion slot 1333, the player can rent a medal as a game medium necessary for the game. In addition, the player can rent medals necessary for the game by holding the membership card (non-contact IC card) over the non-contact IC card reader / writer 1336.

<Information management server configuration>
Next, the configuration of the information management server 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the information management server 1100.

The information management server 1100 includes a main CPU 1101, a ROM 1102, a RAM 1103, an external storage device 1104, a display 1105, and an interface 1106.

The main CPU 1101 reads and executes the control program stored in the ROM 1102 and the RAM 1103. For example, the main CPU 1101 controls to transmit information about a gaming machine in a hall store in response to a request from the mobile terminal 1700.

The display 1105 is a display device that displays information managed by the information management server 1100, and is, for example, a liquid crystal display device. The display 1105 may be omitted.

The information management server 1100 is communicably connected to the hall computer 1200 and the mobile terminal 1700 via the interface 1106. The control program related to the implementation of the present invention is stored in, for example, the external storage device 1104 and loaded into the RAM 1103. The control program can also be provided from other devices via interface 1106 or from other external devices via a network including the Internet.

The information management DB 1150 is stored in the external storage device 1104, and information of the gaming machine and the like are stored.

<Configuration of mobile terminal>
Next, the configuration of the mobile terminal 1700 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the mobile terminal 1700. The mobile terminal 1700 includes a main CPU 1701, ROM 1702, RAM 1703, camera 1704, wireless communication antenna 1705, GPS antenna 1706, wireless signal receiving antenna 1707, display 1708, microphone 1709, speaker 1710, and sensor 1711.

The main CPU 1701 reads and executes the control program stored in the ROM 1702 or the RAM 1703. For example, the main CPU 1701 executes an application or the like downloaded via a wireless network, and displays predetermined information (for example, combination ratio information) about the gaming machine based on a beacon signal or the like received from the gaming machine 1300. Control.

The ROM 1702 is referred to as a "ROM (Read Only Mmory)", but usually a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory is adopted, and a downloaded application and acquired data can be stored.

The camera 1704 is, for example, a small image pickup device built in the mobile terminal 1700, and the image pickup element is composed of a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or the like. The captured image (moving image or still image) captured by the camera 1704 by the user's operation is stored in the RAM 1703 or the like under the control of the main CPU 1701, processed by a program as necessary, and displayed on the display 1708.

The main CPU 1701 communicates with a mobile phone base station via a wireless communication antenna 1705, sends and receives call data for making a call with another device, and is provided from another terminal via the Internet. Controls to browse the WEB page and send / receive data related to SNS communication. Further, the main CPU 1701 realizes wireless LAN communication with the wireless LAN access point by using the wireless communication antenna 1705, and transmits / receives data via the Internet (the antenna used for wireless LAN communication is basically portable. Although it is an antenna different from the antenna that communicates with the telephone base station, it is collectively referred to as "wireless communication antenna" here).

Further, the main CPU 1701 receives signals from a plurality of GPS (Global Positioning System) via the GPS antenna 1706 and detects the position of the mobile terminal 1700. The position information obtained by such detection processing is stored in the RAM 1703 or the like under the control of the main CPU 1701, and is used in the program as needed.

The radio signal receiving antenna 1707 is an antenna that receives a radio signal (for example, a beacon signal) transmitted from the gaming machine 1300. The radio signal receiving antenna 1707 receives a radio signal (for example, a beacon signal) transmitted from a radio signal transmitting device installed in the hall store or near the hall store.

The display 1708 is composed of, for example, a touch panel LCD, and displays various screens for instructing a function to be executed by the mobile terminal 1700 and inputting necessary information.

The microphone 1709 and the speaker 1710 input and output voice under the control of the main CPU 1701, and perform voice signal processing under the control of the main CPU 1701 to enable a voice call by a mobile phone.

The sensor 1711 is an acceleration sensor, a gyro sensor (angle speed sensor), an optical sensor, a proximity sensor, and the like. For example, these sensors can detect the tilt, movement, and movement of the mobile terminal 1700, and further, the mobile terminal. It is also possible to grasp the number of steps taken by the user holding the 1700.

The above configuration shows a typical configuration of a smartphone, but the same configuration is also applied to the configuration of other mobile terminals such as mobile phones, PDAs, feature phones, tablet terminals, and mobile PCs.

Further, the mobile terminal 1700 can be configured to incorporate a non-contact IC chip. The internal data of the non-contact IC chip is read by a reader such as a non-contact IC card reader / writer. For example, the unique ID (IDm) that can identify the non-contact IC chip and the data written in the storage area of the non-contact IC chip can be read out in a non-contact manner. Further, if necessary, data can be written in the storage area of the non-contact IC chip in a non-contact manner.

<House computer configuration>
Next, the configuration of the hall computer 1200 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the hall computer 1200.

The hall computer 1200 includes a main CPU 1201, a ROM 1202, a RAM 1203, an external storage device 1204, a display 1205, and an interface 1206.

The main CPU 1201 reads and executes the control program stored in the ROM 1202 and the RAM 1203. For example, the main CPU 1201 manages member information, manages the number of medals / balls and the number of medals / balls held in the game medium for each member, and executes a process for managing the game status of each member. And control the display 1205.

The display 1205 displays game data managed by the hall computer 1200, or notifies the occurrence of fraud or abnormality. The display 1205 is realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display device.

The hall computer 1200 is communicably connected to the gaming machine 1300, the sanding device 1370, the island counting device 1400, and the POS 1500 via the interface 1206. The hall computer 1200 can also be configured to connect to the information management server 1100 via the interface 1206. The control program for carrying out the present invention is stored in the external storage device 1204 and loaded in the RAM 1203, for example. The control program can also be provided from other devices via interface 1206 or from other external devices via a network including the Internet.

The hall DB1250 is stored in the external storage device 1204, and member information, storage medal / ball storage information, and the like are stored.

<Structure of sand device>
Next, the configuration of the sanding device 1370 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sanding device 1370. The main CPU (central processing unit) 1340 reads the control unit program stored in the ROM (read only memory) 1341 and executes processing such as lending medals. Various data related to the processing are stored in the RAM (random access memory) 1342.

The main CPU 1340 stores the amount data read from the information card via the information card reader / writer 1322 or the amount data read from the non-contact IC card via the non-contact IC card reader / writer 1336 as balance data in the RAM 1342. .. Based on this balance data and the operation result output from the operation unit 1334, the main CPU 1340 pays out medals for the specified amount when the amount specified by the player is smaller than the balance data. The balance data is updated by counting and paying out in, and subtracting the amount of the paid out medals from the balance data. The main CPU 1340 can drive the payout hopper 1345 by controlling the drive circuit 1343, and can drive the counting hopper 1346 by controlling the drive circuit 1344.

A button for returning the information card is also displayed on the operation unit 1334, and when the player operates this operation button, the main CPU 1340 inserts the information card inserted in the information card reader / writer 1322. Return from the opening 1332 (corresponding to the card insertion opening 1332 shown in FIG. 51).

Further, the main CPU 1340 stores the bill identification result output from the bill identification device (bilver burr) 1324 in the RAM 1342 as balance data. Based on this balance data and the operation result output from the operation unit 1334, the main CPU 1340 pays out medals for the specified amount when the amount specified by the player is smaller than the balance data. The balance data is updated by counting and paying out in, and subtracting the amount of the paid out medals from the balance data.

Further, the main CPU 1340 uses the infrared LED 1331B of the LED unit 1331 as a monitoring floodlight, reflects the infrared light from the infrared LED 1331B by the player, and images the infrared light with the camera 1335. The main CPU 1340 stores the image captured by the camera 1335 in the RAM 1342, and detects the presence or change of the player based on this image. This detection process is always performed. When the player's state changes to the non-detection (leaving) state and the information card inserted from the card insertion slot 1332 remains inserted, or the bill insertion slot 1333 (in the bill insertion slot 1333 shown in FIG. 51). When there is a balance in the amount data of the bill inserted from (correspondence), the main CPU 1340 alerts the player who is about to leave by issuing a warning sound or a warning sound via the speaker 1348. be able to. As a warning voice, a voice such as "I forgot my card" is emitted.

As described above, the main CPU 1340 is configured to perform non-contact communication with the non-contact IC card via the non-contact IC card reader / writer 1336. This communication method is, for example, an electromagnetic induction method having a carrier frequency of 13.56 MHz. The main CPU 1340 counts the number of medals according to the amount data read from the non-contact IC card via the non-contact IC card reader / writer 1336 by the payout hopper 1345, and the medal payout tray 1337 (medals shown in FIG. 51). While paying out from the payout tray 1337), the balance data of the non-contact IC card is rewritten.

Further, the main CPU 1340 communicates with the hall computer 1200 via the interface 1347, and the number of pachinko balls / medals paid out by the information card or the non-contact IC card, and information. The number of pachinko balls and medals stored in the card or non-contact IC card is periodically transmitted to the hall computer 1200.

Further, the main CPU 1340 periodically captures the player's face image via the camera 1335 and stores it in the RAM 1342. When the face image stored last time is compared with the face image stored this time and it is determined that the person is not the same person, the main CPU 1340 determines that the player has been replaced and performs processing accordingly.

As described above, the gaming machine 1300 is connected to the hall computer 1200 so as to be able to transmit predetermined information, and the sand device 1370 is connected to the hall computer 1200 so as to be able to transmit and receive predetermined information. The hall computer 1200 receives accumulated information (information on the number of input / payout game media) regarding the number of game media such as pachinko balls / medals insertion information and payout information from the game machine 1300, and further indicates the winning status of the winning information and the game machine. Receive operation information related to operation. Further, the hall computer 1200 receives information (information on the number of moving game media) regarding the movement of pachinko balls / medals between the information card and the non-contact IC card from the sand device 1370, and further, in some cases, the camera. The face image information consisting of the player's face image and the face image analysis result acquired by 1335 is received.

<Structure of Shimabata counting device>
Next, the configuration of the Shimabata counting device 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the island-end counting device 1400. The main CPU 1401 reads the control program stored in the ROM 1402 and executes the medal counting process. Various data related to the processing are stored in the RAM 1403.

When the player operates the operation unit 1405 to instruct the start of the counting process, the main CPU 1401 drives the counting hopper 1407 by controlling the drive circuit 1406, and is put into the counting hopper 1407 by the player. Count the medals. The counting result is printed by the printer 1404 and output as a receipt. The operation unit 1405 is, for example, a small display (touch panel type display device), and the printer 1404 is, for example, a thermal printer.

The main CPU 1401 transmits the counting result to the hall computer 1200 via the interface 1408. Further, the main CPU 1401 can control the speaker 1409 to emit a warning sound or a warning sound when the player's operation is not appropriate.

Further, the island-end counting device 1400 may be configured to be provided with a non-contact IC card reader / writer or the like, and the counting result may be stored in a predetermined storage medium.

<Structure of POS>
Next, the configuration of the POS 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing the configuration of POS1500.

The POS 1500 includes a main CPU 1501, ROM 1502, RAM 1503, information card reader / writer 1504, non-contact IC card reader / writer 1505, bar code reader 1506, player side display 1507, keyboard 1508, store side display 1509, and interface 1510. ing. It is also possible to provide a speaker.

The main CPU 1501 reads and executes the control program stored in the ROM 1502 and the RAM 1503. For example, the main CPU 1501 executes a prize exchange process in a hall store. The control program may also be provided from other devices via interface 1510 or from other external devices via a network including the Internet.

The main CPU 1501 reads the receipt printed by the Shimabata counting device 1400 or the like with the barcode reader 1506, thereby acquiring the counting result (the number of acquired game media) required for exchanging the prize. Further, when the counting result is registered in the information card or the non-contact IC card, the main CPU 1501 determines the counting result (the number of holdings of the game medium) via the information card reader / writer 1504 or the non-contact IC card reader / writer 1505. Including) can also be obtained.

The player-side display 1507 is configured as a touch panel display that can be touch-operated by the player, and the store-side display 1509 is configured as a touch panel display that can be touch-operated by the staff of the hall store. The player-side display 1507 and the store-side display 1509 can also be configured as one display.

The main CPU 1501 receives information such as prizes (general prizes and special prizes in stock in the hall store) related to prize exchange specified by the staff via the store side display 1509 and keyboard 1508, and responds accordingly. Information about the number of prizes in stock managed and the player's game medium is transmitted to the hall computer 1200 (connected via the interface 1510).

Further, when the main CPU 1501 is provided with a speaker, the main CPU 1501 can control the speaker to emit a warning sound or a warning sound when the player's operation is not appropriate.

<Configuration of hall management terminal>
Next, the configuration of the hall management terminal 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the hall management terminal 1600. The hall management terminal 1600 is a terminal installed in a hall store and connected to a hall computer 1200, and a predetermined operation is performed by a manager, staff, or the like of the hall store.

The hall management terminal 1600 includes a main CPU 1601, a ROM 1602, a RAM 1603, an external storage device 1604, a display 1605, a keyboard 1606, a mouse 1607, and an interface 1608. It is also possible to provide a speaker.

The main CPU 1601 reads and executes the control program stored in the ROM 1602 and the RAM 1603. For example, the main CPU 1601 executes setting processing related to a predetermined item and transmits the setting process to the hall computer 1200 via the interface 1608. The control program may also be provided from other devices via interface 1608 or from other external devices via a network including the Internet.

The main CPU 1601 displays a screen or the like for setting a predetermined item on the display 1605, receives an instruction from a hall store manager or the like via a keyboard 1606 or a mouse 1607, and receives the instruction content from the hall computer 1200. Send to. Further, the display 1605 can be configured as a touch panel display capable of touch operation, and in that case, the setting process is performed by the touch operation of the manager of the hall store or the like.

The hall management terminal 1600 also connects to the information management server 1100 via the hall computer 1200 or other network devices in the hall store, or directly connects to the information management server 1100 to refer to or set the setting information managed by the information management server 1100. Can be done.

<Explanation of information management server functions>
Next, the functional outline of the information management server 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a functional block diagram of the information management server 1100.

The information management server 1100 includes a user management unit 1111, a gaming machine information management unit 1112, a map information management unit 1113, and a network I / F unit 1120. Each of these functional units is controlled by the main CPU 1101 shown in FIG. 53.

Further, the information management server 1100 stores the information management DB 1150 in the external storage device 1104, and the information management DB 1150 stores the user information table 1151 that stores the information for controlling whether or not the predetermined application can be executed, and the information about the game machine. Game machine information table 1152 that stores information about the game machine information table 1152, map information table 1153 that stores information about the placement position of the game machine, game machine distribution management table 1154 that manages the hall store where the game machine is placed and the time, and door opening / closing information of the game machine. Game machine status management table 1155 that stores information such as, game information management table 1156 that stores the number of games played by the player, game machine results, etc., privilege management table 1157 that stores information about the game machine used by the player, AR display The AR display management table 1158 that stores the display mark and the like for the user, the notification information management table 1159 that stores the notification conditions and the notification information, and the role ratio information storage table 1160 that stores the role ratio information received from the mobile terminal 1700. included.

The user management unit 1111 refers to the user information table 1151 when the user downloads an application to be executed on the mobile terminal 1700 from a predetermined server, or when the downloaded application is executed on the mobile terminal 1700. Check the user's authority, and if the user's authority is confirmed, allow the download and execution of the application.

The gaming machine information management unit 1112 refers to the gaming machine information table 1152 in response to a request from the mobile terminal 1700, and provides the mobile terminal 1700 with a gaming machine number or the like corresponding to the gaming machine ID received from the mobile terminal 1700. ..

In response to a request from the mobile terminal 1700, the map information management unit 1113 refers to the map information table 1153 and provides the mobile terminal 1700 with information regarding the arrangement position according to the game machine ID received from the mobile terminal 1700.

The game machine distribution management unit 1114 stores the game machine ID received from the mobile terminal 1700 in association with the hall ID or the like, and enables distribution management of the game machine 1300.

The gaming machine status management unit 1115 stores the gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operating time information received from the mobile terminal 1700 in association with each other, and can manage the status related to the security, quality, and maintenance of the gaming machine 1300. do.

The game information management unit 1116 stores the game machine ID received from the mobile terminal 1700 in association with the application ID, the total number of games, and the game information, and makes it possible to manage the game history of the player in the game machine 1300.

The privilege management unit 1117 stores the gaming machine ID received from the mobile terminal 1700 in association with the application ID and the total number of games played, and assigns the identification to the player who played the game on the gaming machine 1300.

The AR display management unit 1118 receives the gaming machine ID received from the mobile terminal 1700, determines the display mark to be displayed on the mobile terminal 1700 and its display mode according to the gaming machine ID, and provides the display mark to the mobile terminal 1700. .. Here, AR (Augmented Reality) is a display of the mobile terminal 1700 by combining a virtual object such as the above-mentioned display mark with an image in an actual hall store taken by a camera, for example. It is a technology that displays images on the screen and provides users with images that are augmented reality.

The notification information management unit 1119 receives the notification ID received from the mobile terminal 1700 together with the application ID, determines the notification information corresponding to the notification ID according to the application ID, etc., and determines the determined notification information according to the mobile terminal 1700. To provide.

The network I / F (interface) unit 1120 connects to the network and controls to send and receive data to and from the computer of the other party. Further, here, the network can be configured as a network including the Internet and a wireless network (since the same applies to the network I / F section of other devices, the description of the subsequent network I / F section will be omitted). ..

<Functional explanation of mobile terminal>
Next, the functional outline of the mobile terminal 1700 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a functional block diagram of the mobile terminal 1700.

As application function units, the mobile terminal 1700 includes a combination information display control unit 1721, a game machine distribution information transmission unit 1722, a game machine status transmission unit 1723, a game information control unit 1724, a privilege control unit 1725, and an AR display control unit 1726. The notification information display control unit 1727 and the wireless communication control unit 1728 are included. Further, the mobile terminal 1700 includes a beacon receiving unit 1731, a display control unit 1732, an input control unit 1733, and a network I / F unit 1734 as OS functions. Each of these functional units is controlled by the main CPU 1701 shown in FIG. 54.

The combination information display control unit 1721 sequentially displays the game console number and the like of the gaming machine 1300 to be inspected based on the signal strength and the like of the beacon signal received from the beacon receiving unit 1731 described later, and further includes the beacon signal. The winning combination information is controlled to be displayed for each gaming machine.

The game machine distribution information transmission unit 1722 transmits the game machine ID from the game machine 1300 to the information management server 1100 together with the hall ID and the like.

The gaming machine status transmission unit 1723 transmits the gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operating time information received from the gaming machine 1300 to the information management server 1100.

The game information control unit 1724 transmits the game machine ID, the total number of games, and the game information received from the game machine 1300 to the information management server 1100 together with the application ID, and manages the game information of the player identified by the application ID. Received from server 1100 and displayed.

The privilege control unit 1725 transmits the game machine ID and the total number of games received from the game machine 1300 to the information management server 1100 together with the application ID, and displays the result of the privilege given by the information management server 1100.

The AR display control unit 1726 transmits the gaming machine ID received from the gaming machine 1300 to the information management server 1100, and based on the display mark corresponding to the gaming machine ID received from the information management server 1100 and its display mode. AR display is performed on the display of the mobile terminal 1700.

The notification information display control unit 1727 transmits the notification ID received from the wireless signal transmitting device 1800 to the information management server 1100 together with the application ID, and receives and displays the notification information determined according to the notification ID from the information management server 1100. do.

When the wireless communication control unit 1728 receives wireless signals from a plurality of wireless signal transmitting devices 1900, the wireless communication control unit 1728 shifts communication with the wireless signal transmitting device 1900, which is estimated to be the closest, from unidirectional communication to bidirectional communication. Control.

The beacon receiving unit 1731 receives the beacon signals transmitted from each of the game machines 1300 by the wireless signal receiving antenna 1707 shown in FIG. 54, and receives the received game machine ID, the role ratio information, and the like, for example, API ( It is provided to the role ratio information display control unit 1721 by the Application Programming Interface).

The display control unit 1732 displays the input / instruction screen that can be operated by the user of the mobile terminal 1700 and the display screen of the role ratio information, etc., on the display of the mobile terminal 1700, regarding the functions realized by the role ratio information display control unit 1721. Control is performed so that it is displayed on 1708.

The input control unit 1733 detects the user's instruction / operation / input by the touch sensor on the input / instruction screen displayed on the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700, and transmits the detection result to the main CPU 1701.

<Table configuration used in the information management system>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63, various tables for storing data used in the information management system 1001 will be described.

FIG. 62A shows an example of the user information table 1151. The user information table 1151 includes a user ID, a name, an affiliation, and a password. The user managed by the user information table 1151 is, for example, an inspector authorized to inspect the gaming machine 1300.

FIG. 62B shows an example of the gaming machine information table 1152. The gaming machine information table 1152 includes a hall ID, a gaming machine ID, and a gaming table number. Therefore, in the gaming machine information table 1152, the association between the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine number is managed for each hall store. The gaming machine ID is an identifier provided by the gaming machine 1300, and is an identifier that allows the gaming machine 1300 to be individually identified (at least, can be individually identified in the hall store). For example, an ID managed by the main control circuit 70 described above, an ID stored in the BLE module 49 or the like that transmits the combination ratio information or the like by a beacon signal, or the like can be used as the gaming machine ID.

The game console number is a number assigned to the game machine 1300, and is also an identifier that can individually identify the game machine 1300 at least in the hall store. It is desirable that the gaming table number is displayed at a position where the inspector can easily see the gaming machine 1300 when viewed from the front.

FIG. 63 shows an example of the map information table 1153. The map information table 1153 includes a game machine ID, a game table position, a size, and a beacon transmission position. The game table position represents, for example, the relative position of the floor of the hall store from a predetermined reference point, and may be configured to have information indicating the number of floors of the floor. The size is the size of the gaming machine 1300 when viewed from above in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction). The beacon transmission position relatively indicates which position of the gaming machine 1300 the position where the beacon signal is transmitted (for example, the position of the antenna of the BLE chip 49d) is (for example, above the gaming machine 1300). The upper left corner when viewed from is the reference point). In the map information table 1153 of FIG. 63, the unit of length is all centimeters.

In the map information table 1153 of FIG. 63, only the position information related to the gaming machine 1300 is stored, but the arrangement positions of other devices such as the Shimabata counting device 1400 and the POS1500 are also stored. Can be done. By having such data, when displaying the layout of the hall store on the mobile terminal 1700, it becomes possible to display devices other than the gaming machine 1300. The location information stored in the map information table 1153 can be created, for example, based on the equipment layout in the store, which the hall needs to submit to the jurisdiction in order to obtain a business license.

<Arrangement of gaming machines, etc. in hall stores>
Next, the layout in the hall store will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a sketch (layout diagram) schematically illustrating how each device such as the gaming machine 1300 is arranged in the main area of the hall store.

As shown in FIG. 64, the illustrated hall store is provided with two front entrances (2011a and 2011b) on the lower side of the drawing, and players enter and exit the hall store through these entrances and exits. In front of the front entrance (2011a, 2011b), there is a front passage, and four islands (2035-2038) are arranged in the back (upper side of the drawing). Each island includes eight gaming machines 13000, and four sets of two gaming machines 1300 are arranged facing each other, with the front portion of the gaming machine 1300 facing the aisle side.

Three inner passages are provided between the four islands (2035-2038) described above, and outer passages are provided on the left side of the island 2035 and on the right side of the island 2038, respectively. In addition, large viewers 2021a are arranged at the lower ends of the island 2035 and the island 2037) so that the player who has entered the store can easily check the product information, the guide information of the hall store, and the like. Further, island edge counting devices 1400 are arranged at the upper ends of the island 2035 and the island 2038, respectively.

Further back (upper side of the drawing) of the above-mentioned four islands (2035-2038), islands (2031, 2033) are arranged on the left side, and islands (2032, 2034) are arranged on the right side. Each island includes eight gaming machines 1300, as well as four islands (2035-2038), and four sets of two gaming machines 1300 are arranged facing each other. As shown in the figure, the gaming machines 1300 on these islands (2031 to 2034) are arranged in a direction orthogonal to the gaming machines 1300 on the four islands (2035-2038) described above.

An inner passage is provided between the islands on the left (2031, 2033) and the islands on the right (2032, 2034). Further, the above-mentioned outer passages extend to the left side of the islands on the left side (2031, 2033) and to the right side of the islands (2032, 2034) on the right side, respectively.

A large viewer 2021a is arranged at the left end of the island 2031, and an island end counting device 1400 is arranged at the right end. A small viewer 2021b is arranged at the right end of the island 2033.

An island edge counting device 1400 is arranged at the left end of the island 2032. A large viewer 2021a is arranged at the right end of the island 2034.

Further back on the island (2031 to 2034) (upper side of the drawing), the prize exchange counter 2016 is arranged on the left side, and the storefront prize display corner 2017 is arranged on the right side. In addition, a staff room entrance 2014 is provided at the back left side of the prize exchange counter 2016, and a restroom entrance 2012 is provided at the front left side of the prize exchange counter 2016. In addition, a break room entrance 2013 is provided in front of the right side of the storefront prize display corner 2017. Further, a computer room entrance 2015 is provided at the back of the prize exchange counter 2016 (upper side of the drawing). In the computer room, computers such as the hall computer 1200, the hall DB1250, and the hall management terminal 1600 described above are installed.

At the back of the prize exchange counter 2016 (upper side of the drawing), the staff of the hall store is waiting to respond to the player's request for prize exchange. As shown in the figure, two POS1500s are placed on the prize exchange counter 2016.

Here, in the vicinity of the front entrance / exit 2011a, it is shown that the inspector 2001 advances upward in the inner passage between the island 2035 and the island 2036 for the inspection of the gaming machine 1300.

Further, a reference point 2002 is provided at the upper left end of FIG. 64, and in the present embodiment, the game table position of the map information table 1153 described above is set with reference to the reference point 2002.

Although the sanding device 1370 is arranged next to the gaming machine 1300 of the present embodiment as described above, it is omitted here for convenience of explanation regarding the combination ratio information display control described later.

<Explanation of role ratio information display control processing in information management system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, an outline of the role ratio information display control process executed by the mobile terminal 1700 will be described. FIG. 65 is an enlarged and schematic view of the periphery of the inspector 2001 shown in FIG. 64.

As shown in FIG. 65, four gaming machines (1300-1 to 1300-4) are arranged in the left row of the island 2035, and four gaming machines (1300-5 to 1300) are arranged in the right row of the island 2035. -8) are arranged, and each gaming machine 1300 (1300-1 to 1300-8) is arranged so that the passage side faces the front. Similarly, four gaming machines (1300-9 to 1300-12) are placed in the left row of the island 2036, and four gaming machines (1300-13 to 1300-16) are placed in the right row of the island 2036. Each of the gaming machines 1300 (1300-9 to 1300-16) is arranged so that the passage side faces the front.

Further, FIG. 65 shows a mobile terminal 1700 for inspection held by the inspector 2001 of the gaming machine 1300.

The triangular mark shown on each game machine 1300 (1300-1 to 1300-16) indicates the position of a wireless signal transmission circuit such as the BLE module 49, and here, the wireless signal is signaled from the center of the triangle. (For example, a beacon signal) shall be transmitted.

For example, when the above-mentioned BLE chip 49d transmits a Bluetooth (registered trademark) -based beacon signal based on the BLE standard, the radio wave reach varies depending on the set class. Specifically, Class 1 has a maximum of 100 m, Class 2 has a maximum of 10 m, and Class 3 has a maximum of 1 m (the distances are all standard values).

In this embodiment, for example, Class 2 and Class 3 can be adopted. The Class of each gaming machine 1300 is set in common at least on the floor of the hall store. In FIG. 65, with respect to the island 2035, the circle 2000-3 centered on the wireless signal transmission position (center of the triangle) of the game machine 1300-3 and the wireless signal transmission position (center of the triangle) of the game machine 1300-4 are shown. Circle 2000-4 centered, circle 2000-7 centered on the wireless signal transmission position of the game machine 1300-7 (center of the triangle), wireless signal transmission position of the game machine 1300-8 (center of the triangle) A centered circle 2000-8 is shown, which schematically shows how the radio signal propagates from the radio signal transmission circuit and reaches the mobile terminal 1700, and these circles are shown. , It does not indicate the radio range of the radio signal or the position of the same signal strength.

The radio waves transmitted from the wireless signal transmission circuit are reflected everywhere, and the reflected radio waves overlap each other and interfere with each other, and the reflection and the like also affect the nearby players and inspectors themselves, so all It does not propagate in the direction with signal strength.

Further, in FIG. 65, similarly to the island 2035, for the island 2036, the radio signal transmission of the circle 2000-11 and the game machine 1300-12 centered on the radio signal transmission position (the center of the triangle) of the game machine 1300-11. Circle 2000-12 centered on the position (center of the triangle), radio signal transmission of the game machine 1300-15 Circle 2000-15 centered on the position (center of the triangle), radio signal transmission of the game machine 1300-16 Circles 2000-16 centered on the position (the center of the triangle) are shown.

In such a situation, the mobile terminal 1700 receives a radio signal from each game machine 1300, and controls the game machine ID and the role ratio information included in each radio signal to be displayed on the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700. do.

Further, here, the mobile terminal 1700 can control the display order according to the signal strength at the time of reception. For example, when receiving a beacon signal based on the BLE standard, it was evaluated in order from the information of the gaming machine corresponding to the wireless signal having the highest signal strength (RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication)) (that is, close to the mobile terminal 1700). It can be displayed (in order from the game machine 1300).

Also, in the BLE standard, the proximity (Proximity: Immediate (very close), Near (close), Far (far)) can be obtained based on the signal strength (TxPower) and RSSI emitted by the beacon. , The order of the gaming machine 1300 for displaying the winning combination information and the like may be controlled according to the proximity.

Further, since the accuracy can be obtained in the BLE standard, the gaming machines 1300 having the same proximity can be further classified by using this accuracy. Here, the accuracy indicates the variation of the estimated distance when the estimated distance is obtained several times based on the signal strength and TxPower.

FIG. 66A shows the role ratio information display screen 3001 displayed on the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700 in the situation of FIG. 65.

On the role ratio information display screen 3001, the gaming machine number (display is "unit number") = "1300-12" is displayed at the top (reference numeral 3003), which corresponds to the information of the gaming machine 1300-12. The combination ratio information display unit 3004 is developed by a pull-down method under the game console number, and information including the combination ratio information of the game machines 1300-12 is displayed here. The game machine ID (display is "ID"), the total number of games, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), the bonus ratio (cumulative), and the continuous bonus ratio (6000G) are displayed on the role ratio information display unit 3004. , The accessory ratio (6000G) is displayed.

Further, in this example, the value of the accessory ratio (cumulative) is 75%, which exceeds a predetermined threshold value. Therefore, in order to attract the attention of the inspector 2001, for example, it is displayed in red (Fig.). In 66A, it is displayed by a rectangular frame 3005 for convenience).

Other gaming machines 1300 are displayed below the role ratio information display unit 3004 (reference numeral 3006), and these gaming machines 1300 are listed from the top in order of the estimated distance between the mobile terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300. Has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 66A, a gaming machine 1300-12, a gaming machine 1300-8, a gaming machine 1300-11, a gaming machine 1300-4, a gaming machine 1300-16, a gaming machine 1300-7, a gaming machine 1300-3. , Game machines 1300-15 are displayed in this order.

Further, by operating the scroll bar 3002 arranged at the right end of the combination ratio information display screen 3001, the gaming machines 1300 whose estimated distance from the mobile terminal 1700 is further distant can be displayed in a list.

Here, when the inspector 2001 touches the display portions of the gaming machines 1300-8 to 1300-15, the winning ratio information and the like displayed on the winning combination information display unit 3004 for the gaming machine 1300-12 and the like. Is displayed (below the display area) for the target gaming machine.

The display order of the gaming machines 1300 corresponds to the estimated distance between the mobile terminal 1700 and each gaming machine 1300 shown in FIG. 65 (note that, here, reflection and interference of wireless signals are taken into consideration. No). The distance between the mobile terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300-12, which is the closest estimated distance, is indicated by arrow A1 in FIG. 65.

If the inspector 2001 moves and the distance between the mobile terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300 changes, the display order of the gaming machine 1300 on the combination ratio information display screen 3001 shown in FIG. 66A will be changed accordingly. Become.

Further, in the example of the combination ratio information display screen 3001 shown in FIG. 66A, a request is made to the information management server 1100 based on the game machine ID received from the game machine 1300 by a wireless signal, and the corresponding game machine number is acquired. , It is displayed as a "unit number". The inspector 2001 recognizes that the role ratio information of the game machine 1300 is displayed on the role ratio information display screen 3001 by comparing this "unit number" with the display of the actual machine number of the game machine 1300. can do. However, even if the machine number is not displayed without accessing the information management server 1100, the inspector 2001 can obtain the role ratio information of which game machine 1300 by bringing the mobile terminal 1700 sufficiently close to the game machine 1300. , It is possible to recognize whether or not it is displayed at the top of the combination ratio information display screen 3001.

In the example of the combination ratio information display screen 3001 shown in FIG. 66A, since the corresponding gaming machine number is acquired from the information management server 1100 as described above, all the games on the floor of the hall store are simultaneously obtained. The game machine ID list of the machine 1300 (a list including the corresponding game machine number) has been acquired. Therefore, by operating the scroll bar 3002, it is possible to display a list including the gaming machines 1300 that have not yet received the combination ratio information. At this time, in the present embodiment, the list of the gaming machine IDs of the gaming machines 1300 acquired from the information management server 1100 is compared with the gaming machine IDs that have received the winning combination information, and the gaming machine 1300 for which the winning combination information has been received is compared. The display mode relating to the game machine 1300 and the display mode relating to the gaming machine 1300 for which the combination ratio information has not yet been received can be set differently. For example, it is possible to control the display color of the game console number of the gaming machine 1300 for which the combination ratio information has been received and the display color of the gaming table number of the gaming machine 1300 for which the combination ratio information has not yet been received to be different. .. By such control, the gaming machine 1300 that has not received the combination ratio information can be easily identified, and the occurrence of omission of acquisition of the combination ratio information can be avoided.

The combination ratio information display screen 3011 shown in FIG. 66B is displayed in the same situation as the combination ratio information display screen 3001 shown in FIG. 66A, but is displayed in a manner different from that of the combination ratio information display screen 3001. ..

That is, the role ratio information of each game machine 1300 is developed from the beginning instead of the pull-down method. Here, too, the gaming machines 1300 are displayed in order from the mobile terminal 1700.

For example, on the combination ratio information display screen 3011, the gaming machine number (display is "unit number") = "1300-12" is displayed at the top (reference numeral 3013), which corresponds to the information of the gaming machine 1300-12. There is. The gaming machine information display unit 3014 is developed under the gaming table number, and information including the role ratio information of the gaming machine 1300-12 is displayed here. The gaming machine information display unit 3014 has a gaming machine ID (display is "ID"), total number of games, advantageous section ratio, continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), bonus ratio (cumulative), continuous bonus ratio (6000G). , The accessory ratio (6000G) is displayed.

Further, in this example, as in FIG. 66A, the value of the accessory ratio (cumulative) is 75%, which exceeds a predetermined threshold value. Therefore, in order to attract the attention of the inspector 2001, for example, in the red. It is displayed (in FIG. 66B, it is displayed by a rectangular frame 3015 for convenience).

The gaming machine number (display is "unit number") = "1300-8" is displayed on the lower side of the gaming machine information display unit 3014 (reference numeral 3016), which corresponds to the information of the gaming machine 1300-8. .. The gaming machine 1300-8 is the gaming machine having the closest estimated distance to the mobile terminal 1700 next to the gaming machine 1300-12. Further, a gaming machine information display unit 3017 is developed under the gaming table number, and information including the combination information of the gaming machine 1300-8 is displayed here. The gaming machine information display unit 3017 has a gaming machine ID (display is "ID"), total number of games, advantageous section ratio, continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), bonus ratio (cumulative), continuous bonus ratio (6000G). , The accessory ratio (6000G) is displayed.

Further, in this example, the value of the advantageous section ratio is 70% and the value of the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) is 62%, which exceed the predetermined threshold values, so that the inspector 2001's attention is drawn. In, for example, it is displayed in red (in FIG. 66B, it is displayed in rectangular frames 3018 and 3019 for convenience).

Further, by operating the scroll bar 3012 arranged at the right end of the combination ratio information display screen 3011, it is possible to display a list of the gaming machines 1300 whose estimated distance from the mobile terminal 1700 is further distant.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a process for displaying the role ratio information display screen 3001 of FIG. 66A on the mobile terminal 1700 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the combination ratio information display control process for displaying the combination ratio information display screen 3001 on the mobile terminal 1700. Further, in FIG. 67, the processing flows of the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 are shown in chronological order.

The combination information display control process can be executed, for example, by downloading the specified application to the mobile terminal 1700 from a predetermined server. Further, since the role ratio information of the gaming machine 1300 can be grasped by the application, it is desirable to perform a predetermined user authentication when downloading or starting the application.

First, in the mobile terminal 1700, it is determined whether or not the main CPU 1701 has received a wireless signal (for example, a beacon signal based on the BLE standard) (S3001). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has not been received (NO in S3001), the reception process is repeated.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has been received (when the determination in S3001 is YES), the received wireless signal is decoded to acquire the UUID (S3002). Next, it is determined whether or not the main CPU 1701 is the UUID to be processed (S3003). When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is not the UUID to be processed (when the determination in S3003 is NO), it returns to S3001 and receives the radio signal. In this example, the UUID is set, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing an irrelevant radio signal or a spoofed radio signal. be able to.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is the processing target (when the determination in S3003 is YES), the gaming machine ID is acquired from the decoded wireless signal (S3004). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the machine number (game machine number) corresponding to the game machine ID has been acquired (S3005).

When the main CPU 1701 has already acquired the machine number corresponding to the gaming machine ID (YES determination in S3005), the process proceeds to S3010. Here, when the mobile terminal 1700 acquires the total number of games from the gaming machine 1300, the value of the total number of games is the same as the value acquired last time for the gaming machine 1300 (game machine ID). In the case of, it is determined that it is not necessary to change the display of the combination ratio information, and it is possible to return to the process of S3001 and control to receive the radio signal.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 1701 has not acquired the machine number corresponding to the game machine ID (NO determination in S3005), the main CPU 1701 transmits a game machine information request including the game machine ID to the information management server 1100 to perform this game. Request the machine number corresponding to the machine ID (S3006).

When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the gaming machine information request from the mobile terminal 1700, it refers to the gaming machine information table 1152 and acquires the machine number corresponding to the received gaming machine ID (S3007). Next, the main CPU 1101 transmits the acquired unit number to the mobile terminal 1700 (S3008).

When the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 receives the unit number from the information management server 1100 (S3009), or when the determination of YES in S3005, the main CPU 1701 acquires RSSI from the decoded wireless signal (S3010). Next, the main CPU 1701 acquires the combination ratio information and the like from the decoded radio signal (S3011).

After that, the main CPU 1701 edits the role ratio information display data for displaying the role ratio information display screen (for example, the role ratio information display screen 3001 in FIG. 66A) based on the unit number, RSSI, role ratio information, and the like. (S3012). Next, the main CPU 1701 controls to display the combination ratio information display screen based on the edited combination ratio information display data (S3013).

Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the user (inspector) has operated while displaying the role ratio information display screen (S3014). When the main CPU 1701 determines that there is a display change instruction (for example, pull-down display or scroll bar operation) by the user during the display of the role ratio information display screen (when S3014 is a "display change instruction"), the main CPU 1701 However, the process proceeds to S3012, where the combination information display data is edited again in response to the display change instruction. When the main CPU 1701 determines that there has been no operation by the user during the display of the combination ratio information display screen (when the determination in S3014 is NO), the main CPU 1701 performs the processing of S3001 and further receives the wireless signal. The role ratio information display screen is updated based on the result.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the end instruction has been given by the user during the display of the combination ratio information display screen (when S3014 is the "end instruction"), the main CPU 1701 ends this combination ratio information display control process.

In the example of FIG. 67, every time a new gaming machine ID is found, the corresponding machine number is requested from the information management server 1100, but the hall to be inspected is checked at the timing of downloading or logging in to the application. The hall ID corresponding to the store is input (or obtained when connected to the network device in the hall store), and at that time, the machine numbers of the gaming machines 1300 related to the hall store are collectively downloaded. You may.

Further, as described above, it is also possible to configure the information management server 1100 so that the machine number corresponding to the game machine ID is not requested and the machine number is not displayed.

The combination ratio information display screen 3021 shown in FIG. 68 is a combination ratio information display screen 3021 shown in a mode different from that shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B.

The game machine icon display unit 3022 is displayed on the upper part of the combination ratio information display screen 3021, and the combination ratio information display unit 3026 is displayed on the lower part of the combination ratio information display screen 3021.

On the gaming machine icon display unit 3022, the corresponding gaming machine icon 3024 is displayed according to the estimated distance between the mobile terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300. On the right side of the gaming machine icon display unit 3022, numbers (unit: centimeter) such as "20", "40", "60", "80", and "100" are shown, and these represent the estimated distance. .. Each gaming machine icon 3024 is controlled so as to indicate the machine number of the corresponding gaming machine and to be displayed on the upper part of the gaming machine icon display unit 3022 as the estimated distance between the mobile terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300 becomes longer.

Further, in the gaming machine icon display unit 3022 shown in FIG. 68, the display area is divided every 20 centimeters, but when a plurality of gaming machines 1300 belong to the same division, it is estimated to be a mobile terminal 1700. The gaming machine icon 3024 of the gaming machine 1300 with a short distance is displayed on the left side. Therefore, in the GUI of the role ratio information display screen 3021 shown in FIG. 68, the gaming machine 1300 located on the left side of the inspector 2001 may not be shown to be located on the left side on the role ratio information display screen 3021. become.

In fact, as can be seen from FIG. 65, the left and right positional relationships of the gaming machines 1300-12 and the gaming machines 1300-8 displayed in the 40 to 60 cm division of the gaming machine icon display unit 3022 are reversed. Has been done.

Further, in the 80 to 100 cm division of the gaming machine icon display unit 3022, the gaming machine 1300-4, the gaming machine 1300-16, the gaming machine 1300-7, and the gaming machine 1300-3 are displayed. Icons corresponding to the two gaming machines are shown, and the other two are displayed by side-scrolling.

In addition, the scroll bar 3023 can display the game machine icon 3024 in a farther division.

Here, when the game machine icon 3024 corresponding to the game machine 1300-12 is touched (arrow 3025), the role ratio information of the game machine 1300-12 is displayed on the combination ratio information display unit 3026. The role ratio information and the like of the gaming machine 1300-12 displayed here are the same as the contents shown in the role ratio information display unit 3004 of FIG. 66A.

FIG. 69 is a further improvement of the display control on the combination ratio information display screen 3021 shown in FIG. 68.

FIG. 69A shows a portion of the island 2035 and the island 2036 shown in FIG. 65, and is carried by the inspector 2001 in the inner passage between the island 2035 and the island 2036, similar to that shown in FIG. 65. Holds the terminal 1700. Here, FIG. 69A shows a situation (arrow A2) in which the inspector 2001 moves the mobile terminal 1700 to the left side.

In such a case, the mobile terminal 1700 uses a sensor 1711 (for example, a gyro sensor) to detect the moving direction of the mobile terminal 1700 and changes in the signal strength of the wireless signal received from each gaming machine 1300 (that is,). , How the signal strength of the radio signal from each gaming machine 1300 changed before and after the movement of the mobile terminal 1700) is analyzed.

Based on the above analysis results, the mobile terminal 1700 arranges the gaming machine icon 3024 corresponding to the gaming machine 1300 with increased signal strength on the left side of the gaming machine icon 3024 displayed in the same category of the gaming machine icon display unit 3022. On the contrary, the gaming machine icon 3024 corresponding to the gaming machine 1300 having a smaller signal strength or the gaming machine 1300 having a larger signal strength but having a larger change is placed on the left side. Control.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 69B, the gaming machine 1300 actually located on the left side of the inspector 2001 is also displayed on the left side in the GUI of the combination ratio information display screen 3021. For example, in the gaming machine 1300-12 and the gaming machine 1300-8 displayed in the 40 to 60 cm division of the gaming machine icon display unit 3022, the gaming machine 1300-8 is shown on the left side as shown in FIG. Has been done.

Further, in the 80 to 100 cm division of the gaming machine icon display unit 3022, the gaming machine 1300-4, the gaming machine 1300-16, the gaming machine 1300-7, and the gaming machine 1300-3 are displayed. As can be seen from the above, the gaming machine 1300-4 and the gaming machine 1300-3 located on the left side are displayed on the gaming machine icon display unit 3022 as the two gaming machines on the left side.

FIG. 70 is a further improvement of the display control on the combination ratio information display screen 3021 shown in FIG. 68.

FIG. 70A shows a part of the island 2035 and the island 2036 shown in FIG. 65, and is carried by the inspector 2001 in the inner passage between the island 2035 and the island 2036, similarly to the one shown in FIG. 65. Holds the terminal 1700. Here, FIG. 70 shows a situation (arrow A3) in which the inspector 2001 holds the mobile terminal 1700 and goes straight through the inner passage.

In such a case, the mobile terminal 1700 has a change in the signal strength of the wireless signal received from each gaming machine 1300 (that is, what is the signal strength of the wireless signal from each gaming machine 1300 before and after the movement of the mobile terminal 1700). Analyze how it changed).

Here, as shown in the role ratio information display screen 3031 of FIG. 70B, the mobile terminal 1700 divides the gaming machine icon display unit into a front display unit 3032 and a rear display unit 3033, and sets a division according to an estimated distance for each. do. Then, from the above analysis result, the mobile terminal 1700 arranges the gaming machine icon 3024 corresponding to the gaming machine 1300 whose signal strength has increased (that is, approached) on the front display unit 3032, and conversely, the signal strength has increased. The game machine icon 3024 corresponding to the smaller (that is, farther) game machine 1300 is controlled to be arranged on the rear display unit 3033. In this way, the mobile terminal 1700 controls the display position of the gaming machine icon 3024 according to the change in the proximity.

With such display control, in FIGS. 66A, 66B, 68, and 69, the gaming machine displayed only based on the estimated distance between the gaming machine 1300 and the mobile terminal 1700 (regardless of the forward direction or the backward direction). The icon 3024 will be displayed depending on whether it is located before or after the inspector 2001.

For example, by the combination information display screen 3031 shown in FIG. 70B, the gaming machine 1300 behind the inspector 2001 due to the movement of the inspector 2001 as shown in FIG. 70A is changed to the gaming machine 1300-7 and the gaming machine 1300-. 11. Game machine 1300-8, game machine 1300-15, game machine 1300-3, game machine 1300-16, game machine 1300-12, game machine 1300-4 can be easily grasped, and these are estimated distances. Are arranged in the order of. Similarly, it can be easily grasped that the gaming machine 1300 in front of the inspector 2001 is the gaming machine 1300-10, the gaming machine 1300-6, the gaming machine 1300-2, and the gaming machine 13000-14, and these are estimated. Arranged in order of distance.

Further, here, the mobile terminal 1700 determines the number of steps using the sensor 1711 (for example, an acceleration sensor or a gyro sensor), estimates the moving distance of the mobile terminal 1700, and considers the estimated moving distance to serve as a combination. It can also be configured to display the ratio information display screen 3031.

The combination ratio information display screen 3041 shown in FIG. 71 acquires the arrangement position of the gaming machines 1300 in the hall store as map information, and displays the combination ratio information from the map information and the contents of the radio signals received from each gaming machine 1300. The screen is edited and displayed.

On the role ratio information display screen 3041 of FIG. 71, the game machine 1300 and the mobile terminal 1700 of the hall store are displayed on the map display unit 3042, and the map is displayed by operating the scroll bar 3043 at the left end and the scroll bar 3044 at the bottom. The position displayed in the unit 3042 can be moved in the hall store.

In the example of FIG. 71, the map display unit 3042 displays the island 2035 shown in FIG. 65 and a part of the gaming machines 1300 of the island 2036, and the mobile terminal 1700 is displayed as an image 1700a. Further, the position of the mobile terminal 1700 (for example, the position of a radio signal receiving circuit such as the BLE chip 49d) is shown as the position 1700b.

As described above, the mobile terminal 1700 receives a wireless signal from each gaming machine 1300, and the distance between the mobile terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300 can be estimated from the signal strength and the like. Here, the map information Since the position of each gaming machine 1300 in the hall store is grasped by the above, the position of the mobile terminal 1700 can be estimated from the signal strength of the wireless signals received from at least three gaming machines 1300, and the map information and the estimated position can be estimated. The map display unit 3042 can be displayed based on the position of the mobile terminal 1700.

As for the map information, according to the map information table 1153 shown in FIG. 63, how far the upper left point of the gaming machine 1300 is from a predetermined reference point of the hall store (for example, the reference point 2002 of FIG. 64). It is possible to acquire the game table position indicating the position, the size of the game machine 1300, and the beacon transmission position indicating the position of the radio signal transmission circuit of the game machine 1300.

For each gaming machine 1300, the display position on the map display unit 3042 is determined from the map information, and for example, the image 1300-8a showing the gaming machine 1300-8 and the image 1300-8b of the radio signal transmission circuit are edited. Then, the distance between the gaming machine 1300-8 and the mobile terminal 1700 (indicated by the dotted line of reference numeral 1300-8c) is estimated based on the signal strength of the radio signal received by the mobile terminal 1700 from the gaming machine 1300-8. Will be done. Next, when a circle having a radius of a distance indicated by reference numeral 1300-8c is drawn centered on the image 1300-8b of the radio signal transmission circuit, the circle shown by reference numeral 1300-8d is drawn.

Such a circle is drawn in the same manner for the gaming machines 1300-11 and the gaming machine 1300-12, and the position where the three circles intersect is 1700b. Based on this position, the image 1700a representing the mobile terminal 1700 is displayed. Be edited.

By performing the above editing every time the mobile terminal 1700 moves, the map display unit 3042 of the role ratio information display screen 3041 displays such that the mobile terminal 1700 moves along the inner passage between the islands 2035 and the island 2036. Is realized.

In this example, three gaming machines 1300 for forming three circles are selected in order of proximity to the mobile terminal 1700 (that is, the received signal strength is large), but the present invention is limited to this. It's not something. It is also possible to select four or more gaming machines 1300 and estimate the intersection (or approaching point) of the four or more gaming machines 1300 as the position of the mobile terminal 1700.

Further, in FIG. 71, the radius is indicated by reference numeral 1300-8c centered on the dotted line (reference numeral 1300-8c) indicating the distance between the gaming machine 1300-8 and the portable terminal 1700 and the image 1300-8b of the radio signal transmission circuit. The circle of distance (reference numeral 1300-8d) is a display for explanation and does not need to be shown as a GUI (the same applies to the gaming machines 1300-11 and the gaming machines 1300-12).

When the user touches an image showing the gaming machine 1300 (for example, an image 1300-8a showing the gaming machine 1300-8) on the map display unit 3042 of the winning combination information display screen 3041 shown in FIG. 71, the winning combination information of FIG. 72 is shown. As shown on the display screen 3051, the winning combination information corresponding to the touched gaming machine 1300 is displayed.

Further, for example, the display mode (for example, display color) of the gaming machine 1300 for which the combination ratio information has been received is different from the display mode (for example, display color) of the gaming machine 1300 for which the combination ratio information has not yet been received. Can be controlled to. By such control, the gaming machine 1300 that has not received the combination ratio information can be easily identified, and the occurrence of omission of acquisition of the combination ratio information can be avoided.

On the role ratio information display screen 3051 of FIG. 72, the game machine number (display is “machine number”) = “1300-8” is displayed at the top (reference numeral 3052), and the game machine information display unit 3053 is displayed below it. Information including the role ratio information of the gaming machine 1300-8 is displayed here. The gaming machine information display unit 3053 has a gaming machine ID (display is "ID"), total number of games, advantageous section ratio, continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), bonus ratio (cumulative), continuous bonus ratio (6000G). , The accessory ratio (6000G) is displayed.

A back button 3054 is displayed at the bottom of the role ratio information display screen 3051, and when the user touches it, the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700 returns to the role ratio information display screen 3041 shown in FIG. 71. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a process for displaying the role ratio information display screen 3041 of FIG. 71 on the mobile terminal 1700 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the combination ratio information display control process for displaying the combination ratio information display screen 3041 on the mobile terminal 1700. Further, in FIG. 73, the processing flows of the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 are shown in chronological order.

The combination information display control process can be executed, for example, by downloading the specified application to the mobile terminal 1700 from a predetermined server. Further, since the role ratio information of the gaming machine 1300 can be grasped by the application, it is desirable to perform a predetermined user authentication when downloading or starting the application.

First, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 transmits a map information request to the information management server 1100 to request map information regarding the hall store to be inspected (S3031). The hall ID corresponding to the hall store can be specified by the user when the application is downloaded or started, or when the role ratio information display control process is started (it can also be obtained when connected to the network device in the hall store). .. It is also possible to further specify a specific floor of the hall store.

When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the map information request from the mobile terminal 1700, it refers to the game machine information table 1152, identifies the game machine ID corresponding to the hall ID of the received hall store, and acquires the machine number. Then, with reference to the map information table 1153, the map information of each gaming machine ID is acquired (S3032). Next, the main CPU 1101 transmits the acquired unit number and map information to the mobile terminal 1700 (S3033).

Next, in the mobile terminal 1700, it is determined whether or not the main CPU 1701 has received a wireless signal (for example, a beacon signal based on the BLE standard) (S3034). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has not been received (NO in S3034), the reception process is repeated.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has been received (when the determination in S3034 is YES), the received wireless signal is decoded to acquire the UUID (S3035). Next, it is determined whether or not the main CPU 1701 is the UUID to be processed (S3036). When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is not the UUID to be processed (when the determination in S3036 is NO), it returns to S3034 and receives the radio signal. In this example, the UUID is set, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing an irrelevant radio signal or a spoofed radio signal. be able to.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is the UUID to be processed (when the determination in S3036 is YES), RSSI is acquired from the decoded radio signal (S3037). Next, the main CPU 1701 acquires the combination ratio information and the like from the decoded radio signal (S3038).

Next, in the mobile terminal 1700, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (S3039). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in S3039), the process proceeds to S3044. When the main CPU 1701 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in S3039), for example, the RSSI values grasped in association with the gaming machine ID are compared, and the RSSI values are in descending order (that is,). , In order of proximity to the mobile terminal 1700), three gaming machines 1300 are selected, and the position of the mobile terminal is estimated based on the distance between each gaming machine 1300 and the mobile terminal 1700 estimated using RSSI or the like (S3040). ..

Next, the main CPU 1701 develops a map image based on the received map information related to the gaming machine 1300 and the estimated position of the mobile terminal (S3041). After that, the main CPU 1701 is for displaying the role ratio information for displaying the role ratio information display screen (for example, the role ratio information display screen 3041 shown in FIG. 71) based on the developed map image, the unit number, and the role ratio information. Edit the data (S3042). After that, the main CPU 1701 controls to display the combination ratio information display screen based on the combination ratio information display data (S3043).

Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the user (inspector) has operated while displaying the role ratio information display screen (S3044). When the main CPU 1701 determines that there is a display change instruction (for example, touching an image corresponding to the gaming machine 1300) by the user during the display of the combination ratio information display screen (when S3044 is a "display change instruction"). The main CPU 1701 proceeds to the process of S3042, where the combination ratio information display data is edited again in response to the display change instruction. When the main CPU 1701 determines that there has been no operation by the user during the display of the combination ratio information display screen (when the determination in S3044 is NO), the main CPU 1701 performs the processing of S3034, further receives the wireless signal, and the main CPU 1701 receives the radio signal. The role ratio information display screen is updated based on the result.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the end instruction has been given by the user during the display of the combination ratio information display screen (when S3044 is the "end instruction"), the main CPU 1701 ends this combination ratio information display control process.

In the example of FIG. 73, the information management server 1100 is accessed to acquire the gaming machine ID of the gaming machine in the hall store, the machine number corresponding to the gaming machine ID, and the layout (map information) of each gaming machine in the hall store. However, for example, at the timing of downloading or logging in to the application, the hall ID corresponding to the hall store to be inspected is input, and at that time, the game machine ID, machine number, and map information related to the hall store are entered. May be configured to download all at once.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distance between the game machine 1300 and the mobile terminal 1700 is estimated based on the signal strength of the received signal such as RSSI, but the signal strength acquired by the reflection or interference of the wireless signal has an error or instability. (Variation) occurs. In order to deal with such errors and instability, it is possible to obtain an average over a predetermined time, or to use a low-pass filter to remove an extreme increase or decrease in signal strength as noise.

Next, still another method of the combination ratio information display control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing variations in timing at which a wireless signal (for example, a beacon signal) is transmitted in the wireless signal transmission circuit of the gaming machine 1300.

FIG. 74A shows a radio signal transmission pattern in a gaming machine in the first row of the island 2035 (a row including the gaming machines 1300-1 to 1300-4 (see FIG. 65)), and the transmission of the radio signal (for example, , In the BLE standard, the transmission of the advertisement packet) is repeated 50 times (that is, 1 second) at a 20 ms interval (advertisement interval), and then the transmission of the radio signal is stopped for 1 second and transmitted at such an interval. And repeat the stop of outgoing calls.

FIG. 74B shows a radio signal transmission pattern in the second row of gaming machines on the island 2035 (rows including gaming machines 1300-5 to 1300-5 (see FIG. 65)), and transmission of radio signals (for example, , In the BLE standard, the transmission of the advertisement packet) is repeated 50 times (that is, 1 second) at 20 ms intervals, and then the transmission of the radio signal is stopped for 2 seconds, and then the transmission and transmission are performed at such intervals. Repeat the stop.

FIG. 74C shows a radio signal transmission pattern in the first row of gaming machines on the island 2036 (row including gaming machines 1300-9 to 1300-12 (see FIG. 65)), and transmission of radio signals (for example, , In the BLE standard, the transmission of the advertisement packet) is repeated 100 times (that is, for 2 seconds) at 20 ms intervals, and then the transmission of the radio signal is stopped for 1 second, and then the transmission and transmission are performed at such intervals. Repeat the stop.

FIG. 74D shows a radio signal transmission pattern in the second row of gaming machines on the island 2036 (row including gaming machines 1300-13 to 1300-16 (see FIG. 65)), and transmission of radio signals (for example, , In the BLE standard, the transmission of the advertisement packet) is repeated 100 times (that is, for 2 seconds) at 20 ms intervals, and then the transmission of the radio signal is stopped for 2 seconds, and then the transmission and transmission are performed at such intervals. Repeat the stop.

FIG. 75A is a combination ratio information display screen 3061 similar to the combination ratio information display screen 3001 shown in FIG. 66A.

On the role ratio information display screen 3061, the game console number (display is "unit number") = "1300-12" is displayed at the top (reference numeral 3063), which corresponds to the information of the gaming machine 1300-12. The combination ratio information display unit 3064 is developed by a pull-down method under the game console number, and information including the combination ratio information of the game machines 1300-12 is displayed here. The game machine ID (display is "ID"), the total number of games, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), the bonus ratio (cumulative), and the continuous bonus ratio (6000G) are displayed on the role ratio information display unit 3004. , The accessory ratio (6000G) is displayed.

Other gaming machines 1300 are displayed below the role ratio information display unit 3064 (reference numeral 3065), and these gaming machines 1300 are listed from the top in order of the estimated distance between the mobile terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300. Has been done.

Further, by operating the scroll bar 3062 arranged at the right end of the combination ratio information display screen 3061, it is possible to display a list of the gaming machines 1300 whose estimated distance from the mobile terminal 1700 is further distant.

At the bottom of the role ratio information display screen 3061, there is a display instruction button 3066 that displays "display only game machines in the same row" and a display instruction button that displays "display game machines on the same island". 3067 is displayed. As a GUI, this point is different from the combination ratio information display screen 3001 shown in FIG. 66A.

The main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 is the gaming machine 1300 (here, the gaming machine 1300, which is presumed to be the closest to the mobile terminal 1700) listed at the top when the display instruction button 3066 is touched by the user. It is controlled to display only the gaming machines in the same row as the machines 1300-12).

Specifically, the wireless signal transmission pattern of the gaming machine 1300-12 (that is, a pattern in which the transmission of the wireless signal is repeated 100 times at 20 ms intervals and then the transmission of the wireless signal is stopped for 1 second (see FIG. 73D)). While displaying other gaming machines with the same pattern as, the display of other gaming machines is suppressed.

Also, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 is the gaming machine 1300 (here, estimated to be closest to the mobile terminal 1700) listed at the top when the display instruction button 3067 is touched by the user. , Game machine 1300-12) is controlled to display only the game machines on the same island.

Specifically, another gaming machine having the same pattern as the wireless signal transmission pattern of the gaming machine 1300-12 (that is, the pattern in which the transmission of the wireless signal is repeated 100 times at 20 ms intervals (see FIGS. 73C and 73D)) is displayed. At the same time, the display of other gaming machines is suppressed.

When the display instruction button 3066 is touched on the combination ratio information display screen 3061 of FIG. 75A, the gaming machines 1300-12 are arranged in the row of the islands as shown in the combination ratio information display screen 3071 of FIG. 75B. It is listed together with other gaming machines 1300 (gaming machines 1300-11, gaming machines 1300-10) (reference numeral 3072). In this example, the gaming machines 1300-9 are arranged in the same row as the gaming machines 1300-12, but they are not displayed because they are far from the mobile terminal 1700 and the signal strength of the wireless signal is not sufficient. There is.

On the role ratio information display screen 3071 of FIG. 75B, under the list display of the gaming machines 1300 as described above, a display instruction button 3073 displaying "Display gaming machines in another row" and "Games on the same island" are displayed. A display instruction button 3074 displaying "Display a machine" and a display instruction button 75 displaying "Display all gaming machines" are displayed, and these buttons are displayed on the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700. When touched, the gaming machines 1300 are grouped based on the above-mentioned transmission pattern of the radio signal, and the gaming machines 1300 determined to be displayed are displayed.

Further, by repeating the touch of the display instruction button 3073, the groups of the gaming machines 1300 in other rows can be sequentially displayed.

In this way, by associating each pattern of wireless signal transmission as shown in FIG. 73 according to the arrangement position of the gaming machine 1300, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 does not access the information management server 1100. The gaming machines 1300 can be classified and displayed for each island or each row of islands.

In this example, the wireless signal transmission pattern is changed according to the arrangement position of the gaming machine 1300. For example, the wireless signal is changed according to the attributes such as the model, type, manufacturing timing, and manufacturer of the gaming machine 1300. By changing the transmission pattern, the combination information of the gaming machine 1300 can be displayed for each attribute.

Further, in the above example, the transmission interval of the wireless signal (for example, the advertisement interval of the BLE standard) is set to 20 ms. For example, this transmission interval is set to the arrangement position of the gaming machine 1300, the model and type of the gaming machine 1300. The gaming machines 1300 are classified into several groups by changing according to attributes such as, manufacturing timing, and manufacturer, and information on the gaming machines 1300 belonging to a specific one or a plurality of groups is selectively displayed on the mobile terminal 1700. can do.

FIG. 76A shows the configuration of the gaming machine information table 1152', which is a modification of the gaming machine information table 1152 shown in FIG. 62B. In the gaming machine information table 1152', an island number that can identify the island on which the gaming machine 1300 is placed and a column number that can identify a row in the island are set for each gaming machine 1300.

By preparing such a gaming machine information table 1152', the role ratio information display screen 3061 of FIG. 75A can be displayed. In this case, it is not necessary to provide variations in the radio signal pattern of each gaming machine 1300, but the information management server 1100 is accessed, and the island number and column number of the corresponding gaming machine ID are displayed from the gaming machine information table 1152'. Need to get. Further, in this case, the island number and the column number of the gaming machine 1300 to be displayed can be specified on the combination ratio information display screen 3061.

[Expansion of role ratio information display control processing]
In the present embodiment, in addition to displaying the role ratio information display screen 3001 and the like on the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700 at a timing close to real time, the role ratio information received by the mobile terminal 1700 from the game machine 1300 is stored in the ROM 1702. It can be controlled to be stored and accumulated in the like. The winning combination information accumulated in this way includes, for example, the gaming machine ID, the total number of games, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous winning combination ratio (cumulative), the winning combination ratio (cumulative), the continuous winning combination ratio (6000G), and the winning combination ratio ( 6000G), the reception date and time (update date and time) are included. Further, as the role ratio information, it is also possible to store the game console number and the position information indicating the position of the game machine in the hall store.

Since the mobile terminal 1700 receives these role ratio information from the game machine 1300 at predetermined time intervals (for example, in the case of the BLE standard beacon signal, at 20 ms intervals (advertisement interval)), the data received in this way. However, due to the data capacity of the ROM 1702, etc., the winning combination information at a predetermined timing (for example, the first winning combination information in which the total number of games has changed) is selected from the received combination ratio information. Can be configured to accumulate.

Further, the mobile terminal 1700 may later display the above-mentioned role ratio information stored in the ROM 1702 or the like on the display 1708 by operating the menu displayed by the predetermined application by the user (inspector). The form can be output (to a printer connected by wireless LAN or the like). Such a display layout or form layout on the display 1708 may be, for example, a layout such as the combination ratio information display screen 3001 shown in FIG. 66A or the combination ratio information display screen 3011 shown in FIG. 66B.

In addition, when instructing the display of the combination ratio information or the output of the form in the menu of the above application, the user can use the combination information such as the game console number, the gaming machine ID, the total number of games and the advantageous section ratio, and the placement position in the hall store. It is possible to set the range of the gaming machines to be displayed (printed) with respect to the reception date and time. Further, the user can specify to display (print) the game machine number, the game machine ID, the role ratio information such as the total number of games and the advantageous section ratio, the arrangement position in the hall store, the reception date and time, etc. in a predetermined order. A game that satisfies certain conditions, such as a gaming machine whose role ratio information is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, or a gaming machine whose role ratio information is equal to or higher than a predetermined value at a predetermined time and period. You can also specify to selectively display (print) the machine. In addition, for the same gaming machine, changes in time series of role ratio information (for example, daily changes) are analyzed, and display and printing are performed according to the status of the changes, and the display mode and printing mode are different from others. You may do it.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the role ratio information received by the mobile terminal 1700 from the game machine 1300 is transmitted to the information management server 1100 via wireless LAN communication or a wireless network by a mobile communication system such as 3G or 4G. Therefore, the combination ratio information can be configured to be accumulated in the combination ratio information storage table 1160. As shown in FIG. 76B, for example, the role ratio information storage table 1160 has a gaming machine ID, a total number of games, an advantageous section ratio, a continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), a bonus ratio (cumulative), and a continuous bonus ratio (6000 G). ), The accessory ratio (6000G), and the reception date and time (update date and time) are included.

Here, the mobile terminal 1700 transmits the role ratio information to the information management server according to the timing when the role ratio information is received from the game machine 1300 (for example, in the case of the BLE standard beacon signal, at 20 ms intervals (advertisement intervals)). It can be transmitted to the 1100 and the information management server 1100 can store these combination information in the above-mentioned combination information storage table 1160, but the combination information at a predetermined timing (for example, the first change in the total number of games). It can be configured to select (role ratio information) and send it to the information management server 1100.

In this way, in the mobile terminal 1700, the received role ratio information is stored in the memory of the mobile terminal 1700 and printed later, or transmitted to the information management server 1100 and stored in the role ratio information storage table 1160. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud (for example, fraud in which the role ratio information is edited at the reporting stage or false reports are made) or mistakes by the inspector.

[Association between gaming machines and external centralized terminal boards]
When trying to identify a gaming machine by associating an ID such as an external centralized terminal board 47 with a gaming machine, this ID can be managed as a gaming machine ID, but as such a gaming machine ID, for example, external concentration An ID of a device or the like included in the external centralized terminal board, such as the UID of the BLE module arranged on the terminal board 47 or the like, can be used. In this case, if the association between the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine identifier (for example, the gaming table number, etc.) is changed due to the replacement of the external centralized terminal board, etc., the winning combination information received from the BLE module will be the game. It becomes impossible to identify whether it belongs to the machine.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the mobile terminal 1700 that has received the combination ratio information changes the display of the combination ratio information according to the change in the association between the gaming machine ID and the identifier of the gaming machine. For example, the mobile terminal 1700 stores the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the identifier of the gaming machine as correspondence data, and when displaying / printing the combination ratio information, the correspondence data is used to receive the data. It is configured to acquire and display the game console number associated with the game machine ID. Then, when the association between the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine number is changed, the application of the mobile terminal 1700 responds to the change (for example, by an update process at startup or an instruction from the information management server 1100 or the like). Update the correspondence data above and keep it up to date. By such a method, the mobile terminal 1700 can display and print the gaming machine number and the like based on the latest correspondence even when the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the identifier of the gaming machine changes. can.

Further, the correspondence data for storing the correspondence between the game machine ID and the game machine identifier is stored in a server such as the information management server 1100, and the information when the application of the mobile terminal 1700 displays and prints the role ratio information. It can also be configured to access the management server 1100 or the like to grasp the latest correspondence data. Here, the correspondence data has a configuration such as the gaming machine information table 1152 shown in FIG. 62B, and in this table, the gaming machine ID (here, the UID of the BLE module, etc.) and the gaming table number are used. Correspondence relationship is managed for each hall store.

As described above, when the application of the mobile terminal 1700 updates the correspondence data in response to the change in the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the identifier of the gaming machine, the correspondence stored in the above information management server 1100. You can get the required data from the data.

In addition, such a change in the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the identifier of the gaming machine can be used in factories, hall stores, and information management systems that can grasp the replacement of the external centralized terminal board that caused the change in the correspondence. It is performed by the administrator / operator, etc., by inputting using an information terminal or the like. For example, in a hall store, the manager of the hall store inputs to change the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the identifier of the gaming machine using the hall management terminal 1600, and inputs the correspondence data of the information management server 1100. Update. Further, when the gaming machine is newly placed in the hall store, the correspondence data regarding the gaming machine is input by the above-mentioned related parties.

Further, when the door opening / closing information indicating that the door of the gaming machine has been opened / closed is received from the mobile terminal 1700 via the BLE module or the like arranged on the external centralized terminal plate (the sixth embodiment described later). (See), a message prompting the administrator to confirm the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine identifier can be sent.

For example, when the gaming machine detects that the predetermined door of the gaming machine has been opened, the gaming machine ID (here, the UID of the BLE module, etc.) is transmitted via the BLE module arranged on the external centralized terminal plate. The door opening / closing information indicating that the door has been opened is transmitted by the BLE signal. When the mobile terminal 1700 receives the game machine ID and the door opening / closing information transmitted in this way, it transmits this to the information management server 1100. Here, the information management server 1100 further updates the game machine status management table 1155 based on the received game machine ID and door opening / closing information (see the sixth embodiment described later), and also supports the above-mentioned correspondence data. In the record of the gaming machine ID to be played, the correspondence relationship confirmation flag is set to "1" (here, in the correspondence relationship data, a new correspondence relationship confirmation flag is provided, and the initial value of the correspondence relationship confirmation flag is "0". ").

Next, the information management server 1100 refers to the correspondence relationship data, and determines that it is necessary to confirm the correspondence relationship between the gaming machine ID in which the correspondence relationship confirmation flag is "1" and the corresponding game console number. , Is transmitted to the hall management terminal 1600, and then the correspondence confirmation flag is set to "0". In this way, in the hall store, it is possible that the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine identifier has changed as a result of the external centralized terminal board being replaced for the gaming machine whose door has been opened once. If there is, a message or the like prompting confirmation of the correspondence is displayed on the hall management terminal 1600.

Similarly, it is also possible to transmit a message or the like prompting confirmation of such a correspondence relationship when the gaming machine recovers from the power failure.

At this time, even when it is detected that the predetermined door of the gaming machine is closed, it indicates that the door is closed together with the gaming machine ID via the BLE module arranged on the external centralized terminal plate. By configuring the door opening / closing information to be transmitted by the BLE signal, the information management server 1100 can also manage the event that the door of the gaming machine is closed. Therefore, for example, the same gaming machine ID can be used. If the door opening / closing information indicating that the door is opened within a predetermined period and the door opening / closing information indicating that the door is closed are received, it is determined that the door is not opened / closed for replacement of the external centralized terminal plate, etc. Then, the game machine ID can be controlled so as not to be transmitted to the hall management terminal 1600.

Further, the information management server 1100 receives the door opening / closing information indicating that the door of the gaming machine has been closed, and the received gaming machine ID is a new ID that is not stored in the correspondence data. In this case, it is possible to determine that the external centralized terminal plate has been replaced, and to control the transmission to that effect to the hall management terminal 1600.

At this time, the gaming machine ID that receives only the door opening / closing information indicating that the door has been opened, or the door opening / closing that indicates that the latest (or received within a predetermined period) door has been opened. A gaming machine ID that meets a predetermined condition, such as a gaming machine ID related to information, is determined to be a gaming machine ID related to the external centralized terminal board before replacement, and is combined with a gaming machine ID related to the corresponding external centralized terminal board after replacement. It can be controlled to be associated and transmitted to the hall management terminal 1600. By showing the game machine ID associated in this way, the manager of the hall store changed the game machine ID from which ID to which ID (due to replacement of the external centralized terminal board, etc.) with respect to the specific game machine. Can be easily estimated.

In this example, the gaming machine ID and the like for which it is necessary to confirm the correspondence is transmitted to the hall management terminal 1600 arranged in the hall store, but the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the identifier of the gaming machine is assumed. Can be transmitted to various computers including the mobile terminal 1700, depending on the administrator who should manage the.

Further, in the correspondence relationship data, a new correspondence relationship confirmation flag can be provided, and as a result of being prompted to confirm the correspondence relationship, it is possible to manage the confirmation. For example, in the hall management terminal 1600 or the mobile terminal 1700, when necessary changes are input or confirmed in response to a message prompting confirmation of the correspondence, and a confirmation completion check is input, the information is sent to the information management server 1100. It is transmitted, and the corresponding record of the correspondence data is updated based on the transmission information. For example, "0" is set in the correspondence confirmation flag, and "1" is set in the correspondence confirmation flag (the initial value of the correspondence confirmation flag is "0").

Here, the information management server 1100 determines that the gaming machine ID in which the correspondence relationship confirmation flag of the correspondence relationship data is "1" and the correspondence relationship confirmed flag is "0" is unconfirmed after the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, a message for prompting confirmation of the target gaming machine ID is transmitted to the hall management terminal 1600 and the mobile terminal 1700.

With such a mechanism, the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine are continuously maintained in a correct correspondence relationship, and even if the external centralized terminal plate is replaced, the role ratio information can be correctly grasped. In addition, it can detect the possibility of replacing the external centralized terminal board, manage the target for which the administrator should confirm the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine, and encourage the administrator to confirm the correspondence. be able to. It can also be configured to manage whether or not the corresponding correspondence has been confirmed by the administrator.

In the sixth embodiment described later, the mobile terminal 1700 receives the BLE signal including the door opening / closing information transmitted from the game machine, transmits the received signal to the information management server 1100, and these processes are performed by the mobile terminal. It could be done in secret without being consciously or perceived by the owner / operator of the 1700 (for example, the staff or the player of the hall store), but here, the user of the mobile terminal 1700 is an application. Can be consciously transmitted to the information management server 1100 via the mobile terminal 1700 while witnessing the operation of replacing the external centralized terminal plate and recovering from the power failure.

<< Fifth Embodiment >>
Next, the configuration and operation of the information management system according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, the game machine distribution management process for managing the distribution of each game machine 1300 arranged in the hall store is realized.

<System overview>
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an outline of an information management system according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from the game machine 1300a, and the game machine ID included in the wireless signal is acquired by the mobile terminal 1700 that receives the wireless signal. The gaming machine 1300a has the same configuration as the gaming machine 1300 described above, but here, the radio signal may be configured so as not to include the combination ratio information or the like. Further, the radio signal may be transmitted by another radio signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module different from the BLE module 49 described above).

The mobile terminal 1700 that has received the wireless signal from the gaming machine 1300a transmits the gaming machine ID to the information management server 1100 together with the hall ID (identifier that can identify the hall store) grasped by the mobile terminal 1700 and the date and time information. When the information management server 1100 receives the gaming machine ID or the like from the mobile terminal 1700, the information management server 1100 refers to the gaming machine distribution management table 1154 and determines whether or not there is a record related to the combination of the gaming machine ID and the hall ID. , If it does not exist, the record is added with the date and time information as the first reception date and time, and if it exists, the latest reception date and time of the record is updated.

Further, in the present embodiment, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, BLE module 306 (see FIG. 78)) incorporated in the data display device 300a connected to the gaming machine 1300a to the mobile terminal 1700. The game machine ID may be transmitted. Further, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in the sand device 1370 or another peripheral device directly or indirectly connected to the gaming machine 1300a to the mobile terminal 1700. The game machine ID may be transmitted.

By such a game machine distribution management process, it is possible to manage from when to when the game machine 1300a is arranged in which hall store. In this case, the date and time when the gaming machine 1300 is placed in the hall store and the date and time when the gaming machine 1300 is moved from the hall are only "approximate", but by frequently receiving the radio signal by the mobile terminal 1700, the gaming machine The timing of movement of the 1300a can be grasped in more detail. The reception of the gaming machine ID by the mobile terminal 1700 can be realized, for example, by the person in charge of the gaming machine maker patrolling the hall stores for sales or heading. In addition, the staff of a third-party organization involved in the distribution management of gaming machines may perform such patrols.

Further, such a game machine distribution management process facilitates tracking of the game machine 1300, and makes it possible to formulate an effective manufacturing / distribution strategy. Further, as a result, since the usage period and usage environment of the gaming machine 1300 can be grasped, effective quality control can be performed. Such tracking and quality control can also be carried out for each part by associating the gaming machine 1300a with its parts.

Since the mobile terminal 1700 receives the wireless signal from each gaming machine 1300a and thereby acquires the gaming machine ID of the gaming machine 1300a, the user can simply pass in front of the gaming machine 1300a of many gaming machines 1300a. The gaming machine ID can be collected.

Here, the gaming machine ID is an identifier that can individually identify the gaming machine 1300a as a whole, and for example, an ID stored in advance in the "chip individual number" of the main CPU 101, the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit, or the like. It can be assigned.

Further, the IDs of the external centralized terminal board 647, the ROM 649b of the BLE module 649, the BLE chip 649d, and the like may be set in association with the gaming machine (see FIG. 78). It should be noted that such an ID and the gaming machine 1300a can be linked at a hall store or a factory. Further, these IDs need to be linked again when the external centralized terminal plate 47 is replaced.

The users of the mobile terminal 1700 assumed in the game machine distribution management process of the present embodiment include, for example, the manager and staff of the hall store, the manufacturer of the game machine 1300a, and the third party who manages the distribution of the game machine 1300a. Personnel institutions, etc. can be considered.

<Connection form between main control circuit and BLE module>
In FIG. 78, the main control circuit 690 of the gaming machine 1300a includes a microprocessor 691 (main CPU 601) and a role ratio monitor 695, where the role ratio monitor 695 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED circuit. When the microprocessor 691 transmits the combination ratio information (output data for the 4-digit 7-segment LED) to the combination ratio monitor 695, the combination ratio monitor 695 lights the 4-digit 7-segment LED accordingly. It is designed to display the role ratio information.

A relay circuit 648 and a BLE module 649 are mounted on the board of the external centralized terminal board 647, and the microprocessor 691 sends a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal (one medal insertion and a medal payout signal) to the external centralized terminal board 647. When one pulse signal is sent for each medal payout), these signals are sent to the CPU 301 of the external data display device 300a connected to the external centralized terminal board 647 via the relay circuit 648. Provided, the CPU 301 displays game information and the like based on the received signal.

The microprocessor 691 further transmits the gaming machine ID to the BLE module 306 of the data display device 300a connected via the external centralized terminal board 647. The BLE module 306 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, and a BLE chip, although not shown here. The CPU of the BLE module 306 controls the BLE chip when receiving data (game machine ID) from the microprocessor 691 based on the program stored in the ROM, and controls the game machine ID, hall ID, date and time information. Is wirelessly transmitted from the antenna of the BLE chip as a BLE standard beacon signal. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip can be received by a mobile terminal 1700 such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via a wireless communication network.

The data display device 300a and the data display device 300b described later can be updated so that data such as a gaming machine ID is transmitted via the sand device 1370 and the hall computer 1200.

The microprocessor 691 also transmits the gaming machine ID and the combination ratio information to the BLE module 649. The BLE module 649 includes a CPU 649a, a ROM 649b, a RAM 649c, and a BLE chip 649d. The CPU 649a controls the BLE chip 649d when receiving data (game machine ID and role ratio information) from the microprocessor 691 based on the program stored in the ROM 649 b, and controls the game machine ID and the role ratio information. Is wirelessly transmitted from the antenna of the BLE chip 649d as a BLE standard beacon signal. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip 649d can be received by a mobile terminal 1700 such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via a wireless communication network.

In the example of FIG. 78, the combination ratio monitor 695 and the BLE module 649 are provided, and the combination ratio information is displayed and transmitted by these, but these configurations can be omitted. Further, as shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the BLE module 649 of the external centralized terminal plate 647 can be configured to transmit the gaming machine ID to the mobile terminal 1700.

<Table configuration used in the information management system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a table for storing data used in the game machine distribution management process of the information management system 1001 will be described.

FIG. 79 shows an example of the game machine distribution management table 1154. The game machine distribution management table 1154 includes the game machine ID, the hall ID, the first reception date and time, and the latest reception date and time. By the above-mentioned game machine distribution management process, it is possible to grasp how long the game machine has been used in each of the plurality of hall stores. For example, in the example of FIG. 79, the gaming machine with the gaming machine ID = "4890998216" is about 3 years and 3 months at the hall store with the hall ID = "H001" and about 1 year and 9 months at the hall store with the hall ID = "H038". It can be seen that it has been used for months (see reference numeral B1).

<Explanation of game machine distribution management processing in information management system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the game machine distribution management process in the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the game machine distribution management process executed by the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100. Further, in FIG. 80, the processing flows of the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 are shown in chronological order.

The game machine distribution management process can be executed, for example, by downloading the specified application to the mobile terminal 1700 from a predetermined server. Here, it is assumed that the application is started during the game machine distribution management process. When the wireless signal described later is received, the application can be started or a message prompting the start can be displayed.

First, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 determines whether or not the hall ID has been received from the user (S3061). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has not been received (when the determination in S3061 is NO), the reception process is repeated. The hall ID identifies the hall store that performs the game machine distribution management process. For example, the user selects one of the hall store names listed on the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700, so that the mobile terminal 1700 is used. Provided to.

Instead of the hall ID, coordinate data obtained by GPS on the mobile terminal 1700 located near the hall store, coordinate data obtained when the hall store is specified by the map application, and the like can be used. In this case, the coordinate data and the like are also stored in the game machine distribution management table 1154 described above.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the hall ID has been received (when the determination in S3061 is YES), it is determined whether or not the main CPU 1701 has received a wireless signal (for example, a beacon signal based on the BLE standard) (S3062). .. When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has not been received (NO in S3062), the reception process is repeated.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has been received (when the determination in S3062 is YES), the received wireless signal is decoded to acquire the UUID (S3063). Next, it is determined whether or not the main CPU 1701 is the UUID to be processed (S3064). When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is not the UUID to be processed (when the determination in S3064 is NO), it returns to S3062 and receives the radio signal. In this example, the UUID is set, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing an irrelevant radio signal or a spoofed radio signal. be able to.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is the processing target (when the determination in S3064 is YES), the gaming machine ID is acquired from the decoded radio signal (S3065). Next, whether or not the main CPU 1701 has transmitted the data of the gaming machine ID to the information management server 1100 within a predetermined period (for example, within a period of one day, one hour, after the application is started until now). Determine (S3066). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the data of the gaming machine ID has been transmitted to the information management server 1100 (when the determination in S3066 is YES), it returns to S3062 and receives the radio signal. This determination is to prevent the data of the same gaming machine ID from being transmitted to the information management server 1100 more frequently than necessary.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the data of the game machine ID has not been transmitted to the information management server 1100 (when the determination in S3066 is NO), the game machine ID acquired from the received signal and the hole held by the mobile terminal 1700. The ID and the date and time information are transmitted to the information management server 1100 (S3067). It is also possible to set the date and time information by the information management server 1100 without transmitting the date and time information here.

When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the gaming machine ID, the hall ID, etc. from the mobile terminal 1700, the gaming machine distribution management table 1154 is referred to, and the combination of the gaming machine ID and the hall ID is the gaming machine distribution management table 1154. It is confirmed whether or not it already exists in (S069).

When the main CPU 1101 determines that the combination of the gaming machine ID and the hall ID already exists in the gaming machine distribution management table 1154 (when the determination in S3070 is YES), the main CPU 1101 has the gaming machine 1300a indicated by the gaming machine ID. Since it is known that the hall ID is located in the hall store, the latest reception date and time of the record in the game machine distribution management table 1154 is updated with date and time information, and this item is set as the latest date and time (S3072). ).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 1101 determines that the combination of the gaming machine ID and the hall ID does not already exist in the gaming machine distribution management table 1154 (when the determination in S3070 is NO), the main CPU 1101 is the game indicated by the gaming machine ID. Since it is not yet known that the machine 1300a is located in the hall store of the hall ID, a record including the game machine ID and the hall ID is added to the game machine distribution management table 1154 (S3071). Then, the date and time information is set to the first reception date and time.

After the processing of S3071 or after the processing of S3072, the main CPU 1101 ends the processing.

After the process of S3067, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 determines whether or not there is an end instruction from the user (S3068). When it is determined that the user has given an end instruction (when the determination in S3068 is YES), the game machine distribution management process is terminated. When it is determined that there is no end instruction from the user (when the determination in S3068 is NO), the process returns to S3062 and the radio signal is received.

When the user performs such a game machine distribution management process at each hall store, a large amount of distribution data is accumulated in the game machine distribution management table 1154 as shown in FIG. 79. The information management server 1100 analyzes the distribution data of the gaming machine distribution management table 1154 at a predetermined timing to provide useful data on the usage mode (how it is used, frequency of movement, etc.) and quality of the gaming machine 1300a. Can be obtained. Further, by linking the gaming machine ID with the type, manufacturer, manufacturing date, etc. of the gaming machine, it is possible to grasp the usage mode, quality, etc. for each of these attributes.

In the present embodiment, for example, a gaming machine icon of a gaming machine that has acquired a gaming machine ID by displaying a gaming machine icon as shown in FIG. 70 on the mobile terminal 1700, and a gaming machine that has not acquired a gaming machine ID. The gaming machine icons of the machines may be displayed separately. Further, here, it is also possible to display only the game machine icon of the game machine for which the game machine ID has been acquired. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, the arrangement position of the gaming machine is displayed by using the map information table 1153, and the gaming machine that has acquired the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine that has not acquired the gaming machine ID are divided. It may be displayed separately.

<< 6th Embodiment >>
Next, the configuration and operation of the information management system according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, the game machine status transmission process for transmitting the door opening / closing information and the operating time information of each game machine 1300 arranged in the hall store and the game machine status check process are realized.

<System overview>
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an outline of an information management system according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from the gaming machine 1300b, and the gaming machine ID included in the wireless signal receives the wireless signal together with door opening / closing information and operating time information. Acquired by the mobile terminal 1700. The gaming machine 1300b has the same configuration as the gaming machine 1300 described above, but here, it can be configured so that the radio signal does not include the combination ratio information or the like. Further, the radio signal may be transmitted by another radio signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module different from the BLE module 49 described above).

The mobile terminal 1700 that has received the wireless signal from the gaming machine 1300b transmits the gaming machine ID, the door opening / closing information, and the operating time information to the information management server 1100 together with the date and time information grasped by the mobile terminal 1700. When the information management server 1100 receives the gaming machine ID and the like from the mobile terminal 1700, the information management server 1100 stores the gaming machine ID and the like in the gaming machine status management table 1155. After that, the information management server 1100 refers to the gaming machine status management table 1155 at a predetermined timing, and when the number of times the door is opened / closed and the operating time satisfy the predetermined conditions, a message (for example, a message (for example)) is sent to a computer such as the hall computer 1200. A message to notify that the number of times of opening and closing is abnormal and that the operating time has exceeded a predetermined level) is sent.

Further, in the present embodiment, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in the data display device 300b connected to the game machine 1300b, and the game machine ID or the like is transmitted to the mobile terminal 1700. You may try to do it. Further, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in the sand device 1370 or another peripheral device directly or indirectly connected to the gaming machine 1300b to the mobile terminal 1700. The game machine ID and the like may be transmitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the mobile terminal 1700 transmits information such as the game machine ID to the information management server 1100, the transmission is the owner / operator of the mobile terminal 1700 (for example, the staff of the hall store or the game). It can be done in secret without being conscious or perceived by the person).

By such a game machine status transmission process, the door opening / closing information and the operating time information of the game machine 1300b are collected by the secret processing of the mobile terminal 1700. Such collection of door opening / closing information leads to the management of security information, and useful data is accumulated before an abnormality occurs. In addition, since door opening / closing information can be collected without passing through the equipment in the hall store, it can be monitored and managed by a third party, and a message is sent to the appropriate organization in the event of an abnormality. can do.

On the other hand, the collection of operating time information leads to the management of quality / maintenance information of the gaming machine 1300b. By accumulating the operating time information, it is possible to notify the possibility of failure due to aging deterioration and the need for maintenance.

Further, by such a game machine status transmission process, the user unknowingly collects the door opening / closing information and the operating time information of many game machines 1300b just by passing in front of the game machine 1300b. NS.

Here, the gaming machine ID is an identifier that can individually identify the gaming machine 1300b as a whole, as in the fifth embodiment. For example, it is possible to assign a "chip individual number" of the main CPU 101, an ID stored in advance to the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit, or the like.

The users of the mobile terminal 1700 assumed in the gaming machine status transmission process of the present embodiment include, for example, a player, a manager or staff of a hall store, a manufacturer of the gaming machine 1300b, and status management of the gaming machine 1300b. A third-party organization that does this can be considered.

<Connection form between main control circuit and BLE module>
In FIG. 82, the main control circuit 790 of the gaming machine 1300b includes a microprocessor 791 (main CPU 701) and a role ratio monitor 795, where the role ratio monitor 795 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED circuit. When the microprocessor 791 transmits the combination ratio information (output data for the 4-digit 7-segment LED) to the combination ratio monitor 795, the combination ratio monitor 795 lights the 4-digit 7-segment LED accordingly. It is designed to display the role ratio information.

A relay circuit 748 and a BLE module 794 are mounted on the board of the external centralized terminal board 747, and the microprocessor 791 sends a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal (one medal insertion and a medal payout signal) to the external centralized terminal board 747. When one pulse signal is sent for each medal payout), these signals are sent to the CPU 311 of the external data display device 300b connected to the external centralized terminal board 747 via the relay circuit 748. Provided, the CPU 311 displays game information and the like based on the received signal.

The microprocessor 791 also transmits the gaming machine ID and the combination ratio information to the BLE module 749. The BLE module 749 includes a CPU 749a, a ROM 749b, a RAM 749c, and a BLE chip 749d. When the CPU 749a receives data (game machine ID and role ratio information) from the microprocessor 791 based on the program stored in the ROM 749 b, the CPU 749a controls the BLE chip 749d to control the game machine ID and the role ratio information. Is wirelessly transmitted from the antenna of the BLE chip 749d as a BLE standard beacon signal. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip 749d can be received by a mobile terminal 1700 such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via a wireless communication network.

The main CPU 101 of the microprocessor 791 transmits the gaming machine ID and the operating time information to the sub-control circuit 200'at a predetermined timing. Here, the operating time information includes, for example, the operating time of the gaming machine 1300b measured by the timer circuit 113, and is data stored in the main RAM 103. Further, the time during which the gaming machine 1300b has been continuously operated can be measured and included in the operating time information.

When the sub CPU 201'of the sub control circuit 200' receives the gaming machine ID and the operating time information from the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201'adds the door opening / closing information and transmits the information to the BLE module 749. Here, the sub CPU 201'is, for example, a signal detected by the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 that notifies the opening / closing of the front door 2 or a 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 that detects this when the middle door 41 is opened. Based on the transmitted signal, the number of times the door is opened and closed, the date and time, and the like are stored in the sub RAM 202'as door opening / closing information.

When the CPU 749a of the BLE module 749 receives the game machine ID, the door opening / closing information, and the operating time information from the sub control circuit 200', the CPU 749a controls the BLE chip 749d based on the program stored in the ROM 749b, and the received game. The machine ID, door open / close information, and operating time information are wirelessly transmitted from the antenna of the BLE chip 749d as BLE standard beacon signals. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip 749d can be received by a mobile terminal 1700 such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via a wireless communication network.

The sub CPU 201'of the sub control circuit 200' further transmits the gaming machine ID, the door opening / closing information, and the operating time information to the BLE module 307 of the data display device 300b connected via the external centralized terminal plate 747. The BLE module 307 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, and a BLE chip, although not shown here. The CPU controls the BLE chip when it receives the gaming machine ID, the door opening / closing information, and the operating time information from the sub CPU 201'based on the program stored in the ROM, and controls the gaming machine ID, the door opening / closing information, The operating time information is wirelessly transmitted from the antenna of the BLE chip as a beacon signal. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip can be received by a mobile terminal 1700 such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via a wireless communication network.

In the example of FIG. 82, the combination ratio monitor 795 and the BLE module 749 are provided, and the combination ratio information is displayed and transmitted by these, but these configurations can be omitted. Further, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the BLE module 749 of the external centralized terminal plate 747 can be configured to transmit the gaming machine ID, the door opening / closing information, and the operating time information to the mobile terminal 1700.

Here, it merely illustrates the route by which data such as the gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operating time information are transmitted to the BLE module 749 and the BLE module 307, and various other routes and methods. It is possible to transmit the information. For example, for the BLE module 307 of the data display device 300b, data such as the game machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operating time information is provided from the game machine 1300b via the sand device 1370, the hall computer 1200, and the like. May be good.

<Table configuration used in the information management system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, a table for storing data used in the gaming machine status transmission process of the information management system 1001 will be described.

FIG. 83 shows an example of the gaming machine status management table 1155. The gaming machine status management table 1155 includes the gaming machine ID, the number of times the door is opened and closed, the operating time, and the update date and time.

<Explanation of gaming machine status transmission processing and gaming machine status check processing in the information management system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the game machine status transmission processing in the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine status transmission process executed by the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100. Further, in FIG. 84, the processing flows of the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 are shown in chronological order.

The gaming machine status transmission process can be executed, for example, by downloading an application that provides a predetermined service from a predetermined server to the mobile terminal 1700. The user uses this application in another service, and the user is not aware that this application functions for the gaming machine status transmission process described later.

First, the mobile terminal 1700 is activated by a user operation. Next, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 determines whether or not a wireless signal (for example, a beacon signal based on the BLE standard) has been received (S3091). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has not been received (NO in S3091), the reception process is repeated.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has been received (when the determination in S3091 is YES), the application for the game machine status transmission processing is started (in the background) (S3092). Further, at this time, the application that has already been started may (secretly) execute the gaming machine status transmission process.

Next, the main CPU 1701 decodes the received radio signal to acquire the UUID (S3093). Next, it is determined whether or not the main CPU 1701 is the UUID to be processed (S3094). When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is not the UUID to be processed (when the determination in S3094 is NO), it returns to S3091 and receives the radio signal. In this example, the UUID is set, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing an irrelevant radio signal or a spoofed radio signal. be able to.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is the processing target (when the determination in S3094 is YES), the gaming machine ID is acquired from the decoded radio signal (S3095).

Next, whether or not the main CPU 1701 has transmitted the data of the gaming machine ID to the information management server 1100 within a predetermined period (for example, within a period of one day, one hour, after the application is started until now). Discriminate (S3096). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the data of the gaming machine ID has been transmitted to the information management server 1100 (when the determination in S3096 is YES), it returns to S3091 and receives the wireless signal. This determination is to prevent the data of the same gaming machine ID from being transmitted to the information management server 1100 more frequently than necessary. Further, at this time, even if a session such as a wireless LAN is not established on the mobile terminal 1700, it is possible to prevent the transmission of the gaming machine ID. This is, for example, to minimize the burden for data transmission on the user's mobile terminal 1700 and to prevent the data transmission from being noticed by the user.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the data of the game machine ID has not been transmitted to the information management server 1100 (when the determination in S3096 is NO), the game machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operating time information acquired from the received signal are input. It is transmitted to the information management server 1100 (S3097). It is also possible to set the date and time information by the information management server 1100 without transmitting the date and time information here.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine ID is acquired from the decoded wireless signal in the mobile terminal 1700, if the timing condition in S3096 is cleared, the gaming machine ID, the door opening / closing information, and the operating time information are satisfied. Is configured to be transmitted to the information management server 1100, but further, when it is determined that the signal strength of the received radio signal is equal to or higher than a certain level (for example, the player plays a game on the gaming machine 1300b). Therefore, when it is determined that the level is assumed (that is, the game is played on the gaming machine 1300b), the gaming machine ID or the like is transmitted to the information management server 1100. Can be done.

When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, etc. from the mobile terminal 1700, the record of the corresponding gaming machine ID in the gaming machine status management table 1155 is updated (S3099). If there is no corresponding gaming machine ID, it is added as a new record. The date and time information is stored as the update date and time. After the processing of S3099, the main CPU 1101 ends the processing.

The main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 determines whether or not a wireless signal (for example, a beacon signal based on the BLE standard) has been received after the processing of S3097 (S3098). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has not been received (NO in S3098), the reception process is repeated. When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has been received (when the determination in S3098 is YES), the process proceeds to S3093, and the newly received wireless signal is processed.

In the gaming machine status transmission process shown in FIG. 84, no information is output (changed) to the perception providing means such as the display, the speaker, and the vibration motor regarding the reception / transmission of data such as the gaming machine ID in the mobile terminal 1700. Can be done. Further, in this example, data such as the game machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operating time information is transmitted to the information management server 1100, but other various data related to the game machine can be transmitted, and the information management server. At 1100, it is possible to form big data in which these data are accumulated.

Next, the gaming machine status check process in the information management server 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine status check process executed by the information management server 1100.

First, the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 determines whether or not a predetermined timing for checking the gaming machine status has arrived (S4011). When the main CPU 1101 determines that the predetermined timing has not arrived (when the determination in S4011 is NO), the process returns to the process in S4011 and the determination process is repeated.

Next, when the main CPU 1101 determines that the predetermined timing has arrived (when the determination in S4011 is YES), the main CPU 1101 scans each record in the gaming machine status management table 1155 (S4012). Next, the main CPU 1101 determines whether or not the processing has been completed for all the cases of the gaming machine status management table 1155 (S4013). When the main CPU 1101 determines that the processing has been completed for all the cases of the gaming machine status management table 1155 (when the determination in S4013 is YES), the process returns to the processing in S4011 and the determination processing is repeated, and the process waits until the next execution timing. ..

When the main CPU 1101 determines that the processing has not been completed for all the cases of the gaming machine status management table 1155 (when the determination in S4013 is NO), the door of the gaming machine ID of the record scanned by the gaming machine status management table 1155. It is determined whether or not the number of times of opening and closing is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S4014). When the main CPU 1101 determines that the number of times the door is opened / closed is equal to or greater than the predetermined value for the scanned gaming machine ID (when the determination in S4014 is YES), the main CPU 1101 responds to the predetermined server according to the number of times the door is opened / closed. Send a message (S4015).

For example, when the number of times the door is opened and closed exceeds the first threshold value, a message corresponding to the first threshold value is transmitted to the server corresponding to the first threshold value. Here, the server and the message can be further changed according to the gaming machine ID, the update date and time, the hall ID associated with the gaming machine ID, the maker ID, and the like.

When the number of times the door is opened and closed exceeds the second threshold value larger than the first threshold value, a message corresponding to the second threshold value is transmitted to the server corresponding to the second threshold value. Here, the server and the message can be changed in various ways as in the case of the first threshold value.

By such a process, it is possible to send a message having an appropriate content to the server of the corresponding appropriate institution according to the number of times the door is opened / closed (that is, depending on the security risk or the like).

When the main CPU 1101 determines that the number of times the door is opened / closed does not exceed a predetermined value for the scanned gaming machine ID (when the determination in S4014 is NO), or after the processing of S4015, the scanning gaming machine status management table 1155 scans. For the game machine ID of the record, it is determined whether or not the operating time is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S4016). When the main CPU 1101 determines that the operating time of the scanned gaming machine ID is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (when the determination in S4016 is YES), a corresponding message is sent to the predetermined server according to the operating time. Transmit (S4017).

For example, when the operating time exceeds the first threshold value, a message corresponding to the first threshold value is transmitted to the server corresponding to the first threshold value. Here, the server and the message can be further changed according to the gaming machine ID, the update date and time, the hall ID associated with the gaming machine ID, the maker ID, and the like.

Further, when the operating time exceeds the second threshold value larger than the first threshold value, the message corresponding to the second threshold value is transmitted to the server corresponding to the second threshold value. Here, the server and the message can be changed in various ways as in the case of the first threshold value.

By such a process, a message having an appropriate content is transmitted to the server of the corresponding appropriate institution according to the operating time of the gaming machine 1300b (that is, depending on the quality problem, the need for maintenance, etc.). be able to.

In addition, the operating time here assumes the accumulation of the operating time in the gaming machine 1300b, but captures various operating hours such as the continuous operating time in a day and the operating time during the game. Can be evaluated.

When the main CPU 1101 determines that the operating time of the scanned gaming machine ID is not equal to or greater than a predetermined value (when the determination in S4016 is NO), or after the processing in S4017, the processing in S4012 is returned, and the other record is recorded. Perform processing.

In the present embodiment, the mobile terminal 1700 receives the game machine ID, the door opening / closing information, and the operating time information from the game machine 1300b and the data display device 300b, and the information management server 1100 is basically conscious of the user. Although the configuration is realized so that the data can be transmitted without any trouble, it can be configured to receive various other data by wireless signals and secretly transmit the data to the information management server 1100.

<< 7th Embodiment >>
Next, the background technology, problems, effects, configurations, and operations of the information management system according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a game information management process for transmitting and managing game information and the like of each game machine 1300 arranged in a hall store is realized.

<Background technology and issues>
Several game systems have been proposed in which a player records the number of medals inserted during a game and the number of medals paid out as a game history using an information recording medium or a mobile phone.

For example, in the game system of the following patent document, the game information recorded by the game machine is transmitted to the server via the mobile phone, and the server stores the received game information in association with the player. At the start of recording the game information on the gaming machine and when the gaming information recorded on the gaming machine is transmitted to the server, the player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine with the mobile phone to play the game. Identify the person.
Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-50614

However, in the gaming system of the above patent document, when the recording of the gaming information on the gaming machine is started and the gaming information recorded on the gaming machine is transmitted to the server, the mobile phone is purposely pointed at the display device of the gaming machine. It is necessary to shoot a two-dimensional code, and the operation is complicated.

<Effect>
With the information management system of the present embodiment or the like, it is possible to save and display its own game information by a simple operation on a mobile terminal, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

<System overview>
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an outline of an information management system according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, when a user (player) starts a game, a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from the gaming machine 1300c, and the domain information, the gaming machine ID, and the gaming machine ID included in the wireless signal are transmitted. The total number of games played by the gaming machine 1300c is acquired by the player's mobile terminal 1700, and then the mobile terminal 1700 accesses the information management server 1100 specified by the domain information, and the storage area of the gaming information about the user is stored. Secured.

Next, when the user (player) ends the game or tries to store the game information in the middle of the game, a radio signal is transmitted from the game machine 1300c, and the domain information and the game included in the radio signal are transmitted. The machine ID, the total number of games played by the game machine 1300c, and the game information of the user are acquired by the player's mobile terminal 1700, and then the mobile terminal 1700 accesses the information management server 1100 specified by the domain information. , The game information about the user is stored in the storage area stored at the start. The game information stored in this way can be displayed by the mobile terminal 1700 referring to the storage area of the information management server 1100, and can be managed over different game machines 1300c on different days, for example. can.

The gaming machine 1300c has the same configuration as the gaming machine 1300 described above, but here, the radio signal is configured so as not to include the combination ratio information or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in the data display device 300c connected to the game machine 1300c, and the game machine ID and game information are transmitted to the mobile terminal 1700. Etc. may be transmitted. Further, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in the sand device 1370 or another peripheral device directly or indirectly connected to the gaming machine 1300c to the mobile terminal 1700. The game machine ID, game information, and the like may be transmitted.

By such game information management communication processing, the player can easily display the game result and the like on the game machine 1300c by using his / her own mobile terminal 1700, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Further, since the game information about the player is transmitted by the wireless signal, there is a risk that other players may refer to or misuse the information without permission, but the game information is transmitted to the information management server 1100. At that time, since the player is identified and the application ID associated with the application of the mobile terminal 1700 is transmitted, the use of the game information by others is effectively suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the user (player) of the mobile terminal 1700 is specified based on the application ID as described above, but in addition to the application ID, the device ID, MAC address, and telephone of the mobile terminal 1700 are specified. It is also possible to use an identifier that can uniquely identify the user or the mobile terminal 1700, such as a number and an SNS ID (the same applies to the application ID used in the following embodiments).

Here, the gaming machine ID is an identifier that can individually identify the gaming machine 1300c as a whole, as in the fifth embodiment. For example, it is possible to assign a "chip individual number" of the main CPU 101, an ID stored in advance to the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit, or the like.

The user of the mobile terminal 1700 assumed in the game information management process of the present embodiment is, for example, a player.

<Connection form between main control circuit and BLE module>
The gaming machine 1300c of the present embodiment has the same configuration as the gaming machine 1300b of the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 82.

The total number of games transmitted by the wireless signal can be grasped based on the "total number of games" shown in FIG. 28. The "total number of games" is stored in the non-standard work area in the main RAM 103, and is stored in the BLE module 749 (via the sub control circuit 200') by the microprocessor 791 (main CPU 701) of the main control circuit 790. Provided to the BLE module 307.

Further, the game information of the player is the number of games, the number of inputs, the number of payouts, the number of SBs executed, the number of CBs executed, the number of RBs executed, etc. from the start of the game, and these information are the microprocessor 791 of the main control circuit 790. The sub-control circuit 200'is transmitted from (main CPU 701), is accumulated in the sub-RAM 202'for each player, and is finally provided to the BLE module 749 and the BLE module 307.

<Table configuration used in the information management system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a table for storing data used in the game information management process of the information management system 1001 will be described.

FIG. 87 shows an example of the game information management table 1156. The game information management table 1156 includes an application ID, a total number of games, a game machine ID, a model code, a type number, game information, and an update date and time. In addition, the game information includes the number of games, the number of input, the number of payouts, the number of SB executions, the number of CB implementations, the number of RB implementations, and the like.

With the configuration of the game information management table 1156, the contents of the game played by various game machines 1300c are accumulated for the player specified by the application ID.

<Explanation of game information management processing in the information management system>
Next, the game information management process in the game machine 1300c, the mobile terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. 88 and 89 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the game information management process executed by the game machine 1300c, the mobile terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100. Further, in FIGS. 88 and 89, the processing flows of the gaming machine 1300c, the mobile terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100 are shown in chronological order.

The game information management process can be executed, for example, by downloading an application from a predetermined server to the mobile terminal 1700. Here, it is assumed that the application is started by receiving a wireless signal as a trigger in the game information management process, as will be described later. It is also possible to start the application in advance or display a message prompting the start when a wireless signal is received.

First, the user (player) performs a predetermined operation on the gaming machine (1300c) to display a menu on, for example, the sub-display device 18, and gives an instruction to "start game recording" there. As a result, the sub CPU 201'of the gaming machine 1300c starts recording the gaming content (S4031). For example, the sub CPU 201'transmits the number of games played, the number of input, the number of payouts, the number of SB executions, the number of CB executions, the number of RB executions, and the like from this point in time from the microprocessor 791 (main CPU 701) of the main control circuit 790. Based on the data, it is stored in the sub RAM 202'.

Next, the sub CPU 201'of the gaming machine 1300c transmits a radio signal including the domain information, the gaming machine ID, and the total number of games played, for example, as a BLE standard beacon signal (S4032). Here, the total number of games is the total number of games at the time when the instruction of "start of game recording" is given.

Here, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 held by the player determines whether or not the wireless signal from the game machine 1300c has been received (S4033). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has not been received (NO in S4033), the reception process is repeated.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has been received (when the determination in S4033 is YES), the application for the game information management process is started (for example, in the background) (S4034).

Next, the main CPU 1701 decodes the received radio signal to acquire the UUID (S4035). Next, it is determined whether or not the main CPU 1701 is the UUID to be processed (S4036). When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is not the UUID to be processed (when the determination in S4036 is NO), it returns to S4033 and receives the radio signal. In this example, the UUID is set, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing an irrelevant radio signal or a spoofed radio signal. be able to.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is the processing target (when the determination in S4036 is YES), the domain information, the gaming machine ID, and the total number of games are acquired from the decoded radio signal (S4037).

Next, the main CPU 1701 transmits the game machine ID acquired from the received signal and the total number of games to the information management server 1100 together with the application ID (S4038). Here, access to the information management server 1100 is performed based on the domain information acquired from the received signal. For example, the domain information includes URL information representing the address of the information management server 1100 on the Internet. Further, the application ID is an ID stored in the above-mentioned application for game information management processing, and a different ID is set for each user. In this process, the signal strength (for example, RSSI) of the received signal is evaluated, and when the signal strength is greater than a predetermined value assumed when the player holds the mobile terminal 1700 in the seated position, the signal is received. It is determined that the signal is a signal from the game machine 1300c of the player, and data is transmitted to the information management server 1100.

When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the application ID, the game machine ID, and the total number of games from the mobile terminal 1700, a record containing these data is added to the game information management table 1156 (S4039). The update date and time is set by the date and time information managed by the information management server 1100. Next, the mobile terminal 1700 is notified of the completion of updating the game information management table 1156 (S4040). After that, the main CPU 1101 ends the process.

When the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 receives the notification of the update completion of the game information management table 1156 from the information management server 1100, the main CPU 1701 displays the completion message of the game recording start process on the display 1708 (S4041).

At this point, the gaming machine 1300c is still continuing to transmit wireless signals (S4032).

Here, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 again determines whether or not the wireless signal from the gaming machine 1300c has been received (S4061). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has not been received (when the determination in S4061 is NO), the reception process is repeated.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has been received (when the determination in S4061 is YES), the main CPU 1701 decodes the received wireless signal and acquires the UUID (S4062). Next, it is determined whether or not the main CPU 1701 is the UUID to be processed (S4063). When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is not the UUID to be processed (when the determination in S4063 is NO), it returns to S4061 and receives the radio signal.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is the processing target (when the determination in S4063 is YES), the gaming machine ID is acquired from the decoded radio signal (S4064).

Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the gaming machine ID acquired from the received signal is the same as the gaming machine ID at the time of the game recording start processing (S4065). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the gaming machine IDs are different (when the determination in S4065 is NO), it returns to S4061 and receives the radio signal.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the gaming machine IDs are the same (when the determination in S4065 is YES), the main CPU 1701 acquires the signal strength of the received wireless signal (for example, RSSI of the beacon signal) and transmits it to the information management server 1100. (S4067).

Next, when the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the signal strength from the mobile terminal 1700, it determines whether or not the user is away from the desk, that is, the signal strength received from the mobile terminal 1700 is equal to or less than a predetermined value (that is,). , The mobile terminal 1700 is separated from the game machine 1300c by a certain distance or more) (S4068).

When the main CPU 1101 determines that the seat is not absent (NO in S4068), the main CPU 1101 ends the process. When the main CPU 1101 determines that the seat is away (when the determination in S4068 is YES), the main CPU 1101 transmits a notification that the seat is away to the mobile terminal 1700 (S4069). After that, the main CPU 1101 ends the process.

When the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 receives the notification from the information management server 1100 that the user is away from the desk, the main CPU 1701 displays a message indicating that the user is away from the desk on the display 1708 (S4070). After that, the main CPU 1701 ends the process.

In the gaming machine 1300c, the sub CPU 201'determines whether or not there is an end operation (S4071). When the sub CPU 201'determines that there is no end operation (when the determination in S4071 is NO), the sub CPU 201'returns to S4071 and waits for the end operation. When the sub CPU 201'determines that there is an end operation (when the determination in S4071 is YES), the menu display is terminated and the process is terminated.

In response to such an instruction of the player to "start game recording", a storage area for storing the player's game information is provided in the game information management table 1156 of the information management server 1100 by using the player's mobile terminal 1700. Secured.

Further, such a storage area is managed for each gaming machine ID, but a player who later gives an instruction to "start game recording" so that game information cannot be accumulated for the same gaming machine ID at the same time. Requests are controlled to be rejected. In addition, if a predetermined time elapses without instructions for "acquisition of progress" or "end of game recording" after determining leaving the seat, the corresponding storage area is deleted.

Further, here, the information management server 1100 determines whether or not the user is away from the desk, but the mobile terminal 1700 may determine this and transmit the determination result to the information management server 1100. Whether or not the player is seated (not absent) is determined by, for example, the signal strength of the radio signal received from the gaming machine 1300c is at a predetermined level (for example, closer to proximity, "almost contact"). In that case, it can be determined that the person is seated. In addition to the signal strength, the seating may be determined by using the image captured by the camera or the image determination result. The camera, in this example, is equipped with a sand device 1370 connected to the gaming machine 1300c (camera 1335). The image determination result or the like may be transmitted from the gaming machine 1300c to the mobile terminal 1700 (for example, by a wireless signal from the BLE module).

Furthermore, regarding the signal strength of the received radio signal, when the above-mentioned "almost contact" level continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that the player is seated, and at that time, the game machine ID of the game machine 1300c is associated with the application ID. It may be stored in the game information management table 1156 of the information management server 1100. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the passing player's application from easily storing the record in the game information management table 1156 of the information management server 1100.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the game information management process in the game machine 1300c, the mobile terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100 will be further described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the game information management process executed by the game machine 1300c, the mobile terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100. Further, in FIG. 90, the processing flows of the gaming machine 1300c, the mobile terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100 are shown in chronological order.

The game information management process can be executed, for example, by downloading an application from a predetermined server to the mobile terminal 1700. Here, it is assumed that the application is started by receiving a wireless signal as a trigger in the game information management process, as will be described later. It is also possible to start the application in advance or display a message prompting the start when a wireless signal is received.

First, the user (player) performs a predetermined operation on the gaming machine (1300c) to display a menu on, for example, the sub-display device 18, and gives an instruction of "end of game recording" there. As a result, the sub CPU 201'of the gaming machine 1300c tries to store the game content in the information management server 1100 (S4091). For example, the sub CPU 201'determines the number of games, the number of input, the number of payouts, the number of SB executions, the number of CB executions, the number of RB executions, and the like from the time when the instruction of "start of game recording" is given to the microprocessor of the main control circuit 790. Based on the data transmitted from the 791 (main CPU 701), it is stored in the sub RAM 202', and here, the storage result is transmitted to the mobile terminal 1700.

Next, the sub CPU 201'of the gaming machine 1300c transmits a wireless signal including domain information, a gaming machine ID, the total number of games played, and game information including the number of games and the number of inserted machines, for example, as a BLE standard beacon signal ( S4092). Here, the total number of games is the total number of games at the time when the instruction of "start of game recording" is given.

Here, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 held by the player determines whether or not the radio signal from the game machine 1300c has been received (S4093). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has not been received (when the determination in S4093 is NO), the reception process is repeated.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has been received (when the determination in S4093 is YES), the application for the game information management process is started (for example, in the background) (S4094).

Next, the main CPU 1701 decodes the received radio signal to acquire the UUID (S4095). Next, it is determined whether or not the main CPU 1701 is the UUID to be processed (S4096). When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is not the UUID to be processed (when the determination in S4096 is NO), it returns to S4093 and receives the radio signal. In this example, the UUID is set, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing an irrelevant radio signal or a spoofed radio signal. be able to.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is the processing target (when the determination in S4096 is YES), the domain information, the gaming machine ID, the total number of games played, and the gaming information are acquired from the decoded wireless signal (S4097). ..

Next, the main CPU 1701 transmits the game machine ID, the total number of games, and the game information acquired from the received signal to the information management server 1100 together with the application ID (S4098). Here, access to the information management server 1100 is performed based on the domain information acquired from the received signal. For example, the domain information includes URL information representing the address of the information management server 1100 on the Internet. Further, the application ID is an ID stored in the above-mentioned application for game information management processing, and a different ID is set for each user.

When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the application ID, the game machine ID, the total number of games, and the game information from the mobile terminal 1700, there is a record in the game information management table 1156 in which the application ID and the game machine ID match. Whether or not to do so is determined (S4099). When the main CPU 1101 determines that there is no record in which the application ID and the game machine ID match (when the determination in S4099 is NO), the main CPU 1101 controls the mobile terminal 1700 to notify a processing error (S4100), and receives this notification. The main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 displays an error message on the display 1708 to the effect that the game recording end instruction has been given while the game recording start has not been instructed (S4101).

When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 determines that there is a record in which the application ID and the game machine ID match (when the determination in S4099 is YES), a record including the received game information is added to the game information management table 1156. (S4102). The update date and time is set by the date and time information managed by the information management server 1100. By adding a new record without updating the item of the existing record in this way, the player can check the history of his / her own game.

Next, the main CPU 1101 acquires a record in which the same application ID is stored from the game information management table 1156, edits the game information display data, and transmits it to the mobile terminal 1700 (S4103). After that, the main CPU 1101 ends the process. In this example, when the instruction of "end of game recording" is given, the game information of the player is displayed together with the recording of the game information. However, the display of the game information is separately displayed on the mobile terminal 1700. You can also request from and display it.

When the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 receives the game information display data from the information management server 1100, it displays a completion message of the game record end processing (S4104), and then, based on the game information display data, the mobile terminal 1700 The game information display screen is displayed on the display 1708 of the above (S4105). After that, the main CPU 1701 ends the process.

In the game machine 1300c, the sub CPU 201'determines whether or not there is an end operation (S4106). When the sub CPU 201'determines that there is no end operation (when the determination in S4106 is NO), it returns to S4106 and waits for the end operation. When the sub CPU 201'determines that there is an end operation (when the determination in S4106 is YES), the menu display is terminated and the process is terminated.

Here, the process corresponding to the instruction of "end of game record" has been described, but the case where the instruction of "acquisition of progress" is instructed will be omitted. Similarly, when the instruction of "acquisition of progress" is given, a new record is stored in the game information management table 1156 of the information management server 1100. Therefore, the game information at this point can be displayed later.

<< Eighth Embodiment >>
Next, the background technology, problems, effects, configurations, and operations of the information management system according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a privilege management process for transmitting and managing the game machine ID and the like of each game machine 1300 arranged in the hall store is realized.

<Background technology and issues>
In the conventional gaming machine, when the gaming state of the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the player can perform a predetermined operation of the gaming machine, and when the operation satisfies a certain condition, some privilege is given. There is.

In the following patent documents, when the player is in a general gaming state, the difference number counter is 2000 or more, and the navigation point counter is 10 or less, a predictive combination can be selected, and this predictive combination is an internal winning combination. If matches, navigation points will be added. Then, when the difference number counter is 2000 or more and the navigation point counter is larger than 10, the internal winning combination is notified as a privilege to the player. By giving such a privilege, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.
Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-5086

However, the privilege of the gaming machine in the above patent document is provided as a function of the gaming machine, and is not provided by all the gaming machines. Therefore, the possibility of obtaining such a privilege is already known at the time when the player selects the gaming machine, and is not given according to the gaming machine to be played.

<Effect>
With the information management system of the present embodiment, it is possible to attract customers and create topics (within a range that does not correspond to the act of inciting gambling) by providing benefits by an entity other than the hall store or the manufacturer of the gaming machine. In addition, since the player is determined not by the game but by the selection of the gaming machine whether or not the privilege can be obtained, the interest of the player can be further improved.

Further, in the hall store, it is possible to determine the number of game machines and game machines to which the privilege based on the value provided by other than the hall store and the manufacturer of the game machine is given.

<System overview>
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an outline of an information management system according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from the gaming machine 1300d, and the domain information included in the wireless signal, the gaming machine ID, and the total number of games played by the gaming machine 1300d are calculated by the player. The privilege management table 1157 indicates that the mobile terminal 1700 has accessed the information management server 1100 specified by the domain information and the user has played a game on the corresponding gaming machine 1300d. It will be remembered. After that, the information management server 1100 determines the gaming machine 1300d to which the privilege is given, identifies the player who played the game with the gaming machine 1300d from the privilege management table 1157, and gives the player some points, gifts, or the like. Grant benefits.

The gaming machine 1300d has the same configuration as the gaming machine 1300 described above, but here, the radio signal is configured so as not to include the combination ratio information or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in the data display device 300d connected to the game machine 1300d, and the mobile terminal 1700 has the game machine ID and the total game. The number of times and the like may be transmitted. Further, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in the sand device 1370 or another peripheral device directly or indirectly connected to the gaming machine 1300d to the mobile terminal 1700. The game machine ID, the total number of games, and the like may be transmitted.

Due to such privilege management communication processing, there is a possibility of receiving a privilege by playing a game on the gaming machine 1300d, which further raises the interest in the game. Further, in order to receive the privilege, it is almost unnecessary to operate the gaming machine 1300d, the mobile terminal 1700, or the like, and the burden on the player is extremely small. Furthermore, with such a mechanism, benefits can be given by an entity other than the hall store or the manufacturer of the gaming machine, which is effective in attracting customers and creating topics.

The user of the mobile terminal 1700 assumed in the privilege management process of the present embodiment is, for example, a player.

<Connection form between main control circuit and BLE module>
The gaming machine 1300d of the present embodiment has the same configuration as the gaming machine 1300b of the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 82.

The total number of games transmitted by the wireless signal can be grasped based on the "total number of games" shown in FIG. 28. The "total number of games" is stored in the non-standard work area in the main RAM 103, and is stored in the BLE module 749 (via the sub control circuit 200') by the microprocessor 791 (main CPU 701) of the main control circuit 790. Provided to the BLE module 307. For the BLE module 307 of the data display device 300c, data such as domain information, game machine ID, total number of games played, and game information are provided from the game machine 1300c via the sand device 1370, the hall computer 1200, and the like. May be done.

<Table configuration used in the information management system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a table for storing data used in the privilege management process of the information management system 1001 will be described.

FIG. 92 shows an example of the privilege management table 1157. The privilege management table 1157 includes an application ID, a total number of games played, a game machine ID, a game start flag, and an update date and time. As the game start flag, "1" is stored when the game is actually started on the game machine 1300d. The privilege is for players whose game start flag is "1".

<Explanation of privilege management processing in the information management system>
Next, the privilege management process in the gaming machine 1300d, the mobile terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. 93 and 94 are flowcharts showing a procedure of privilege management processing executed by the gaming machine 1300d, the mobile terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100. Further, in FIGS. 93 and 94, the processing flows of the gaming machine 1300d, the mobile terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100 are shown in chronological order.

The privilege management process can be executed, for example, by downloading the application from a predetermined server to the mobile terminal 1700. Here, it is assumed that the application is started by receiving a wireless signal as a trigger in the privilege management process, as will be described later. It is also possible to start the application in advance or display a message prompting the start when a wireless signal is received.

First, the user (player) performs a predetermined operation on the gaming machine (1300d) to display, for example, a menu on the sub display device 18, and gives an instruction of "selection of privilege chance" there. As a result, the sub CPU 201'of the gaming machine 1300d starts recording the total number of games played for the player (S4121). The total number of games is stored in the sub RAM 202'based on, for example, the data of the total number of games transmitted from the microprocessor 791 (main CPU 701) of the main control circuit 790.

Next, the sub CPU 201'of the gaming machine 1300d transmits a radio signal including the domain information, the gaming machine ID, and the total number of games played, for example, as a BLE standard beacon signal (S4122). Here, as described above, the total number of games is the number of games played by the player after the instruction of "selection of privilege chance" is given. At this point, the total number of games has not been played yet. Is 0.

Next, the sub CPU 201'of the gaming machine 1300d determines whether or not the gaming has started (S4123). When the sub CPU 201'determines that the game has not started (when the determination in S4123 is NO), the process returns to the process in S4123 and the determination process is repeated. When the sub CPU 201'determines that the game has started (when the determination in S4123 is YES), the process proceeds to the process of S4133, where the process of transmitting the beacon after the game is performed.

Next, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 held by the player determines whether or not the radio signal from the game machine 1300d has been received (S4124). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has not been received (NO in S4124), the reception process is repeated.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has been received (when the determination in S4124 is YES), the application for privilege management processing is started (for example, in the background) (S4125).

Next, the main CPU 1701 decodes the received radio signal to acquire the UUID (S4126). Next, it is determined whether or not the main CPU 1701 is the UUID to be processed (S4127). When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is not the UUID to be processed (when the determination in S4127 is NO), it returns to S4124 and receives the radio signal. In this example, the UUID is set, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing an irrelevant radio signal or a spoofed radio signal. be able to.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is the UUID to be processed (when the determination in S4127 is YES), the domain information, the gaming machine ID, and the total number of games are acquired from the decoded radio signal (S4128).

Next, the main CPU 1701 transmits the game machine ID acquired from the received signal and the total number of games to the information management server 1100 together with the application ID (S4129). Here, access to the information management server 1100 is performed based on the domain information acquired from the received signal. For example, the domain information includes URL information representing the address of the information management server 1100 on the Internet. Further, the application ID is an ID stored in the above-mentioned application for privilege management processing, and a different ID is set for each user. In this process, the signal strength (for example, RSSI) of the received signal is evaluated, and when the signal strength is greater than a predetermined value assumed when the player holds the mobile terminal 1700 in the seated position, the signal is received. It is determined that the signal is a signal from the game machine 1300d of the player, and data is transmitted to the information management server 1100.

When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the application ID, the gaming machine ID, and the total number of games played from the mobile terminal 1700, a record including these data is added to the privilege management table 1157 (S4130). The update date and time is set by the date and time information managed by the information management server 1100. Also, here, the game start flag is set to 0. Next, the mobile terminal 1700 is notified of the completion of updating the privilege management table 1157 (S4131). After that, the main CPU 1101 ends the process.

When the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 receives the notification of the update completion of the privilege management table 1157 from the information management server 1100, the privilege chance participation message 1 (for example, a message such as "When you start the game, you can participate in the privilege chance!" ) Is displayed on the display 1708 (S4132).

At this point, the gaming machine 1300d continues to transmit the radio signal including the total number of games (S4133), and when the player starts the game, the total number of games included in the radio signal is added to the total number of games. A value of 1 or more is set.

Here, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 again determines whether or not the wireless signal from the gaming machine 1300c has been received (S4134). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has not been received (when the determination in S4134 is NO), the reception process is repeated.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has been received (when the determination in S4134 is YES), the main CPU 1701 decodes the received wireless signal and acquires the UUID (S4135). Next, it is determined whether or not the main CPU 1701 is the UUID to be processed (S4136). When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is not the UUID to be processed (when the determination in S4136 is NO), it returns to S4134 and receives the radio signal.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is the processing target (when the determination in S4136 is YES), the gaming machine ID is acquired from the decoded wireless signal (S4137).

Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the gaming machine ID acquired from the received signal is the same as the gaming machine ID at the time of selecting the privilege chance (S4138). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the gaming machine IDs are different (when the determination in S4138 is NO), it returns to S4134 and receives the radio signal.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the gaming machine IDs are the same (when the determination in S4138 is YES), the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the transmission timing is predetermined (S4139). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the transmission timing is not the predetermined one (when the determination in S4139 is NO), the main CPU 1701 returns to S4134 and receives the radio signal. When the main CPU 1701 determines that the transmission timing is predetermined (when the determination in S4139 is YES), the signal strength of the received wireless signal (for example, RSSI of the beacon signal) is acquired, and the signal strength is determined by the gaming machine ID. , The application ID, and the total number of games are transmitted to the information management server 1100 (S4140).

Next, when the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the signal strength from the mobile terminal 1700, it determines whether or not the user is away from the desk, that is, the signal strength received from the mobile terminal 1700 is equal to or less than a predetermined value (that is,). , The mobile terminal 1700 is separated from the game machine 1300c by a certain distance or more) (S4141).

When the main CPU 1101 determines that he / she is away from his / her seat (when the determination in S4141 is YES), the main CPU 1101 ends the process. When the main CPU 1101 determines that the player is not away (when the determination in S4141 is NO), the main CPU 1101 is the total number of games of the record (the record in which the game machine ID and the application ID match) stored in the privilege management table 1157. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the total number of games received is a large value (S4142).

When the main CPU 1101 determines that the total number of games of the record stored in the privilege management table 1157 and the total number of games received are the same value, that is, the game has not been started (when the determination in S4142 is NO). , The main CPU 1101 ends the process. When the main CPU 1101 determines that the total number of games received is larger than the total number of games stored in the privilege management table 1157 (when the determination in S4142 is YES), the target record in the privilege management table 1157. On the other hand, the total number of games is updated to the total number of games received, and the game start flag is set to 1 (S4143). After that, the main CPU 1101 ends the process.

When the information management server 1100 finishes the update process of the privilege management table 1157, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 displays the privilege chance participation message 2 (for example, a message such as "I participated in the privilege chance!") On the display 1708. (S4144). After that, the main CPU 1701 ends the process.

In the gaming machine 1300d, the sub CPU 201'determines whether or not there is an end operation (S4145). When the sub CPU 201'determines that there is no end operation (when the determination in S4145 is NO), it returns to S4145 and waits for the end operation. When the sub CPU 201'determines that there is an end operation (when the determination in S4145 is YES), the menu display is terminated and the process is terminated.

By the processing shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, among the players who have selected the privilege chance, the player who actually played the game is a candidate for receiving the privilege. The information management server 1100 determines the gaming machine ID of the gaming machine to which the privilege is given by lottery or the like at a predetermined timing such as once a day. When the game machine ID is determined, the information management server 1100 scans the privilege management table 1157 and checks whether or not there is a record in which the game start flag is 1 with respect to the corresponding game machine ID.

Here, if there is a record in which the game start flag is 1, the player is given benefits such as points and gifts. For example, in the point management table (not shown), the number of points is stored in association with the application ID that identifies the user of the mobile terminal 1700. Further, a plurality of players may play a game with respect to the game machine 1300d having the same game machine ID. In that case, 1 (or, for example, the number of games, the game time, etc.) Multiple) players are determined. The privilege may be given to all the players who have played with the game machine 1300d having the game machine ID.

To the player who is determined to grant the privilege, the application ID is used to send a message to the effect that the privilege has been granted to the application that performs the privilege management process of the player's mobile terminal 1700. In the present embodiment, as benefits, for example, points for purchasing products and services in an application that performs privilege management processing, gifts, and the like are given.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1300d to which the privilege is given is determined, but even if the record in which the game start flag is 1 is extracted from the records stored in the privilege management table 1157 by lottery or the like. good. Various other methods and criteria can be used to determine the target for which benefits are granted.

All the records stored in the privilege management table 1157 are basically deleted when the information management server 1100 performs the above privilege granting process, but in order to make it the target of the next privilege granting, It is also possible to leave some or all of it.

Further, here, the information management server 1100 determines whether or not the user is away from the desk, but the mobile terminal 1700 may determine this and transmit the determination result to the information management server 1100. Whether or not the player is seated (not absent) is determined by, for example, the signal strength of the radio signal received from the gaming machine 1300d being at a predetermined level (for example, closer to proximity, "almost contact"). In that case, it can be determined that the person is seated. In addition to the signal strength, the seating may be determined by using the image captured by the camera or the image determination result. The camera, in this example, is equipped with a sand device 1370 connected to the gaming machine 1300d (camera 1335). The image determination result or the like may be transmitted from the gaming machine 1300d to the mobile terminal 1700 (for example, by a wireless signal from the BLE module).

Furthermore, regarding the signal strength of the received radio signal, when the above-mentioned "almost contact" level continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that the player is seated, and at that time, the game machine ID of the game machine 1300d is associated with the application ID. It may be stored in the privilege management table 1157 of the information management server 1100. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the passing player's application from easily storing the record in the privilege management table 1157 of the information management server 1100.

In this way, the "privilege" given to the player can be set according to, for example, the "value" provided by a sales entity other than the hall store or the game machine maker. In addition, the game machine ID of the game machine to which the privilege is given, and which player is given a score when a plurality of players play with one game machine can be specified at the hall store. The store manager or the like can, for example, operate the hall management terminal 1600 connected to the information management server 1100 to make these designations.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the player has played the game on the gaming machine 1300d by grasping the increase in the total number of games played. When the signal strength was maintained at a level equal to or higher than a predetermined value for a predetermined period (a state of being close to or closer to the gaming machine), the player was seated in front of the gaming machine 1300d and played the game. It may be presumed to be.

<< 9th Embodiment >>
Next, the background technology, problems, effects, configurations, and operations of the information management system according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, an AR display management process for transmitting and managing the game machine ID and the like of each game machine 1300 arranged in the hall store is realized.

<Background technology and issues>
In recent years, applications that use AR (Augmented Reality) technology to add different information (display) to images captured by cameras (real images) and extend the real images have been used in various fields. Has been done. Proposals have also been made to create production screens and the like by applying such AR technology in gaming machines as well.

For example, in the following patent document, an image of a player's hand (actual image) taken by a camera and an animation image for production stored by the game machine are combined and displayed as an effect image on a display device.
Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-172418

However, the pachinko / pachislot machines of the above patent document use the camera of the pachinko / pachislot machine to diversify the production screen displayed during the game, and the visitors of the hall store can use the passage for selecting / moving the pachinko / pachislot machine. No information can be provided to the player while moving.

<Effect>
By the information management system or the like of the present embodiment, information on the gaming machine or the like is notified by AR on the mobile terminal while moving in the hall store, and the user's interest is improved (excitement and surprise are provided to the user). NS).

<System overview>
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an outline of an information management system according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from the gaming machine 1300e, and when it is determined that the gaming machine 1300e and the mobile terminal 1700 have approached a predetermined distance, the wireless signal from the gaming machine 1300e is used. The included gaming machine ID is transmitted to the player's mobile terminal 1700, and then the mobile terminal 1700 transmits the gaming machine ID to the information management server 1100.

When the information management server 1100 receives the gaming machine ID, it refers to the AR display management table 1158, acquires the display mark corresponding to the gaming machine 1300d of the gaming machine ID and its display mode, and displays the data on the mobile terminal 1700. To send. When the mobile terminal 1700 receives such information, when displaying the camera image on the display, the display mark overlaps with the camera image and is displayed according to the display mode.

The gaming machine 1300e has the same configuration as the gaming machine 1300 described above, but here, the radio signal is configured so as not to include the combination ratio information or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in the data display device 300e connected to the game machine 1300e, and the game machine ID is transmitted to the mobile terminal 1700. You may do so. Further, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in the sand device 1370 or another peripheral device directly or indirectly connected to the gaming machine 1300e to the mobile terminal 1700. The game machine ID may be transmitted.

By such AR display management processing, when the camera of the mobile terminal 1700 moves in the hall store while shooting and the camera image is displayed on the display, the display marks are displayed in an overlapping manner. It creates more interest in hall stores and games. In addition, when the display mark or voice suggests an ambiguous recommended table, it can give the visitor the pleasure of searching for and predicting the recommended table from limited information.

Furthermore, when a sudden event or campaign is announced by a display mark or voice, it can be a production that gives visitors a feeling of further excitement and excitement, which can be a great motivation for visiting the hall store.

The user of the mobile terminal 1700 assumed in the AR display management process of the present embodiment is, for example, a player or a visitor to a hall store.

<Connection form between main control circuit and BLE module>
The gaming machine 1300e of the present embodiment has the same configuration as the gaming machine 1300b of the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 82.

<Table configuration used in the information management system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a table for storing data used in the AR display management process of the information management system 1001 will be described.

FIG. 96 shows an example of the AR display management table 1158. The AR display management table 1158 includes a gaming machine ID, an estimated distance, a display mark, and a display mode. The display position, behavior, blinking, etc. are stored in the display mode. The display mark represents an object to be displayed on the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700. For example, in the case of "A", an object (text, image, animation image, video, etc.) corresponding to "A" is shown. The display position defines the position, arrangement pattern, and behavior of displaying the display mark on the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700. The time indicates the display time of the display mark on the display 1708. The blinking defines whether or not the display mark is blinking on the display 1708.

<Explanation of AR display management processing in the information management system>
Next, the AR display management process in the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a procedure of AR display management processing executed by the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100. Further, in FIG. 97, the processing flows of the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 are shown in chronological order. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of an AR display screen (camera image display screen) displayed on the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700.

The AR display management process can be executed, for example, by downloading the application from a predetermined server to the mobile terminal 1700.

First, the user operates the mobile terminal 1700 to start an application that executes an AR display management process. When an application that executes the AR display management process is started, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 activates the built-in camera 1704 under the control of the application (S4161). Next, the main CPU 1701 displays the image captured by the camera 1704 on the display 1708 as a camera image display screen as shown in FIG. 98, which will be described later (S4162).

Next, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 determines whether or not the wireless signal from the gaming machine 1300e has been received (S4163). In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1300e always transmits a wireless signal including the gaming machine ID at a predetermined timing (for example, an advertisement interval). Therefore, the description of the operation of the gaming machine 1300e is described. Omit.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has not been received (NO in S4163), the reception process is repeated.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has been received (when the determination in S4163 is YES), the main CPU 1701 decodes the received wireless signal and acquires the UUID (S4164). Next, it is determined whether or not the main CPU 1701 is the UUID to be processed (S4165). When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is not the UUID to be processed (when the determination in S4165 is NO), it returns to S4163 and receives the radio signal. In this example, the UUID is set, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing an irrelevant radio signal or a spoofed radio signal. be able to.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is the processing target (when the determination in S4165 is YES), the distance between the mobile terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300e is determined based on the signal strength (RSSI) of the decoded wireless signal. It is estimated and it is determined whether or not the distance is equal to or less than a predetermined value (S4166). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the estimated distance is not equal to or less than a predetermined value (when the determination in S4166 is NO), it returns to S4163 and receives the radio signal.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the estimated distance is equal to or less than a predetermined value (when the determination in S4166 is YES), the information management server 1100 determines the game machine ID of the decoded wireless signal and the estimated distance obtained in the above process. (S4167). Here, the application that executes the AR display management process stores the address of the information management server 1100 and accesses the address, but the gaming machines 1300c and the eighth of the seventh embodiment are accessed. Like the gaming machine 1300d of the embodiment, the wireless signal may include domain information, and the information management server 1100 may be accessed based on the domain information. Further, the main CPU 1701 can transmit the above-mentioned gaming machine ID and the estimated distance at predetermined intervals (for example, every few seconds or every few minutes).

When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the gaming machine ID and the estimated distance from the mobile terminal 1700, it refers to the AR display management table 1158 and determines the displayable display mark and its display mode (S4168). For example, first, it is determined whether or not the AR display management table 1158 has the same record as the received game machine ID, and then the estimated distance stored in the AR display management table 1158 corresponding to the game ID is determined. Determines if is greater than the received estimated distance. When these conditions are satisfied, the display mark and the display mode stored in the record of the AR display management table 1158 are determined as data to be transmitted.

By the process referring to the AR display management table 1158, the standard for displaying the display mark when the mobile terminal 1700 approaches the gaming machine 1300e differs for each gaming machine 1300e. Further, the display mark and the display mode are set to be different for each gaming machine 1300e.

Next, the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 transmits the determined display mark and data indicating the display mode to the mobile terminal 1700 (S4169).

When the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 receives the display mark and the data indicating the display mode from the information management server 1100, the main CPU 1701 edits the display mark so as to overlap and display the display mark on the camera image based on the received display mode. S4170). After that, the main CPU 1701 displays the edited image on the display 1708 as a camera image display screen (see FIG. 98) (S4171).

Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not there has been a termination operation (S4172). When the main CPU 1701 determines that there is no termination operation (when the determination in S4172 is NO), it returns to S4163 and receives the beacon signal. When the main CPU 1701 determines that there is an end operation (when the determination in S4172 is YES), the display of the camera image display screen is terminated and the process is terminated.

Display marks that overlap the camera image include text, images, animation images, video, etc., but instead of these visible objects (or with these objects), voice, by control over the mobile terminal 1700, It is also possible to make the mobile terminal 1700 perform various operations such as music, vibration, and lighting / blinking of lights. The mobile terminal 1700 includes, for example, a vibration motor (not shown), and by driving the vibration motor, the mobile terminal 1700 can be controlled to vibrate. Further, the mobile terminal 1700 includes, for example, an LED light (not shown) that can function as a flash of a camera or the like, and the LED light can be controlled to light or blink.

The camera image display screen 3101 shown in FIG. 98 includes a video display unit 3102 for displaying a video captured by the camera 1704 of the mobile terminal 1700 by the user. In this example, the video display unit 3102 displays the gaming machine 1300e or the like photographed by the user, and further displays the image 3103 displayed as “recommended stand”.

The image 3103 displayed in this way is displayed as a result of the gaming machine ID of the gaming machine 1300e being transmitted to the information management server 1100 via the mobile terminal 1700 as described above. For example, since it is set to the upper center of the screen, it is not known which gaming machine 1300e is actually the recommended platform. After that, when the mobile terminal 1700 is moved, the distance from the target gaming machine 1300e (which the user does not know) is increased, so that the display of the image 3103 ends. A predetermined waiting time may be provided at the display start timing and the display end timing of the image 3103.

Further, it is also possible to perform image recognition processing on the camera image, grasp the position and direction of the gaming machine 1300e and the like, and then control to output the display mark and the like to the mobile terminal 1700.

<< 10th Embodiment >>
Next, the background technology, problems, effects, configurations, and operations of the information management system according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, the notification information management process is realized in which the wireless signal transmitting device 1800 arranged in the hall store transmits the notification ID, receives it by the mobile terminal 1700, and acquires the notification information corresponding to the notification ID. NS.

<Background technology and issues>
A conventional gaming system has a mechanism for giving a predetermined privilege to a player so as to reduce the degree of disadvantage to the player even when the game is played over a plurality of gaming machines. be.

For example, in the game system described in the following patent document, after a card unit such as a game machine receives a recording medium, the number of times a predetermined game is executed is counted based on a predetermined condition, and the counted number of times the game is executed is counted. When the specified number of times is reached, a screen for selecting a privilege to be given to the player is displayed on the display device of the card unit.
Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-158309

However, no system has been proposed so far that provides information that is advantageous to a person entering a hall store or a person in the vicinity, regardless of the situation of the game in the gaming machine.

<Effect>
With the information management system or the like of the present embodiment, it is possible to actively solicit passing users located within a predetermined range, and it is possible to announce the contents according to the attributes of the users. In addition, the information to be provided can be distinguished according to the movement direction of the user (for example, entering or leaving the store).

<System overview>
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an outline of the information management system according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, when a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from the wireless signal transmitting device 1800 and it is determined that the wireless signal transmitting device 1800 and the mobile terminal 1700 have approached a predetermined distance, the wireless signal transmitting device is used. The notification ID included in the wireless signal from the 1800 is transmitted to the player's mobile terminal 1700, and then the mobile terminal 1700 transmits the notification ID to the information management server 1100.

When the information management server 1100 receives the notification ID, it refers to the notification information management table 1159, acquires the notification information corresponding to the notification ID, and transmits the notification information to the mobile terminal 1700. When the mobile terminal 1700 receives the notification information, the mobile terminal 1700 displays the notification information on the display (for example, push display).

The wireless signal transmitting device 1800 (not shown) includes a circuit having the same configuration as the BLE module 49 mounted on the external centralized terminal plate 47 of the game machine 1300 described above. A radio signal including a predetermined notification ID is always transmitted at a predetermined timing (for example, an advertisement interval). The wireless signal transmitting device 1800 does not have to be a single device, and can be configured to be incorporated in another device.

By such notification information management processing, it is possible to positively solicit users passing by passing near the hall store, and it is possible to make effective notifications according to the attributes of the users. In this case, the radio signal transmitting device 1800 is a device that is arranged at the entrance / exit of a hall store and is capable of widespread propagation of radio signals (for example, a device including a BLE module having a Class 1 or Class 2 BLE chip).

In addition, it can be configured to provide effective notifications such as recommended information to adults only for those who enter the hall store. In this case, the wireless signal transmitting device 1800 is a device that is arranged at the entrance / exit of the hall store and transmits a wireless signal in a relatively narrow range (for example, a device including a BLE module having a BLE chip of Class 3).

The user of the mobile terminal 1700 assumed in the notification information management process of the present embodiment is, for example, a player or a visitor to the hall store.

<Arrangement of wireless signal transmitter>
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, an arrangement form of the wireless signal transmitting device 1800 in the hall store will be described. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an arrangement example of the wireless signal transmitting device 1800 in the hall store.

FIG. 100A shows an example in which one wireless signal transmitting device 1800 is arranged near the front entrance / exit 2011a in the layout of the hall store shown in FIG. 64. The radio signal transmitting device 1800 is arranged, for example, above the automatic door installed at the front doorway 2011a.

Further, this wireless signal transmitting device 1800 is a device capable of transmitting a wireless signal over a relatively wide range with high output. For example, a BLE module having a BLE chip having a Class 2 (radio wave reachable range (standard value) of a maximum of 10 m) I have.

Since the wireless signal transmitting device 1800 has such a wide propagation range, for example, a predetermined message is transmitted and displayed to the mobile terminal 1700 of a passerby 2003 walking on the road in front of the hall store. can do.

FIG. 100B shows an example in which two wireless signal transmitting devices 1800 are arranged in the vicinity of the front entrance / exit 2011a in the layout of the hall store shown in FIG. 64. The wireless signal transmitting devices 1800a and 1800b are arranged above the aisle guides 2011-1 and 2011-2, which extend from both ends of the automatic doors installed at the front entrance / exit 2011a to the inside of the hall store, respectively.

Further, these wireless signal transmitting devices 1800 are devices that transmit wireless signals with low output, and include, for example, a BLE module having a BLE chip having a Class 3 (radio wave reachable range (standard value) of a maximum of 1 m).

In order for the two radio signal transmitting devices 1800 to transmit the notification ID in such a relatively narrow range, for example, they are close to or pass through the automatic door installed at the front entrance / exit 2011a of the hall store. A predetermined message can be transmitted and displayed only to the mobile terminal 1700 of the store entrant 2004.

<Table configuration used in the information management system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a table for storing data used in the notification information management process of the information management system 1001 will be described.

FIG. 101 shows an example of the notification information management table 1159. The notification information management table 1159 includes a notification ID, notification conditions, and notification information. A plurality of wireless signal transmitting devices 1800 can be arranged, and corresponding notification IDs are set according to each device. The notification condition is the number of points held by the user in this example. Here, the notification information stores a pattern identification symbol. For example, in the case of "A", the notification information is an object (text, image, animation image, video, etc.) corresponding to "A".

<Explanation of notification information management process in the information management system>
Next, the notification information management process in the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing a procedure of notification information management processing executed by the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100. Further, in FIG. 102, the processing flows of the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 are shown in chronological order.

The notification information management process can be executed, for example, by downloading the application from a predetermined server to the mobile terminal 1700. Here, it is assumed that the application is started by receiving a wireless signal as a trigger in the notification information management process, as will be described later. It is also possible to start the application in advance or display a message prompting the start when a wireless signal is received. It can also be configured to send notification information only when the application is running.

First, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 held by the user determines whether or not the wireless signal from the wireless signal transmitting device 1800 has been received (S4191). In the present embodiment, the wireless signal transmitting device 1800 constantly transmits a wireless signal including the notification ID at a predetermined timing (for example, an advertisement interval), so that the operation of the wireless signal transmitting device 1800 is performed. The description is omitted.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has not been received (NO in S4191), the reception process is repeated.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has been received (when the determination in S4191 is YES), the application for the notification information management process is started (for example, in the background) (S4192).

Next, the main CPU 1701 decodes the received radio signal to acquire the UUID (S4193). Next, it is determined whether or not the main CPU 1701 is the UUID to be processed (S4194). When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is not the UUID to be processed (when the determination in S4194 is NO), it returns to S4191 and receives the radio signal. In this example, the UUID is set, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing an irrelevant radio signal or a spoofed radio signal. be able to.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is the processing target (when the determination in S4194 is YES), the notification ID is acquired from the decoded radio signal (S4195).

Next, the main CPU 1701 transmits the notification ID acquired from the received signal to the information management server 1100 together with the signal strength (for example, RSSI) and the application ID of the received signal (S4196). Here, the application that executes the notification information management process stores the address of the information management server 1100 and accesses the address, but the gaming machines 1300c and the eighth embodiment of the seventh embodiment have access to the address. Like the gaming machine 1300d of the embodiment, the radio signal may include domain information, and the information management server 1100 may be accessed based on the domain information. Further, when the acquired notification ID is the same as the one acquired last time, the main CPU 1701 may omit the transmission of the above-mentioned notification ID, signal strength, application ID, etc., or at predetermined intervals (for example, every few seconds, number). It can be done at intervals such as every minute.

The application ID is an ID stored in the above-mentioned notification information management processing application, and a different ID is set for each user.

When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the notification ID, the signal strength, and the application ID from the mobile terminal 1700, the notification information management table 1159 is referred to to search for a record of the corresponding notification ID, and further, this record is obtained. When the notification condition of is satisfied, the notification information specified in the record is determined as the notification information to be transmitted (S4197).

In this example, the notification condition is determined based on the member information of the user (for example, the number of points held by the user) and the estimated distance between the mobile terminal 1700 and the wireless signal transmitting device 1800. The number of points can be obtained by referring to the user point table (not shown) based on the received application ID, and the estimated distance can be obtained from the received signal strength.

Next, the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 notifies the mobile terminal 1700 of the determined notification information (S4198). After that, the main CPU 1101 ends the process. The notification information to be transmitted includes, for example, recommended information such as the number of points that is the member information of the user, store visit points that are not member attributes, and information on popular models. Recommended information such as information on popular models can be provided at the hall store, and the manager of the hall store operates the hall management terminal 1600 connected to the information management server 1100, for example, to provide the recommended information and its information. Notification conditions can be entered.

When the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 receives the notification information from the information management server 1100, the main CPU 1701 displays the notification information on the display 1708, for example, in the form of a pop-up screen (S4199). After that, the main CPU 1701 returns to S4191 and receives the radio signal.

In the present embodiment, notification conditions such as the number of points of the user and the estimated distance are set for each received notification ID, but such notification conditions may not be provided and notification may be performed unconditionally. In addition, other notification conditions may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the received notification IDs are the same, the content of the notification information is set to be different according to the notification conditions.

For example, when the wireless signal transmitting devices 1800a and 1800b are arranged above the passage guides 2011-1 and 2011-2 as shown in FIG. 100B, the wireless signal transmitting devices are placed along the respective passage guides. Furthermore, by installing or determining the signal strength of the wireless signal received from a nearby game machine, the user of the mobile terminal 1700 advances in the direction of entering or exiting at the entrance / exit of the hall store. It is possible to determine whether or not the signal is displayed, and different notifications can be given according to the determination result.

<< 11th Embodiment >>
Next, the background technology, problems, effects, configurations, and operations of the information management system according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a plurality of wireless signal transmitting devices 1900 arranged in a hall store transmit a wireless signal, receive it by a mobile terminal 1700, and control wireless communication to perform unidirectional communication or bidirectional communication. Control processing is realized.

<Background technology and issues>
Conventionally, in wireless communication, a standard (protocol) capable of switching between unidirectional communication capable of transmitting data in one direction and bidirectional communication capable of transmitting and receiving data in both directions has been known.

For example, the following patent document proposes an authentication system that switches between a unidirectional communication mode and a two-way communication mode between an authentication key that a user can carry and transmit authentication information and the user's mobile phone. Has been done.
Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-109358

However, the authentication system of the above patent document controls the communication mode in one-to-one communication between the authentication key and the mobile phone, and supports the control of the communication mode in one-to-many communication. No. Further, both of the authentication systems of the above patent documents are premised on communication between an authentication key that can be moved by a user and a mobile phone, and one movable device and a plurality of fixedly installed devices. It does not switch the communication mode between.

<Effect>
The device that is closest to the mobile terminal is dynamically switched to bidirectional communication, and for other devices, one-way communication is continued (or blocked), so as the mobile terminal moves. Therefore, the target devices for bidirectional communication are controlled so as to be sequentially switched, and information from the mobile terminal can be sequentially transmitted to each device.

<System overview>
103 and 104 are diagrams showing an outline of the information management system according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, when a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from a plurality of wireless signal transmitting devices 1900 (1900a, 1900b, 1900c) and the mobile terminal 1700 receives the wireless signal from the wireless signal transmitting device 1900. At that point, unidirectional communication is performed.

Further, when the mobile terminal 1700 receives wireless signals from a plurality of wireless signal transmitting devices 1900 at the same time, it is controlled to perform bidirectional communication with one of the wireless signal transmitting devices 1900. The wireless signal transmission device 1900 incorporates a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) into a sand device 1370 or another peripheral device directly or indirectly connected to the above-mentioned game machines 1300, 1300a to 1300e, or the like. It may be a thing. The wireless signal transmitting device 1900 may be the above-mentioned gaming machines 1300, 1300a to 1300e.

For example, FIG. 103A shows a situation in which three wireless signal transmitting devices 1900 (1900a, 1900b, 1900c) are arranged in a row and the mobile terminal 1700 is moving in the direction of arrow C1. Here, it is assumed that the mobile terminal 1700 can receive only the wireless signal transmitted by the wireless signal transmitting device 1900c.

In this case, the wireless signal transmitting device 1900c and the mobile terminal 1700 perform unidirectional communication, and the mobile terminal 1700 only receives the wireless signal from the wireless signal transmitting device 1900c.

Such a situation in which unidirectional communication is performed corresponds to, for example, an advertising communication method in BLE.

Next, FIG. 103B shows a situation in which the mobile terminal 1700 is further moving in the direction of arrow C1. Here, the mobile terminal 1700 can receive the wireless signal transmitted by the wireless signal transmitting device 1900b and the wireless signal transmitting device 1900c, and the distance between the mobile terminal 1700 and the wireless signal transmitting device 1900c is closer and received. It is assumed that the signal strength of the wireless signal is also the maximum in these two wireless signal transmitters 1900.

In this case, the wireless signal transmitting device 1900c and the mobile terminal 1700 having the shortest distance shift from unidirectional communication to bidirectional communication, and the wireless signal transmitting device 1900b and the mobile terminal 1700 perform unidirectional communication.

The situation in which the transition from unidirectional communication to bidirectional communication is performed as described above corresponds to, for example, in BLE, the situation in which the advertising communication method is changed to the master / slave communication method.

Next, FIG. 103C shows a situation in which the mobile terminal 1700 is further moving in the direction of the arrow C1. Here, the mobile terminal 1700 can receive the wireless signals transmitted by the wireless signal transmitting device 1900a, the wireless signal transmitting device 1900b, and the wireless signal transmitting device 1900c, respectively, and the distance from the mobile terminal 1700 is the wireless signal. It is assumed that the transmitting device 1900b is the closest and the signal strength of the received radio signal is also the maximum among the three radio signal transmitting devices 1900.

In this case, the wireless signal transmitting device 1900b and the mobile terminal 1700 having the shortest distance shift from unidirectional communication to bidirectional communication, and the wireless signal transmitting device 1900c and the mobile terminal 1700 shift from bidirectional communication to unidirectional communication. The wireless signal transmitting device 1900a and the mobile terminal 1700 are unidirectionally communicated.

Next, FIG. 103D shows a situation in which the mobile terminal 1700 is further moving in the direction of arrow C1. Here, the mobile terminal 1700 can receive the wireless signal transmitted by the wireless signal transmitting device 1900a and the wireless signal transmitting device 1900b, and the distance between the mobile terminal 1700 and the wireless signal transmitting device 1900a is closer and received. It is assumed that the signal strength of the wireless signal is also the maximum in these two wireless signal transmitters 1900.

In this case, the wireless signal transmitting device 1900a and the mobile terminal 1700, which are close to each other, shift from unidirectional communication to bidirectional communication, and the wireless signal transmitting device 1900b and the mobile terminal 1700 shift from bidirectional communication to unidirectional communication. The wireless signal transmitting device 1900c and the mobile terminal 1700 end unidirectional communication.

Next, FIG. 104A shows a situation in which the mobile terminal 1700 is further moving in the direction of arrow C1. Here, the mobile terminal 1700 can receive only the wireless signal transmitted by the wireless signal transmitting device 1900a.

In this case, the wireless signal transmitting device 1900a and the mobile terminal 1700 shift from bidirectional communication to unidirectional communication to bidirectional communication, and the wireless signal transmitting device 1900b and the mobile terminal 1700 end unidirectional communication.

Next, FIG. 104B shows a situation in which the mobile terminal 1700 is further moving in the direction of arrow C1. Here, the mobile terminal 1700 has not been able to receive the wireless signals of all the wireless signal transmitting devices 1900.

In this case, the wireless signal transmitting device 1900a and the mobile terminal 1700 end unidirectional communication.

As described above, in the wireless communication control process of the present embodiment, when the wireless signals from the plurality of wireless signal transmitting devices 1900 can be received, for example, the device having the highest signal strength received among them (that is, the most). Bidirectional communication is realized for devices that are presumed to be close to each other, and unidirectional communication is performed for other devices.

<Explanation of wireless communication control processing in information management system>
Next, the wireless communication control process in the mobile terminal 1700 will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing a procedure of wireless communication control processing executed by the mobile terminal 1700.

First, the power of the mobile terminal 1700 is turned on by the user, and the OS of the mobile terminal 1700 and the application automatically started at startup are executed.

Next, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 determines whether or not the wireless signal from the wireless signal transmitting device 1900 has been received (S4211). In addition, in this embodiment, since each of the plurality of wireless signal transmitting devices 1900 constantly transmits a wireless signal at a predetermined timing (for example, an advertisement interval), the description of the operation of the wireless signal transmitting device 1900 is given. Is omitted.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has not been received (NO in S4211), the reception process is repeated.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the wireless signal has been received (when the determination in S4211 is YES), the application for the wireless communication control process is started (for example, in the background) (S4212). Such an application for wireless communication control processing can also be started when the mobile terminal 1700 is started.

Next, the main CPU 1701 decodes the received radio signal to acquire the UUID (S4213). Next, it is determined whether or not the main CPU 1701 is the UUID to be processed (S4214). When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is not the UUID to be processed (when the determination in S4214 is NO), it returns to S4211 and receives the radio signal. In this example, the UUID is set, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing an irrelevant radio signal or a spoofed radio signal. be able to.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is the UUID to be processed (when the determination in S4214 is YES), the signal strength of the received radio signal and the device ID are acquired from the decoded radio signal, and these are associated with each other. Remember (S4215). Here, the device ID is an identifier that can uniquely identify the wireless signal transmitting device 1900. When the wireless signal transmitting device 1900 is the above-mentioned gaming machines 1300, 1300a to 1300e, the gaming machine ID can be used as the device ID.

The device ID stored in this way is deleted when the wireless signal is not received from the device of the device ID for a certain period of time.

Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not there are a plurality of stored device IDs (S4216). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the number of stored device IDs is not plural (when the determination in S4216 is NO), it determines whether or not the stored device ID is 0 (S4222). Here, when the main CPU 1701 determines that the stored device ID is 0 (when the determination in S4222 is NO), since it has not found any wireless signal transmitting device 1900, it returns to S4211 and wirelessly operates. Repeat the signal reception.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the number of stored device IDs is one (when the determination in S4222 is YES), only one wireless signal transmitting device 1900 has been found. It is determined whether or not a plurality of are stored (S4223).

When the main CPU 1701 determines that a plurality of device IDs have been stored up to the previous time (when the determination in S4223 is YES), that is, when the state shown in FIG. 103D shifts to the state shown in FIG. 104A, bidirectional until the previous time. Since communication has been performed, the bidirectional communication connection is closed (S4224). At this time, if the wireless signal transmitting device 1900 requires a communication mode switching request (switching request from bidirectional communication to unidirectional communication), for example, from the mobile terminal 1700 via a wireless network. The information management server 1100 is requested to switch the wireless signal transmission device 1900 corresponding to the device ID, and the information management server 1100 is sent to the target wireless signal transmission device 1900 via the hall computer 1200 or the like of the corresponding hall store. A communication mode switching request is sent. After that, the main CPU 1701 returns to S4211 and repeats the reception of the radio signal.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that a plurality of device IDs are not stored in the previous time (when the determination in S4223 is NO), that is, the communication partner has changed from 0 to 1 or remains 1. , The main CPU 1701 returns to S4211 and repeats the reception of the radio signal.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that there are a plurality of stored device IDs (when the determination in S4216 is YES), the device ID having the closest estimated distance is specified from the signal strength stored in association with the device ID. (S4217). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not a plurality of device IDs have been stored up to the previous time (S4218).

When the main CPU 1701 determines that a plurality of device IDs have been stored up to the previous time (when the determination in S4218 is YES), the main CPU 1701 has the device ID specified this time and the device ID for which bidirectional communication has been established last time. It is determined whether they are the same (S4219). Here, when the main CPU 1701 determines that the device ID specified this time and the device ID for which bidirectional communication has been established last time are the same (when the determination in S4219 is YES), in this case, bidirectional communication is performed. Since there is no change in the communication target, no special processing is performed, and the process returns to S4211 to repeat the reception of the radio signal.

When the main CPU 1701 determines that the device ID specified this time and the device ID for which bidirectional communication has been established last time are not the same (when S4219 is NO determination), that is, the partner performing bidirectional communication is changed. Therefore, the bidirectional communication connection is closed with respect to the previous bidirectional communication (S4220). This situation corresponds to, for example, the transition situation represented by FIGS. 103B to 103D. At this time, if the wireless signal transmitting device 1900 requires a communication mode switching request (switching request from bidirectional communication to unidirectional communication), for example, from the mobile terminal 1700 via a wireless network. The information management server 1100 is requested to switch the wireless signal transmission device 1900 corresponding to the device ID, and the information management server 1100 is sent to the target wireless signal transmission device 1900 via the hall computer 1200 or the like of the corresponding hall store. A communication mode switching request is sent.

After the processing of S4220, or when it is determined that a plurality of device IDs are not stored until the previous time (when the determination in S4218 is NO), the main CPU 1701 is used between the device with the device ID specified this time and the mobile terminal 1700. A process for establishing a forward communication connection (two-way communication session) is performed (S4221). For example, when switching such communication modes based on the BLE standard, in the first unidirectional communication situation, the wireless signal transmitter 1900 is in the state "Advertising" and the mobile terminal 1700 is in the state "Scanning". When shifting to the forward communication mode, the mobile terminal 1700 shifts the state to "Scanning"-> "Standby"-> "Initiating", where bidirectional communication is performed on the advertisement packet from the wireless signal transmitter 1900. Send a response to do. As a result, the mobile terminal 1700 transitions from the state "Initiating" to "Connection (master)", and the wireless signal transmitting device 1900 transitions from the state "Advertising" to "Connection (slave)", where bidirectional communication is performed. It will be realized.

At this time, if the wireless signal transmitting device 1900 requires a communication mode switching request (switching request from unidirectional communication to bidirectional communication), for example, from the mobile terminal 1700 via a wireless network. The information management server 1100 is requested to switch the wireless signal transmission device 1900 corresponding to the device ID, and the information management server 1100 is sent to the target wireless signal transmission device 1900 via the hall computer 1200 or the like of the corresponding hall store. A communication mode switching request is sent. After that, the main CPU 1701 returns to S4211 and repeats the reception of the radio signal.

By such wireless communication control processing, when wireless signals are received from a plurality of wireless signal transmitting devices 1900, bidirectional communication is realized between the wireless signal transmitting device 1900 estimated to be the closest and the mobile terminal 1700. As the mobile terminal 1700 moves, the bidirectional communication connection can be dynamically transferred.

Further, in the present embodiment, the other party of the two-way communication is one device having the shortest distance, but it is also possible to use two-way communication for a plurality of devices, and other than the criterion of the short distance. Various standards can be set. In addition, the criteria for identifying such a two-way communication partner can be changed according to time and circumstances.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of wireless communication partners (wireless signal transmitting device 1900) becomes one, the bidirectional communication connection is closed, but the bidirectional communication connection is directly connected to the wireless signal. It can also be maintained until it can no longer be received.

Further, when the number of wireless communication partners changes from 2 to 1 (transition status shown in FIGS. 103D and 104A), or when the number of wireless communication partners changes from 0 to 1 (in FIG. 103A). For each of the situations shown), it is possible to set how to make a two-way communication connection. For example, when the number of wireless communication partners changes from 0 to 1, the communication is shifted to bidirectional communication, and when the number of wireless communication partners changes from 2 to 1, the communication is unidirectional communication. It can be controlled to remain (or shift to unidirectional communication).

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the wireless signal transmitting device 1900 having the shortest distance from the mobile terminal 1700 is dynamically switched to bidirectional communication, and the other wireless signal transmitting device 1900 is used. Since one-way communication is continued (or cut off), as the mobile terminal 1700 moves, the wireless signal transmitting device 1900, which is the target of two-way communication, is controlled to be sequentially switched, whereby the mobile terminal is controlled. Information from 1700 can be sequentially transmitted to each radio signal transmitting device 1900. Further, by such dynamic switching, the information received from the wireless signal transmitting device 1900 closest to (or other specific) the mobile terminal 1700 is transferred to the next closest device as the mobile terminal 1700 moves. It can be controlled to transmit the information to and from the plurality of wireless signal transmitting devices 1900 one after another (using the mobile terminal 1700 as an intermediate medium) as the mobile terminal 1700 moves. It can be controlled as it goes.

As described above, with respect to the first to eleventh embodiments, it has been described that the information such as the gaming machine ID is transmitted to the mobile terminal 1700 by mainly transmitting the beacon signal based on the BLE standard. Transmission is just one example. By receiving the wireless signal transmitted based on another wireless communication standard on the mobile terminal 1700, it can be configured to have the same effect as that shown with respect to the first to eleventh embodiments.

<< 12th Embodiment >>
Next, the configuration and operation of the information management system according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, one or more wireless signal transmitting devices 1950 arranged in the hall store transmit a wireless signal, and the position of the mobile terminal 1700 is estimated by receiving the wireless signal at the mobile terminal 1700. Determine the status of the mobile terminal 1700, such as whether it is closest to the game machine.

<System overview>
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an outline of an information management system according to a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, when a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from the wireless signal transmitting device 1950 and the mobile terminal 1700 receives the wireless signal from the wireless signal transmitting device 1950, the wireless signal is identified. The signal ID (for example, beacon ID) and the signal strength at the time of reception (for example, RSSI) are transmitted to the information management server 1100. After that, the information management server 1100 estimates the position of the mobile terminal 1700 based on the received data, and further, the mobile terminal 1700 is in the position closest to which gaming machine and which notification should be transmitted. Is determined.

Using such a system configuration, in the privilege management process of the eighth embodiment, the AR display management process of the ninth embodiment, and the notification information management process of the tenth embodiment, the mobile terminal 1700 is a game machine 1300d, respectively. Instead of receiving the wireless signal from the game machine 1300e and the wireless signal transmitting device 1800, the wireless signal can be received from the wireless signal transmitting device 1950 shown in FIG. 106 to realize the same processing.

For example, the information management server 1100 estimates the position of the mobile terminal 1700 from the signal ID of the wireless signal from the wireless signal transmitting device 1950 received by the mobile terminal 1700 and the signal strength at the time of reception, and is based on the estimated position. It detects that it has approached the gaming machine 1300d or the gaming machine 1300e, identifies the gaming machine ID (see FIGS. 91 and 95) corresponding to these gaming machines, and performs the above processing (that is, the privilege management processing, AR display management processing) is realized.

Further, the information management server 1100 estimates the position of the mobile terminal 1700 from the signal ID of the wireless signal from the wireless signal transmitting device 1950 received by the mobile terminal 1700 and the signal strength at the time of reception, and corresponds to the estimated position. The above processing (that is, notification information management processing) is realized by obtaining the notification ID (see FIG. 99) to be performed and transmitting the notification information corresponding to the notification ID to the mobile terminal 1700.

<Overview of wireless signal transmitter and virtual beacon>
The radio signal transmitter 1950 uses a directional (or movable) antenna to transmit a plurality of radio signals (eg, a BLE beam transmitted by a BLE module). The BLE beam is generated by, for example, a beamforming function that intensively emits radio waves in a specific direction. Further, in the present embodiment, the directional antenna can also realize bidirectional communication for receiving a signal from the mobile terminal.

The BLE module of the wireless signal transmitting device 1950 is configured to include, for example, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and a BLE chip. The CPU receives the data to be transmitted and controls the BLE chip so that the received data is transmitted as a radio signal (for example, a beacon signal). The ROM stores programs and other data for realizing the above-mentioned operation of the CPU. The RAM temporarily stores the above-mentioned received data and other necessary data. The BLE chip transmits the received data as a wireless signal via the antenna (in a predetermined direction) under the control of the CPU.

By realizing bidirectional communication by the wireless signal transmitting device 1950, the signal ID, signal strength, application ID, and the like of the wireless signal received by the mobile terminal 1700 can be obtained in the information management server 1100 as shown in FIG. 106. It is received by the radio signal transmitting device 1950. Further, when the wireless signal transmitting device 1950 is connected to the information management server 1100 via a wired network or a wireless network, as a result, information such as a signal ID from the mobile terminal 1700 is provided to the information management server 1100. NS.

The wireless signal transmitting device 1950 is installed, for example, on the ceiling of a hall store or the like, and transmits wireless signals associated with different signal IDs toward a plurality of surrounding directions. In the example of the wireless signal transmitting device 1950 shown in FIG. 107, eight signals (signals having signal IDs indicated by 19050a to 1950h) are transmitted in eight different directions, and for example, one of the layouts of the hall store shown in FIG. It covers the area of the part (island 2035, island 2036). In FIG. 107, the situation in which each radio signal propagates radially in each direction is shown by a fan-shaped figure, but these figures are notations for convenience to represent the propagation image, and the arc of each figure. The part does not indicate the radio wave reach of the radio signal or the position of the same signal strength, and the straight line representing the radius of each figure strictly represents the radiation angle (transverse propagation range) of the radio signal. Not at all.

Further, if there is a wireless signal transmitting device 1950 that covers the entire floor of the hall store with one unit, the wireless signal transmitting device 1950 may be arranged near the center of the floor, but if not, a plurality of wireless devices may be arranged. The signal transmitting devices 1950 may be arranged at a plurality of positions on the floor to cover the entire floor.

Further, for example, when one or a plurality of wireless signal transmitting devices 1950 are devices that transmit a plurality of beacon signals based on the BLE standard, the range of the floor where the beacon signal does not reach is covered by another wireless signal (for example,). , Signals based on wireless LAN standards (IEEE802.11, etc.)), and as a result, the entire floor may be configured to be covered by wireless signals.

In the situation shown in FIG. 107, when the mobile terminal 1700 receives a wireless signal from the wireless signal transmitting device 1950 (in this example, a wireless signal having a signal ID of 1950d to 1950f), the mobile terminal 1700 receives, for example, a wireless LAN. Accesses the information management server 1100 and transmits the signal ID, the signal strength of the received wireless signal, and the application ID to the information management server 1100. In this example, the signal intensities of the respective radio signals represented by the signal ID = 1950d, the signal ID = 1950e, and the signal ID = 1950f are transmitted in association with the signal ID. Further, although the accuracy of position estimation is lowered, the signal ID of one radio signal and the signal strength thereof may be transmitted.

When the information management server 1100 receives the signal ID, the signal strength, and the application ID from the mobile terminal 1700, the information management server 1100 receives these data, the arrangement position of the information management server 1100 in the hall store, and the transmission direction of the radio signal corresponding to the signal ID. From, the position of the mobile terminal 1700 in the hall store is estimated.

Further, the information management server 1100 grasps the arrangement positions of the gaming machines 1300d and the gaming machines 1300e in the hall store (for example, the map information table 1153 in FIG. 63), and the estimated positions of the mobile terminal 1700 and their position information. Therefore, it is possible to grasp which gaming machine the mobile terminal 1700 is closest to. Such a determination can be realized at a timing close to real time.

By the processing of the information management server 1100 described above, for example, in the eighth embodiment, the mobile terminal 1700 does not receive the game machine ID and the total number of games from each game machine 1300d, and the wireless signal transmission device 1950. By receiving the radio signal from, it can be configured to determine which gaming machine 1300d played the game and update the privilege management table 1157. In the present embodiment, although information such as the total number of games played to confirm that the game has been played is not received, the mobile terminal 1700 is closer to the game machine 1300d for a predetermined time or more, or is closer than the closest position. When it is determined that the game is in the position where the game is played, it can be determined that the game has been played on the gaming machine 1300d.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the information management server 1100 receives the wireless signal from the wireless signal transmitting device 1950 without the mobile terminal 1700 receiving the gaming machine ID from the respective gaming machines 1300e. Determines which game machine 1300e is approached, and based on the game machine ID of the approaching game machine 1300e and the contents of the AR display management table 1158, a display for displaying AR on the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700. The mark and the display mode can be determined and transmitted to the mobile terminal 1700.

Further, the information management server 1100 grasps the road in front of the hall store and the position of the entrance / exit of the hall store, and from the estimated position of the mobile terminal 1700 and these position information, the mobile terminal 1700 is in front of the hall store. It is possible to grasp the positional relationship with the road and the entrance / exit of the hall store at a timing close to real time.

By such processing of the information management server 1100, for example, in the tenth embodiment, the mobile terminal 1700 transmits a wireless signal without receiving a notification ID from the wireless signal transmitting device 1800 or the wireless signal transmitting device 1900. By receiving the radio signal from the device 1950, the position of the mobile terminal 1700 (for example, how close to the road in front of the hall store or the entrance / exit of the hall store) is determined, and the determination result is used. Based on the contents of the notification information management table 1159, the notification information for notifying the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700 can be determined and transmitted to the mobile terminal 1700.

Further, when the mobile terminal 1700 receives the wireless signal from the wireless signal transmitting device 1950 (for example, at intervals of 1 second or less), the user of the mobile terminal 1700 proceeds in the direction of entering at the entrance / exit of the hall store. It is possible to determine whether the user is present or moving in the direction of exit, and different notifications can be given according to the determination result.

1,1', 1'' ... Pachislot 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel 4 ... Reel display window 5 ... Lock 6 ... Information display 11 ... Display device 17L, 17C, 17R ... Stop button 18 ... Sub display device 47, 447, 547 ... External centralized terminal board 49, 449, 549 ... BLE module 49a, 449a, 549a ... CPU
49b, 449b, 549b ... ROM
49c, 449c, 549c ... RAM
49d, 449d, 549d ... BLE chip 71 ... Main control board 72 ... Sub control board 90 ... Main control circuit 91 ... Microprocessor 95 ... Role ratio monitor 101 ... Main CPU
102 ... Main ROM
103 ... Main RAM
107 ・ ・ ・ Calculation circuit 114 ・ ・ ・ First serial communication circuit 200 ・ ・ ・ Sub control circuit 201 ・ ・ ・ Sub CPU
300 ... Data display device 1001 ... Information management system 1100 ... Information management server 1200 ... Hall computer 1300, 1300a, 1300b, 1300c, 1300d, 1300e ... Game machine 1350 ... Data display device 1370 ・ ・ ・ Sand device 1400 ・ ・ ・ Shimabata counting device 1500 ・ ・ ・ POS
1600 ... Hall management terminal 1800, 1800a, 1800b ... Wireless signal transmitter 1900, 1900a, 1900b, 1900c, 1950 ... Wireless signal transmitter

Claims (3)

A wireless signal receiving means for receiving a signal transmitted by wireless communication from the device, and
A gaming machine information acquisition means for acquiring gaming machine identification information for identifying a gaming machine associated with the device from a signal received by the wireless signal receiving means.
The game machine identification information acquired by the wireless signal receiving means is stored in a server together with the hall store identification information capable of identifying the hall store in which the game machine is arranged so that the game machine can be managed for each hall store. the portable terminal to obtain Bei a gaming machine information transmitting means for transmitting to,
The wireless signal receiving means is a mobile terminal capable of sequentially receiving the signals from a plurality of the devices by moving the mobile terminal. Mobile terminal,
A wireless signal receiving means for receiving a signal transmitted by wireless communication from a device,
A gaming machine information acquisition means for acquiring gaming machine identification information for identifying a gaming machine associated with the device from a signal received by the wireless signal receiving means, and a gaming machine information acquisition means.
The game machine identification information acquired by the wireless signal receiving means is stored in a server together with the hall store identification information capable of identifying the hall store in which the game machine is arranged so that the game machine can be managed for each hall store. It is a program that functions as a means of transmitting game machine information to be transmitted to
The radio signal receiving means is a program characterized in that the signals from a plurality of the devices can be sequentially received by moving the mobile terminal. A device that transmits signals by wireless communication,
An information management system that includes a server that receives information about gaming machines from mobile terminals.
The device transmits game machine identification information for identifying the game machine associated with the device by the wireless communication.
When the server receives the gaming machine identification information transmitted by the apparatus from the mobile terminal together with the hall store identification information capable of identifying the hall store in which the gaming machine is located, the server stores the gaming machine in the hall store. In order to manage each, the gaming machine identification information, the hall store identification information, and the date and time information are associated with each other and stored in the storage means.
The mobile terminal is an information management system characterized in that the signals from a plurality of the devices can be sequentially received by moving the mobile terminal.

Images